Home

User`s Manual

1. Description The Certificates snap in allows you to browse the contents of the certificate stores for yourself a service or a computer OK Cancel J For Windows XP click Add to display the list and then select Certificates The Certificates snap in dialog box appears 4 Select Computer account and click Next g Certificates snap in This snapin will always manage certificates for My user account Service account 1 Computer account The Select Computer dialog box appears 358 Installing Certificates for a Client PC 5 Select Local computer the computer this console is running on and click Finish Select Computer Select the computer you want this snap in to manage This snap in will always manage Local computer the computer this console is running on ag computer Browse E Allow the selected computer to be changed when launching from the command line This only applies if you save the console The Select Computer dialog box is closed Make sure that Certificates Local Computer is added under the Console Root folder click OK Add or Remove Snap ins ete You can select snap ins for this console from those available on your computer and configure the selected set of snap ins For extensible snap ins you can configure which extensions are enabled Available snap ins Selected snap ins
2. 1 Save as Local HDD Select whether to enable or disable the function to save on the local HDD 2 e Filing Select whether to enable or disable the e Filing function 3 Email Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to transmit E mails 4 Save as FIP Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using FTP 5 Save as FIPS Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using FTPS 6 Save to USB Media Select whether to enable or disable the use of USB media 7 Save as SMB Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using SMB 8 Save as Netware Select whether to enable or disable the function to save using Netware 9 iFax Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to send Internet Faxes 10 Fax Send Select whether to enable or disable the function to send faxes 11 Network iFax Select whether to enable or disable the network iFax function 12 Network Fax Select whether to enable or disable the network fax function 13 Web Services Scan Select whether to enable or disable the web scanning service function 14 Twain Scanning Select whether to enable or disable the Twain scanning function 15 Scan to External Controller Select whether to enable or disable the function to scan to an external controller LI Long File Name Setting The control panel of this equipment may not be able to fully display a file name when the name is long for exam
3. O O S None El IPCOMP Transform IP Filter Move Up Move Down Move Fiter Name Filter Action Destination Address ojm test01 Negotiate Security Any IP Address Modify Profile OK Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings P rifle Name TESTO1 UNNe Settings Tunnel mode Yes v IPv4 IPv6 Address 192 168 1 1 Key Selection Key TESTOV IKEv1 v Proposals ESP Transforms AH Transforms Session Key Settings integrity arty T sHat F z remma E aes 256 cBc mae mos E Aes 192 cBc mos E aes xcac M AES 128 CBC E aes xcac KBytes F AES cTR W 3DES cBC E Generate a new key after 3600 Seconds DES CBC None El IPCOMP Transform IP Filter Move Up Move Down Move Fiter Name Fitter Action Destination Address y te egotiate Security ny ress IW testO1 Negotiate S it Any IP Add Item name Description OK button Saves the profile setting Cancel button Cancels registration of the profile Reset button Returns the settings to the defaults 180 Setup Item List Item name Profile Name Description Enter the profile name You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters including hyphen and underscore _ Tip Up to 30 profiles can be created Tunnel Settin
4. Snap in Vendor ma Console Root Edit Extensions e Certificates Local Computer gt F ActiveX Control Microsoft Cor Ed Authorization Manager Microsoft Cor GF certificates Microsoft Cor 2 Component Services Microsoft Cor E Computer Managem Microsoft Cor gee Device Manager Microsoft Cor f Disk Management Microsoft and 8 Event Viewer Microsoft Cor Folder Microsoft Cor 3 Group Policy Manag Microsoft Cor LZ Group Policy Object Microsoft Cor IP Security Monitor Microsoft Cor Ip Security Policy M Microsoft Cor Peene Remove Description The Certificates snap in allows you to browse the contents of the certificate stores for yourself a service or a computer 7 Save the setting F Console Console Root lm File Action View Favorites Window Help es 0L LA Console Root Name z G Certificates Local Computer G Certificates Local Computer Personal Trusted Root Certification Authorities Enterprise Trust Intermediate Certification Authorities Trusted Publishers Untrusted Certificates Third Party Root Certification Authorities Trusted People Smart Card Trusted Roots Installing Certificates fora Client PC 359 Importing certificates to a client PC The following describes an import on Windows Vista The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows ar
5. Paper Displays the paper size of the print jobs Logs Tab Page Overview Item name Pages Description Displays the number of pages of the print job Sets Displays the number of copies set for print jobs Status Displays the status of the print log User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the print job LJ Transmission Journal Domain Name LDAP Server Tip Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the owner of the print job Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print log list in the specified order The Transmission Journal page displays the following information for each transmission journal Device Job Status View Logs Transmission Journal Print Log Transmission Journal Rece e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration Log Settings stion Journal Scan Log Message Log No Eile No y Date Time Durat ion Pases TolName pag Item name Description 1 No Displays the serial number of the journals 2 File No Displays the file number to identify the received job 3 Date Time Displays the date and time the transmission job was performed 4 Duration Displays the time length taken for the transmissions If it takes more than 1 hour 59 59 is indicated 5 Pages Displays the number
6. Server Registration Setting IW 2 Server Address ee 1 5 Click OK Windows Internet Explorer msm Are you sure Cancel The server is deleted 6 Click Save on the EWB submenu 244 Setup How to Set and How to Operate W Setting up Off Device Customization Architecture settings For the details of ODCA Off Device Customization Architecture contact your service representative or your service technician You can configure ODCA Off Device Customization Architecture from the ODCA submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after changing them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the Off Device Customization Architecture settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and ODCA submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration R2 The ODCA submenu page is displayed In the ODCA submenu page set the Off Device Customization Architecture settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup ecurit faintenance Registration Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Pri
7. User01 example com Address DisplayName005 YYYY MM DD be 1 0 Click the Save button to register the template The template for Meta Scan is registered Setting up Meta Scan Function 353 E Meta Scan You can run Meta Scan using a Meta Scan template For the operational procedure refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Tip If Extended Field Definition set in Extended Field Settings in the Meta Scan template is deleted the default XML format file lt defaultForm3 xml gt is used WE Checking logs of Meta Scan You can check the scan log to confirm if meta data has been correctly created Check the following items in the scan log Check Item Description Mode Displays MSxxxx xxxx is in the code format to indicate Meta Scan Status Meta data is correctly created if no errors are displayed See the following for details of the scan log P 41 Scan Log 354 Setting up Meta Scan Function Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP When the external authentication Windows domain authentication and LDAP authentication is enabled associating the role defined in this equipment with the attribute of the external authentication server is required in order to log in the equipment from an external authentication server as an administrator The role can be associated with the equipment by importing the role information setting file in this
8. Save as file Setting Specify how the document is saved on your computer hard disk or a network folder This can be set only when creating a Save as file agent P 85 Save as file Setting Mailbox Box Setting Specify how the document is saved in a mailbox This can be set only when creating a Store to e Filing agent P 85 Box Setting Mailbox After configuring the desired mailbox properties click Save The mailbox properties are registered Registration How to Set and How to Operate 101 5 Registration Tab Page 102 Registration How to Set and How to Operate Counter Tab Page This chapter explains the Counter tab page in TopAccess Counter Tab Page Overview sxieisicsisiorierensathin vata rnactrea ea ueni dee ae ee eee 104 PC OUTED tems ai tancec A coes eats a Gh hac a leah oie a a eaheead a oe 8 el casera 2 104 Counter How to Set and How to Operate cccccscceseceseeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeceseseneeeesenseceeseneseneees 110 110 Viewing COUN ONS ertora ne tovas do era K aaa aa onan awuee nousudoua cael uauehaasiinds Cand ia aa EA RTR Counter Tab Page Overview You can check the number of pages printed copied and scanned in the Counter tab page P 104 Counter Item list W Counter Item list LL P 104 Total Count screen P 106 Department Management screen BA LI P 106 Department Counter screen lt access policy mode gt LL P 107 Dep
9. 154 Setup Item List Item name Description Primary Domain Controller Specify the server name or IP address of the primary domain controller when this equipment will log on the domain network You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Backup Domain Controller Specify the server name or IP address of the backup domain controller when this equipment will log on the domain network if required If the Primary Domain Controller is unavailable the Backup Domain Controller will be used to log on You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash If the wrong primary or backup domain controller is specified the NETWORK INITIALIZING message will be displayed for up to 4 minutes while the equipment searches for the primary or backup domain controller In that case correct the primary or backup domain controller setting after the NETWORK INITIALIZING message disappears Logon User Name Enter a valid user name to log on to the specified domain You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and Password Enter the password for the specified log on user name to log on the domain network You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Primary WINS Server Specify the IP address of the pri
10. Cancel button Cancels the group registration Reset button Resets the contents Delete button Deletes the displayed group Group Name Enter the group name You can enter up to 20 characters ID Displays the registered ID of the contact Email Select the check box to register E mail address into the group when the contact has E mail information Fax Select the check box to register fax number into the group when the contact has fax number information Name Displays the last name and first name registered to the contact Email Address Displays the E mail address registered to the contact Fax Number Displays the fax number registered to the contact Registration Tab Page Overview E Inbound FAX routing Item list ITU T communications function between fax devices with ITU T support and enable fax transmission to and retrieval from mailboxes The type of mailboxes for ITU T communications must be set in advance to either confidential bulletin board or forward You can specify a password on any mailbox to secure confidentiality e Mailboxes can be managed only when the Fax Unit is installed e The Internet Fax Relay agent cannot be used to forward an inbound fax routed via Inbound FAX Routing Tip Mailboxes can be managed using the control panel LL P 81 Inbound FAX routing screen LL P 82 MailBox Properties screen LJ P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox
11. User s Manual TopAccess Guide Preface Thank you for purchasing Multifunctional Digital Systems This manual describes remote setup and remote management which operated from the web based management utility TopAccess Read this manual before using your Multifunctional Digital Systems Keep this manual within easy reach and use it to configure an environment that makes the best use of the functions Operations on some items are restricted depending on the privileges assigned to the TopAccess user This manual supports the following models MB760dnfax MB770dn MB770dnfax MB770dfnfax ES7170dn MFP ES7170dfn MFP MB760 MB770 MB770f MPS5502mb MPS5502mbf E How to read this manual LJ Symbols in this manual In this manual some important items are described with the symbols shown below Be sure to read these items before using this equipment AN WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death serious injury or serious damage or fire in the equipment or surrounding objects A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury partial damage to the equipment or surrounding objects or loss of data Indicates information to which you should pay attention when operating the equipment Other than the above this manual also describes information that may be useful for the operation of this equipment with the
12. ccccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 9 TOPACCESS Overview 2 ccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeaeeneaeeeeees 8 TopAccess screen descriptions ecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 21 TOC OUN sanra A 104 Transmission Journal ccecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeneees 39 U User Accounts Item list ccccccecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaenes 114 User Counter assena a a aaa 108 User Information ccccccececceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 109 118 User Management Tab cccccecceeceeseeeeceeeeeeeesenes 113 User Management Tab Page Overview 000000 114 USNO 1 ee eee een A E A 355 Using the attribute of the external authentication as a role of the MEP srenti etl tanmaieaatione seataeet alee aaeatieamamedubeece 355 V Variables of XML format files cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 343 Version erea aa wonueatenenne Saaewtanae ties 214 View Logs dltem lISt scictsticect al esez seuss n a aai 38 Viewing Counters s sensiesnonunnnnnrnnnnrernrrnrnrrnrnrnrrnnne 110 W When setting multiple roles to one attribute 355 When setting one role to multiple attributes 356 When setting one role to one attribute eee 355 Windows Domain Authentication cccceeeeeeeeeees 250 With Unidentified Network Windows 7 0ccseeeeeeee 15 X XML Fompat Fle ee ee ee ee 321 368 Index Oki Data Corporation 4 11 22 Shibaura Minato ku Tokyo 108 8551
13. 20 322 8 Administration Tab Page Setup Item List Tip Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the Setup menu from the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it P 22 Access Policy Mode P 136 General settings P 143 Network settings P 183 Copier settings LJ P 186 Fax settings P 189 Save as File settings P 198 Email settings P 200 InternetFax settings P 201 Printer e Filing settings P 202 Printer settings P 206 Print Service settings P 210 Print Data Converter settings P 211 Embedded Web Browser settings P 213 Off Device Customization Architecture settings P 214 Version BBBB BBBBBBBBBEB WE General settings You can configure the general settings such as device information energy save date and time and web general setting Tip The General submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu P 22 Access Policy Mode P 136 Setup Item List M P 137 Setting up Device Information LL P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting L P 138 Setting up Functions LX P 140 Setting up Energy Save LL P 138 Long File Name Setting LL P 140 Setting up Date amp Time
14. My Account Tab Page Overview 337 LJ Menu Setting screen You can set the menu screen of the user who is accessing TopAccess The menu screen is displayed by pressing the Menu button on the control panel You can register frequently used templates and template groups and External Interface Enabler shortcuts Menu Setting Gloses Delete ELEELE Close button Closes the Menu Setting screen Delete button Deletes the selected menu settings No The numbers of the menu setting are displayed Tip In the menu settings you can register 64 types Name The templates registered in the menu settings or the registered names of the External Interface Enabler are displayed Click a registered name to check and edit a registered menu setting LL P 339 Select Template Group screen LL P 340 Select URL screen Click Undefined to register a new menu setting LL P 338 Select Menu Type screen The menu setting type is displayed LJ Select Menu Type screen Select a menu type to add to the menu screen Select Menu Type Please select a menu type Item name Description Template button Adds a template to the menu P 339 Select Template Group screen Extension button Adds an External Interface Enabler URL to the menu P 340 Select URL screen 338 My Account Tab Page Overview LJ Select Te
15. ina 4 Save button Saves the registered language Q Setting up Install Language Pack Install Language Pack Item name Description File Name Select the language pack file to be installed Browse button Allows you to select the language pack file Import button Imports the selected language pack file Maintenance Item List LJ Setting up Current Language Pack List Displays a list of installed language packs You can delete unnecessary language packs Current Language Pack List Delete I Name Version ial English US o FFE DEC 17 00 00 00 2010 English GB FFE DEC 17 00 00 00 2010 DEC 15 17 50 00 2010 Bfe m e EE REPI THU DEC 15 18 00 00 2010 Item name Description Delete button Select unnecessary language packs and click the Delete button to delete them Tip You cannot delete English US or the language selected in PanelUl Language Name Displays the name of the language pack Version Displays the version of the language pack Date Displays the installed date of the language pack LI Setting up Default Setting for PanelUl Select the display language for the touch panel Default Setting for PanelUl 1 Parnell Language English US fez 2 PanelUl Keyboard Layout QWERTY x Item name Description 1 PanelUl Language Select the display
16. File No Displays the file number 001 to 100 to identify the fax transmission job TO Name Displays the destination name set for the fax transmission job TO Fax No Email Displays the fax number or E mail address of the destination Date Time Displays the date and time when the fax transmission job is released from the touch panel or client computer using the N W Fax driver They are displayed using year month day hour minute and second For example 2012 12 24 12 34 56 Pages Displays the number of pages of the fax transmission job Delay Time Displays the delayed time set for the fax transmission job Status Displays the status of the fax transmission job Possible values of status are Delayed Wait Line1 Line2 and Network User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the fax transmission job Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the owner of the fax transmission job Tips e Transmission jobs that have finished their transmission are displayed in the Logs tab e Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order 32 Job Status Tab Page Overview W Scan Job Item list The Scan Job page displays the following information for each scan job e Filing Login Device Job Status Registration Counter Prini FaxilnternetFax Scan Job TOf
17. LL P 223 Deleting SNMP V3 user information Enable SNMP V3 Trap Select whether SNMP V3 Trap is sent or not Disable is set as the default SNMP V3 Trap User Name Enter an SNMP V3 Trap User Name You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Protocol Select an authentication protocol e HMAC MD5 Select this to use HMAC MD5 e HMAC SHA Select this to use HMAC SHA SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Password Enter an authentication password You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Protocol Select a protocol for data encryption e None Select this not to encrypt data e CBC DES Select this to use CBC DES e CFB AES 128 Select this to use AES 128 CFB mode SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Password Enter a privacy password You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols Enable Authentication Trap Select whether to send SNMP Traps when this equipment is accessed using SNMP V1 V2 from a different read community Enable is set as the default Enable Alerts Trap Select whether to send SNMP V1 V2 Traps when an alert condition occurs Enable is set as the default IP Trap Address 1 to 10 Enter the IP address where the SNMP Traps will be sent You can specify up to 10 addresses Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IP Trap Community
18. Manual Key Name Encryption Algorithm Hash Algorithm Nbhound Key Security Parameter Index SP should be between 256 and 4095 ESP Encryption Key ESP Authentication Key 12345678901 234567890 AH Authentication Key 12345675901254567690 Outbound Key Security Parameter Index 300 SP should be between 256 and 4095 ESP Encryption Key ESP Authentication Key 12345676901234567890 AH Authentication Key 12345678901234567890 Item name Description OK button Saves the key setting Cancel button Cancels registration of the key Reset button Returns the settings to the defaults Manual Key Name Enter the name of the manual key You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp backslash apostrophe semicolon comma and Encryption Algorithm Select an encryption algorithm e None Select this not to perform data encryption e AES 256 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 256 bits e AES 192 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 192 bits AES 128 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 128 bits e 3DES CBC Select this to use 3DES CBC e DES CBC Select this to use DES CBC Hash Algorithm Select a hash algorithm e SHA1 Select this to use SHA1 e MD5 Select this to use MD5 e AES XCBC MAC Select this to use AES XCBC MAC Setup Item List Item name Description Inbound Key Select a key for the receiving s
19. 14 BCC Address Display Select whether or not to display the BCC address entry column e ON Select this to display the BCC address entry column e OFF Select this not to display the BCC address entry column 15 From Address cannot be edited in Scan to Email Select this item to prohibit modification of the From Address Setup Item List 199 W InternetFax settings You can specify Internet Fax settings This section describes necessary settings for Internet Fax transmissions Tip The InternetFax submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Q Setting up InternetFax Setting You can specify the fragment page size and default body strings that apply to the Internet Faxes InternetFax Setting 1 From Address User1 example com 2 fron Name Useri 3 Message Header Inbound FAX Routing Received from Sender s TSI Received by Receiver s CSI Number of Retry 3 4 5 Retry interval 1 Minutes 6 T7 Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v es Default Body Strings i Body Str
20. DATE Scanned date YYYY MM DD YEAR Scanned year YYYY MONTH Scanned month MM DAY Scanned day DD TIME Scanned time HH MM DD mmmTZD 3 USER Login user name string DOMAIN Login user s domain name string DEPTCODE Login department code string DEPTNAME Login department name string TEMPGROUPNO Template group number string Setting up Meta Scan Function 343 Variable variable name TEMPGROUPNAME Data to be stored Template group name string Value TEMPGROUPUSER Template group user string TEMPNO Template number string TEMPNAME Template name string TEMPUSER Template user string FIELDNAMEn 4 Extended field name string FIELDNAMEn 4 Extended field name It cannot be used for the subject of E mail 2 It cannot be used for the file name of image files or the file name of meta data 3 TZD is Time zone 4 A field number from 1 to 25 comes at n For details refer to the next chapter 344 Setting up Meta Scan Function string Q Default XML file format Contents of the default XML format file lt defaultForm3 xmlI gt registered in this equipment are shown below XML format files must be in the UTF 8 XML format During the Meta Scan operation the equipment stores information corresponding to the variable in each field of the XML format file and attaches it as meta data in the XML format
21. Role Assignment screen 122 User Management Tab Page Overview E Role Management Item list lt access policy mode gt You can manage and register roles if you are logged in to the access policy mode L9 P 123 Default roles and privileges LL P 125 Create New Role screen LL P 127 Edit Role screen e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Role Management Role Management Role Name New button Allows you to add a new role P 125 Create New Role screen Delete button Deletes the role selected in the role list However you cannot delete the default roles Role Name Displays the role name For more information on default roles see the following LU P 123 Default roles and privileges You can check role information by clicking the role name LL P 127 Edit Role screen LI Default roles and privileges The following table describes privileges granted to default roles The functions listed in Privileges and Permitted operations functions below are displayed in 6 Function list on the Create New Role screen P 125 Create New Role screen Default role names Privileges Permitted operations functions Administrator Scan Function 1 Store to e Filing e Filing e Filing Access e Filing Deletion Device Setting Devic
22. SCAN TO Panel 4 S fre Notification OFF Single Black 200dpi Text Auto Auto O 0 0 O 0 0 0 OFF OFF The Template Properties page to select agents is displayed Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 323 6 Select agents to be combined and click Select Agent Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup security Maintenance Registration Public Template Template Properties _ Copy Fax InternetFax 3 C Meta Scan Email Save as file Store to e Filing Save to USB Media E Scan lt q You can select one of the following templates Copy Creates a copy agent This agent can copy documents Usually this is selected to print copies as well as sending originals to other destinations This agent can also be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing agent Fax InternetFax You can create a template for fax or Internet Fax transmission This agent can be combined with the Save as file agent Scan Create a scan template by combining the E mail Save as file Store to e Filing or Save to USB Media agents When you select this select the agent from Email Save as file Store to e Filing or Save to USB Media You can specify up to two agents for a scan template Meta Scan You can create a template for the meta scan option You can on
23. You can search and set user accounts if you are logged in to the access policy mode P 115 Search User Account screen P 116 Create User Information screen P 117 Enter Password screen P 118 User Information screen P 120 Role Assignment screen P 120 Group Assignment screen BBEBBB e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration User Accounts Usir Accounts Search L New Delete Delete All Unloc k Reset Password Number 12 12 REFRESH Set Registered Quota lt lt Previous 10 Pages Next 10 Pages gt gt lt lt 1234567 8 G gt gt Department Number Status As lable SOON OUARWHD User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Use Jame001 e Jame002 As filable lame003 As Pilable dame004 Ay Tilable As Pilable Ay fillable As lable se lame005 As lable As lable As lable No f Available As Pilable Go to top i this page Search button Searches registered users P 115 Search User Account screen New button Registers new users P 116 Create User Information screen Deletes the user selected in the user account list However you cannot delete the default users Delete button 114 Delete All button Deletes all registered users Except default users Unlock button Unlocks a
24. lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt metadata version 3 1 gt lt mfp_metadata gt lt metadata_version gt lt major gt 3 lt major gt lt minor gt 1 lt minor gt lt metadata_version gt lt device_info gt lt ip_address gt IP lt ip address gt lt ipv6_address gt IPV6 lt ipv6_ address gt lt fqdn gt F QDN lt fqdn gt lt netbios name gt NETBIOSNAME lt netbios_name gt lt location gt LOCATION lt location gt lt contact gt CONTACT lt contact gt lt contact_tel gt CONTACTTEL lt contact_tel gt lt FW_version gt FWVER lt FW_version gt lt manufacture gt MANUFACT lt manufacture gt lt model gt MODEL lt model gt lt serial gt SERIAL lt serial gt lt deprecated tag start gt lt host_name gt NETBIOSNAME lt host_name gt lt tempt_file_ver gt 1 0 lt tempt_file_ver gt lt deprecated tag end gt lt device_info gt lt scan_info gt lt template gt lt template_group_no gt TEMPGROUPNO lt template_group_no gt lt template_group_name gt TEMPGROUPNAME lt template_group_name gt lt template_group_user gt TEMPGROUPUSER lt template_group_user gt lt template_no gt TEMPNO lt template_no gt lt template_name gt TEMPNAME lt template_name gt lt template_user gt TEMPUSER lt template_user gt lt template gt lt scanned_date gt YEAR MONTH DAY lt scanned_date gt lt scanned_time gt DATE T TIME lt scanned_time gt
25. File Format Color Description Select the file format of files to be sent when scanning in color mode e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files e PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file e PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files e Slim PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as Multi page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over quality of image e Slim PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over quality of image e XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file e XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files e JPEG Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files Tip Files saved in an XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed Number of Retry Enter the number of times to try sending scanned images when it fails 3 is set as the default Retry interval Enter the interval to try
26. P 10 Accessing TopAccess Access policy mode Operation privileges and displayed items vary depending on the user account you used to log in to TopAccess Details of operations and displays vary depending on the management on roles and departments to where the user account is assigned P 22 Access Policy Mode 8 TopAccess Overview TopAccess Conditions Your device should be connected to the network and TCP IP is correctly configured to operate TopAccess When TCP IP is correctly configured you can access TopAccess via a web browser Supported browsers Windows e Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Internet Explorer 7 0 or later when IPv6 is used e Firefox 3 5 or later Macintosh e Safari 4 0 or later UNIX e Firefox 3 5 or later e Because TopAccess uses cookies to store information on the user s system these must be enabled in the browser e f TopAccess does not display the correct information in any page delete the cookies and try again e When using the e Filing box Web utility from TopAccess it is necessary to disable the pop up blocking function of your Web browser TopAccess Conditions 9 Accessing TopAccess You can access TopAccess by entering its URL in the address box of the web browser To access it under a Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 environment confirm the network connection status on the Network Map with the LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery featu
27. Print Counter UserName001 MFP Local Authentication Administrator 0001 Departr v English US QWERTY v ON 99999999 99999999 Small Large Total Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Smaill Black Large Black Total Fax Communication Counter Small Large Item name Save button Transmit Description Saves the entered user information Cancel button Cancels changing user information Delete button Deletes the displayed user from the user account Reset Counters button Resets counters User Name Displays the user name If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the registered domain name or LDAP server Select this item if you want to change You can select this item only when the authentication method is Windows Domain Authentication or LDAP Authentication Authentication Method Displays the user authentication method e MFP Local Authentication Use MFP local authentication on your equipment Windows domain e LDAP Authentication Use network authentication managed by LDAP Password You can change the password only when the authentication method is MFP Local Authentication If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in User Management Tab Page Overview
28. Print Password Enter the password if you want to request the log in password of users who attempt FTP printing You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash LJ Setting up NetWare Print In NetWare Print you can set the NetWare print options to enable the Novell print service NetWare Print 1 Prnt Server Name 1 Print Server Name MFPO 7088510 Enter the print server name that is created in the NetWare file server You can enter up to 47 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash The MFP name is set as the default 2 Password Enter the password that is set to the print server if required You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash 3 Print Queue Scan Rate Setup Item List Enter how frequently to scan the print queues for print jobs This should be entered in seconds You can enter between 1 to 255 30 is set as the default LJ Setting up Email Print In Email Print you can set how the E mail print jobs are printed Email Print 1 Enable Print Header Disable v Enable Print Message Body Enable v ms aimum Email Body Print 5 Enable Print Email Error Enable v Enable Email Error Forward Disable v Email Error Transfer Address Enable Partial Email Enable v Partial ait time 24
29. REFRESH PrintLog Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log Message Log Item name Date Time Domain Name LDAP Server ssful user login ssful user login nto the sleep mode nto the energy save mode don the power Device Setting Device Setting achine was shut down ssful user login Device Setting Description Displays the date and time of the error Error Level Displays the error level Error Error that user and administrator may not be recoverable Warning Error that administrator is recoverable Information Error that end user is recoverable or that event is not error Message Displays the message if available Status Displays the error code User Name Displays the user account name related to the message Domain Name LDAP Server Tip Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account related to the message For details on error codes and error messages refer to Checking the Equipment Status with TopAccess in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Logs Tab Page Overview 43 E Export Logs Item list lt access policy mode gt You can erase logs or export them in a file Tips e Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator or display privileges in the access policy mode e The exported data file can be either CSV format or XML format CSV is set as the default e You ca
30. Secondary Port Number 6080 SSL Port Number 10443 Item name Description Enable HTTP Server Select whether the Web based services such as TopAccess and e Filing web utility are enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default Enable SSL Select whether the SSL Secure Socket Layer is enabled or disabled When this is enabled the data transferred between the equipment and client computers will be encrypted using a private key when operating TopAccess and e Filing web utility Disable is set as the default Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols Primary Port Number Enter the port number for the NIC HTTP server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 80 is used Secondary Port Number Enter the port number for TopAccess and the e Filing web utility You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 8080 is used If you specify a duplicate port number with one of the other network settings to the secondary port number while SSL on HTTP is disabled you will not be able to access TopAccess and the e Filing web utility If you make a mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number SSL Port Number Enter the port number for the SSL You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 10443 is used If you specify a duplicate por
31. Select among IP Address FQDN Email and Key ID When you selected FQDN Email or Key ID enter a value corresponding to the item you selected When you selected Key ID enter the corresponding value You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols except the following amp lt When you selected Email you can enter up to 192 alphanumerical characters When you selected FQDN you can enter up to 255 alphanumerical characters including hyphen and period However neither hyphen nor period can be used as first or last character Session Key Settings Generate a new key after Enter the interval between generating key information for IPsec communications in seconds Set the interval period for regenerating key information for IPsec communication from 60 seconds to 604 800 seconds 7 days Enable PFS Select the check box when using the PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy function in IKE FilterlKE Transforms Integrity Select the authentication algorithm to be used in IKE e SHA1 Select this to use SHA e MD5 Select this to use MD5 e AES XCBC MAC Select this to use AES XCBC MAC Encryption Select the encryption algorithm to be used in IKE e AES 256 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 256 bits e AES 192 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 192 bits e AES 128 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 128 bits e AES CTR Select this to use AES CTR e 3DES CBC S
32. Select this to be notified of security information Received Fax InternetFax Error Select this to be notified of fax Internet Fax reception errors Warning Select this to be notified of the periodical deletion of received faxes and Internet Faxes is successfully completed Information Select this to be notified of the deletion of received faxes and Internet Faxes by the Delete Files function under the Maintenance menu is successfully completed Warning Select this to be notified of the periodical deletion of scanned files is successfully completed Information Select this to be notified of the deletion of scanned files by the Delete Files function under the Maintenance menu is successfully completed 284 Maintenance Item List Item name Description Warning Select this to be notified when the available space in the e Filing box is low or the preservation period of documents in the e Filing box is expiring soon Information Select this to be notified when the e Filing box is initialized Tip Use the e Filing box web utility and specify in the property screen for each box if you want to notify whether e Filing box operations are successfully completed For information on how to set see the e Filing Guide LJ Setting up Job Notification Events Job Notification Events Scan Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed Received Fax InternetFax
33. TODACCESS OVEl VOW arecuna aa a A TAE ane 8 TODACCESS CONCIUIONS sirine E aE Era ERR ara 9 ACCESSING LODACGCESS innunder 10 Accessing TopAccess by entering URL cccccccscececceeeceeseeeceeeseeeceecaeecsueaseseseseeeseesass 10 Accessing TopAccess from Network Map Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 ccccseeecsseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeesseeeeaeeess 12 TopAccess Screen DESCHIDUOINS ojacaitciince cae cucdatinn tia seceteneadw snc caicbaveaab a ckwcuwaskiu shea caneai concen seen nnmnnn 21 ACCESS PONCY MOGE cers i terns rca een aa E E a aaa aS 22 Chapter 2 Device Tab Page Device tenm EiS taian a E E EE E EE a E 26 DIS DIAV OC ICONS erria a a a E aE 27 Chapter 3 Job Status Tab Page JOD Status T b Page OVErvieW oionn nas aenar a a aaa a a a aaa dik 30 PrN JOO KENIS T ciiai a a a a A 30 FaxlnternetFax JOD Hemists aed x dduteoees caus doizaetc See e seers teem 32 can JOD ennist iien axed roche ce ctata ace oe a adie nedeaas a T 33 Job Status How to Set and How to Operate ccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeseeeseneseneaes 34 EIS DAV ING PUN JODS x soiree sei lash act cea a de cemented aden ait mtyeattel ated a a bodoiaeds 34 DEE MO JOD S raio a ta ire Real s T a N 35 Deleting private print jobs and hold print JODS ccc ccc eceseceeeceeceeceeseeeeeseeseeseeeaeeaees 35 FREICASINIG PMU OOS niama e a a E a e A Aa a a E aE EES 36 CHECKING FECOVEFY INTORMAL OM acti de cdune te
34. You can create Clone File to configure other Machine with same settings To create Clone File select data category and press Create button Create Item name Description Create button Creates the clone file of the category selected in the category setting When you click this button a screen is displayed to set a password on the clone file LI Setting up Clone File Clone File Device Name Not Created Copier Model Version Date Created Item name Description Device Name Displays the device name of the created clone file Click the device name to download the clone file Copier Model Displays the copier model of the created clone file Version Displays the system ROM version of the created clone file 2 4 Maintenance Item List Description cal Date Created Displays the created date of the clone file LI Setting up Category Setting Select the category for the clone file Tip The clone file will include the settings listed in Description that make up the category you select Category Setting 7 Security Security Level Secure Erase Self Test Encryption Authentication V Default Settings General Copy Scan Fax iFax Email Save as File Printer Notificartion Log Settings EWB Settings V User Management User Group Role Quota Department Code Menu with Template Address Book 7 Network Print Service Network Settings Print Service YWir
35. You can set the following in this page P 258 Create Client Certificate screen 6 Click OK Windows Internet Explorer el Security How to Set and How to Operate Right click the link for the file name of the certificate to be exported and then select Save Target As Security Open Open in New Tab Authentication Certificate Management Password Po Open in New Window Save Target As X Print Target Cut SCEP Automatic Not Insta cory CA Serve Copy Shortcut CA Serve Paste MFP s Ad EF Blog with Windows Live Timeout E mail with Windows Live CA Challe a Translate with Bing note If s All Accelerators gt Signature Add to Favorites Append Link Target to Existing PDF Poll Inter Append to Existing PDF Maximurr Convert Link Target to Adobe PDF Reques Convert to Adobe PDF Properties Client Certificate The Save As dialog box appears Tip If you have not installed a client certificate enter the password in Password and click Create to create a certificate 8 Specify a directory to which the certificate is to be saved and then click Save Save As x GO lt work_folder Certificate v Search p By Organize 80 Views v BE New Folder T lank Name Date modif Type Size Tags MB Desktop This folder is empty Recent Places pj Computer E Documents E Pictures i Music
36. ccccceeeeeees 235 Setting up Proxy Setting cccceccecc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 211 Setting up Raw Job Setting cccceeeeeeeeeeeee 204 237 Setting up Raw TOP Print isicicccsadisiavatdiessatsciaaienks 206 Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 cceeeeee ee 193 Setting up Restriction on Address Book Operation by Administrator a Sh cincrtccaticDeiiaendntcotrSusledserssattieditultewads 139 Setting up Save as file Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward ssccsce0e 310 Setting up Save as file Setting Public template 303 Setting up Save as file settings ccecceceeeeeee ees 229 Setting up Scan Setting Public template 303 Setting up Searching Interval ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Setting up Server Registration Setting 006 212 Setting up Setting data included in Clone File 2 7 Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory 191 Setting up Single Sign On Setting ccceceeeeeees 255 Setting up SLP Session ccceccecseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneenens 164 Setting up SMB Session cceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeness 154 Index 367 Setting up SMTP Client c ccceecceeseee cesses eeeeeeeeees 158 Setting up SMTP Server sisvcteiesdeslaccstcccdvansesarevacaaveds 160 Setting up SNMP Network Service scceeeeeeeeeees 165 Setting up SNTP Service cceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaes
37. e Before using the LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery feature enable the LLTD setting P 169 Setting up LLTD Session e Before beginning the installation of the driver required for web services enable the Web Services setting P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting LJ With Unidentified Network Windows Vista 1 Click the Start icon and select Control Panel o Windows Media Player D Small Business Resources sf Windows Fax and Scan Music Search Recent Items Windows Meeting Space Computer Network ag Windows Photo Gallery Connect To go Windows Live Messenger Download Y Paint gt Control Panel Default Programs N Help and Support All Programs lee ial The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Network and Internet Oe gt Control Panel e Control Panel Home System and Maintenance Get started with Windows Back up your computer Classic View Security Check for updates Check this computer s security status Firewall Network and Internet View network status and ta Se Set up file sharing Hardware and Sound Printer Mouse Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs ent Tasks View network status and tasks The Network and Internet window appears 12 Accessing TopAccess Allow a program through Windows ASI Play CDs or other media automatically FE A F N z
38. e Filing Logout 1 Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Manageme Administration 2 Template Template Groups Please select a group to edit below Public Template Groups No Name CS Nee Pubic Pubic TempleteGrows 3 Ail Groups Defined Groups Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 O71 081 091 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 No Rane serene oor peues je o e C undefined e SSCS C A e e SSCS Joos undefined e SSC Joos A e e SSCS mo emea ea S Go to top ofthis page CS e Item name Description Function tab Features are grouped under each tab This provides access to the main pages of TopAccess for each function Menu bar This provides access to each menu page under the selected function tab Submenu bar This provides access to each submenu page under the selected menu and function tab Top link Click this to display the top of the page currently displayed Help link Click this to display Online Help TopAccess Screen Descriptions 21 Access Policy Mode The access policy mode enables different operation privileges and displayed items to be applied depending on the user account you used to log in to TopAccess In the access policy mode the details of operations and displays differ depending on the roles and department assigned to the given user account 1 2 Access TopAccess P 10 Accessing TopAccess by entering URL Click Login e Fil
39. 5 97 Adding or editing an LPR queue ccceeceeeeeeeeeeees 237 Adding editing and deleting contacts manually 94 Address BOOK scien a E A eens 76 Address Book ltem list cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 76 adia a E a encom OAN 139 Administration Tab cccecceecseceeceeseeneceeeeeeeeseeeees 135 Authentication settings ccccccecceececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 247 B Box Setting Mailbox ccceccecceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeenees 85 Box Setting Private template ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees T1 C Certificate management settings ccccceeeeeeeeeees 256 Change Group Password ccccscceeeeceeeeceeteeeeeeeseeaeees 55 Change Password oepniss nioena a a 337 Checking logs of Meta Scan cccccecseceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 354 Checking Meta Scan Enabler cccececceeeeeeeeeeeees 342 Checking recovery information cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Configuring the EWB function ccccceeceeeeeeeeeees 243 Confirm Permission casccmcsitwiecusasanuns menenceltcuiwetwdacneweees 340 Contact PrODONy irasi i dea e 77 308 CONAC Se aa terior ial seetedaneereraeoaunn 76 SODISlSCUINGS Jestina avn A aaea Erei 183 Counter How to Set and How to Operate 6006 110 COURTS TE MIIST deenergio a 104 Counter TaD eea AER 103 Counter Tab Page OvervieW ccccsecseceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 104 Create Client Certificate eresi anaa 258 Create Clo
40. Administrator AccountManager CopyOperator ScanOperator Confirm Permission A Role Assignment Group Assignment Department Number PanelUl Language English US PanelUl Keyboard Layout QWERTY Quota Setting OFF Quota Default Quota Print Counter Copy Fax Printer List Total Large Total Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Total Fax Communication Counter Small Large Save button Saves the content of the account Cancel button Cancels the operation Change Password button Changes the password of the user who is accessing TopAccess P 337 Change Password screen Menu button Click the Menu button on the control panel and perform the settings on the menu screen In the My Account tab set the menu screen of the user who is accessing TopAccess P 338 Menu Setting screen User Name Displays the name of the user who is accessing TopAccess Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user who is accessing TopAccess 336 My Account Tab Page Overview Item name Description Role Assignment Displays the role assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess Click the Confirm Permission button to display the Confirm Permission screen and check the detailed role information P 340 Confirm Permission screen Group Assignment Displays
41. Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete Aarme Destination The contacts are added as destinations 60 Registration Tab Page Overview Selecting the groups from the address book You can select groups from the address book You cannot select destinations from the address group if Restriction Setting for Destination is enabled P 254 Restriction Setting for Destination 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Address Group Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Search Delete Destination The Address Group page is displayed 3 Select the Group check boxes that contain the desired destinations Address Group Group fw Group Name 7 ener oupName4 GroupName03 GroupName02 iy GroupNameo1 op ofthis page Click Add All recipients in the selected groups are added to the Recipient List page Tip You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 63 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 5 Click Save Recipient List Mi MWe Destination The contacts are added as destinations Registration Tab Page Overview 61 Searching for destinations in the LDAP server You can search for destinations in the registered LDAP server and in the address book The LDAP server used for the s
42. DisplayName2 DisplayName2 DisplayName3 DisplayName4 DisplayNames O temam O o 1 Extended Field Definition No Allows you to select a registered extended field definition Extended Field Properties Extended Field Properties set under the selected extended field definition are displayed Values set in this screen are used as the default values for Extended Field Properties displayed on the control panel when using Meta Scan Items with an asterisk attached at the beginning of the Extended Field Properties name are mandatory entry fields Password Setting In the Password Setting page you can set a password for the private template Password Setting Save Cancel EE 2 m ype Password Item name Description 1 Password Enter a password Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Registration Tab Page Overview 75 E Address Book Item list LJ P 76 Address Book screen LL P 77 Contact Property screen LL P 78 Fax Setting screen iy LL P 79 Search Contact screen LL P 79 Search Address List screen ane LL P 80 Group Properties screen LJ Address Book screen You can manage a contact list to be used in E mail Internet Fax and fax transmissions Tips e Click Contacts or Groups to switch the display between the list of addresses and the list o
43. Export LL P 133 Import LJ Export e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration seraccounts Group Management Role Managemen Department Management ExportAmport Export Import Export import User Information Small Large Counter File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File User Information File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File User Information All Counter File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Combined User Information Role Group File Name USER ROLE GROUP 110118 xml File Size 9965 Date Created TUE JAN 18 08 34 44 2011 Create New File Combined User Information All Counter Role Group File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File LDAP Role File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Department Information Small Lage Counter File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Department Information File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Department Information All Counters File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Item name Description User Information Small Large You can create an export file for user information small large counter Counter Click the Create New File button to create the file The file na
44. LL P 139 Setting up e Filing Notification Events LL P 141 Setting up SNTP Service LL P 139 Setting up Job Skip Control LL P 141 Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting LL P 139 Setting up Restriction on Address Book Operation by LX P 142 Setting up WEB General Setting Administrator 136 Setup Item List LJ Setting up Device Information You can set the device information displayed in the Device tab page General Setting Device Information Name Copier Model Serial Number MAC Address Save as File amp e Filing Space Available FF ax Space Available Data Cloning Function os 50 Direct Print OONORWND Location 1 0 een Ontact Information es Ser ice Phone Number Administrative Message 26205 MB 977 MB Enable Enable Item name Description Name Displays the device name of your equipment Copier Model Displays the model name of your equipment Serial Number Displays the serial number of your equipment MAC Address Displays the MAC address of your equipment Save as File amp e Filing Space Available Displays the available space for save as file and e Filing on your equipment Fax Space Available Displays the available space for fax transmission and reception for your equipment Data Cloning Function Enable this item when migrating settings on your equipment on to another device USB Direct
45. NetWare Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable NetWare Enable Enable Bindery Enable Enable NDS Enable Context Org Tree Dept1 Preferred File Server Nwsr y Enable NetWare Select whether NetWare is enabled or disabled e Enable Enables NetWare e Disable Disables NetWare Enable Bindery Select whether the NetWare Bindery mode for Novell printing is enabled or disabled When you configure a Novell printing environment with the NetWare server in the bindery mode you must enable this Enable NDS Select whether the NetWare NDS mode for Novell printing is enabled or disabled When you configure a Novell printing environment with the NetWare server in NDS mode you must enable this When this is enabled you should also specify the context and tree for the NDS Context Enter the NDS context where the NetWare print server for this equipment is located Tree Enter the NDS tree Preferred File Server Enter the NetWare server name in which this equipment preferentially searches for the queues 156 Setup Item List LJ Setting up HTTP Network Service In HTTP Network Service you can enable or disable Web based services such as TopAccess and e Filing web utility HTTP Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable HTTP Server Enable v Enable SSL Disable v Primary Port Number 80
46. Select Menu Type screen The public menu type is displayed 304 Registration Administration tab Item List LJ Select Menu Type screen Select a menu type to add to the public menu Select Menu Type Please select a menu type Template Extension oe ay Item name Description Template button Adds a template to the public menu P 305 Select Template Group screen Extension button Adds an External Interface Enabler URL to the public menu P 306 Select URL screen LJ Select Template Group screen Displays a list of templates that can be selected in the public menu Select Template Group Cancel ed Userl fame001 Usert f ame002 UserNamedO03 Item name Description Save button Registers the selected template group Cancel button Cancels registration of the template group No The numbers of the template groups that can be selected are displayed Name The names of the template groups are displayed Click a name to display the Select Template screen If templates can be selected a list of templates that can be selected is displayed P 306 Select Template screen User Name The user names of the template groups are displayed Registration Administration tab Item List 305 LJ Select Template screen Select Template select Template Group Save Cancel cil Informat
47. e Disable Disables IPsec Policy Select a policy to use in IPsec To enable data encryption communication using IPsec you must first create IPsec policies according to your system environment P 182 Add Policy Modify Policy screen Filter Creates a filter for the IPsec environment Add button You can add a filter on the Add Filter screen P 174 Add Filter Modify Filter screen Delete button Select filters to delete and click the Delete button to delete them Filter Name Click a registered filter name to modify its content P 174 Add Filter Modify Filter screen Filter Action Displays the action of the registered filter Manual Key Set the IPsec manual key Add button You can add a manual key on the Add Manual Key screen P 176 Add Manual Key Modify Manual Key screen Delete button Select manual keys to delete and click the Delete button to delete them Manual Key Name Click a registered manual key name to modify its content P 176 Add Manual Key Modify Manual Key screen Encryption Algorithm Displays the registered encryption algorithms Set the IPsec IKE key Add button You can add an IKE key on the Add IKE screen P 178 Add IKE Modify IKE screen Delete button Select keys to delete and click the Delete button to delete them Key Name Click a registered key name to modify its cont
48. AUTO AUTO is selected by default If AUTO is selected a sub ID 4 to 6 digits selected randomly is added according to the status of the file name Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation Registration Administration tab Item List 315 316 LJ Setting up Box Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward In the Box Setting page you can specify how a received document will be stored in the Box You can specify the destination when you have selected InternetFax as the forwarding agent Box Setting Save Cancel 4 Box Number 00000 Public Box v tinati Password Retype Password 2 older Name 3 jcument Name Sender NNN NNN is a sequential number Item name Description Destination Specify the destination box number for e Filing Box Number Enter the Box number where a received document will be stored Password Enter the password if the specified Box number requires a password Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Folder Name Enter the name of the folder where a received document will be stored Document Name Display how the received document will be named You cannot change the document name Registration Administration tab Item List E Extended Field Definition You can set meta data which is attached to images scanned with the Meta Scan function You can register up to 100 extended
49. Date Created Create New File Item name Description File Name Displays the file name of the created export files Click a file name to download File Size Displays the file size of the created export files Date Created Displays the created date of the export files Create New File button Creates the export file W Delete Files settings You can delete information such as scanned data transmission data and reception data that are stored in the local folder using the Save as file function It is recommended to delete the stored data periodically to maintain the hard disk Tip The Delete Files submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List Maintenance oad Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Delete Files Shared File Shared File Shared File I Scan Deletes all scan data stored in the shared folder Transmission Deletes all fax ifax transmission data stored in the shared folder Reception Deletes all fax ifax reception data and mailbox fax ifax forwarding data in the shared folder 280 Maintenance Item List W Directory Service settings Yo
50. Delete All button Deletes all groups Group Name Displays the group name You check group information by clicking the group name P 122 Group Information screen LJ Create Group Information screen You can register new groups Create Group Information 2 Required 3 Group Name 4 Role Assignment Item name Description Save button Saves the entered group information Cancel button Cancels creating group information Group Name Enter the group name You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than back quote semicolon lt gt apostrophe and comma Role Assignment You can select roles to be assigned to the group Click the Edit button and select roles from the displayed screen P 120 Role Assignment screen User Management Tab Page Overview 121 LJ Group Information screen You can check roles registered to the group Group Information Save Cancel Required Group Name GroupName01 Role Assignment Item name Description Save button Saves the entered group information Cancel button Cancels creating group information Group Name Displays the group name Role Assignment Displays the roles assigned to the group Click the Edit button and select roles from the displayed screen P 120
51. Destination l BCC Destination Setting BCC Destination The Fax Unit must be installed in this equipment to specify the fax numbers of the destinations You can specify the destinations by entering their E mail addresses or fax numbers manually selecting destinations from the address book selecting destination groups from the address book or searching for destinations in the LDAP server LJ P 59 Entering the destinations manually LJ P 60 Selecting the destinations from the address book LJ P 61 Selecting the groups from the address book LL P 62 Searching for destinations in the LDAP server iy LO P 63 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 58 Registration Tab Page Overview Entering the destinations manually You can add a destination manually to the Recipient List You cannot enter destinations if Restriction Setting for Destination is enabled P 254 Restriction Setting for Destination 1 Click Destination Setting when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent or TO Destination Setting CC Destination Setting BCC Destination Setting when creating an Email agent to open the Recipient List page Click New Recipient List Save Cancel Y Address Book Address Group Search Delete MilwName Destination The Contact Property page is displayed Enter the E
52. In Raw Job Setting you can add up to 16 LPR queue names and specify the raw job setting for each queue These queue names can be used when printing without a printer driver such as printing from UNIX workstation You can add edit or delete an LPR queue LJ P 237 Adding or editing an LPR queue LL P 238 Deleting an LPR queue Adding or editing an LPR queue To add a new LPR queue click Add in Raw Job Setting To edit an existing LPR queue select a radio button of a queue that you want to edit and click Edit Paper Size Paper Type Orientation Stapling a PCL Form Line PEL Font Pitch PCL Font Point Size PEL Font Number PCL Line Termination Symbol set Paper Source Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode The Add New LPR Queue page is displayed Setup How to Set and How to Operate 237 8 Administration Tab Page 2 Enter the following items as required Add New LPR Queue Queue Name Duplex Printing Disable v Paper Size Ad v Paper Type Plain v Orientation Portrait v Stapling OFF Output Tray Receiving Tray PCL Form Line 12 0 PCL Font Pitch 10 0 PCL Font Point Size 12 0 PCL Font Number ol PCL Line Termination Auto Symbol set Paper Source Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode You can set the following in this page P 204 Setting up Raw Job Setting 3 Click Save The queue name is added to the list Dele
53. Japan www okiprintingsolutions com
54. LL P 84 Destination Setting Mailbox LL P 84 InternetFax Setting Mailbox LJ P 84 Relay End Terminal Report Mailbox LL P 85 Save as file Setting Mailbox LJ P 85 Email Setting Mailbox LL P 85 Box Setting Mailbox LJ Inbound FAX routing screen You can manage mailboxes used for ITU T communications Inbound FAX routing New wBox Number serh Agent Comment UserName002 Item name Description New button Creates a mailbox for F code communications P 82 MailBox Properties screen Box Number Displays the registered mailbox number User Name Displays the user name of the registered mailbox Agent Displays the agent assigned to the mailbox Comment Displays the registered comment Registration Tab Page Overview 81 Q MailBox Properties screen You can set a mailbox MailBoxes Properties MailBoxes Save Cancel Select Agent Confidential C InternetFax Relay Bulletin Board Save as file Forward Email Store to e Filing Item name Description Save button Saves the mailbox Cancel button Cancels the mailbox settings Select Agent button Set the agent to apply to the forward mailbox Confidential Creates a confident mailbox The Confidential Box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox Once a
55. MAC address or profile on the Network Map under the Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 environment LLTD Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings 1 Enable LLTD Enable v 2 Device Name MFP07088510 Item name Description Enable LLTD Select whether the LLTD setting is enabled or disabled e Enable Enables the LLTD e Disable Disables the LLTD Device Name Enter a device name to be displayed on the Network Map You can enter up to 16 characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Setup Item List 169 LJ Setting up Wake Up Setting This section describes how to set network access during the Super Sleep mode Use this setting for a case such as when you want to recover this equipment from the Super Sleep mode by searching this equipment over a network Wake Up Setting Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Please set the protocol for Wake up from Sleep mode Select up to 4 items 1 SNMP for IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Link Local Address Neighbor Discovery Manual Web Services for IPv4 Web Services for IPv6 Protocol Select protocols to be used for recovering this equipment from the Sleep mode Up to 4 protocols can be selected e ARP Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv4 environment
56. Message Header Inbound FAX Routing Received from Sender s TSI Received by Receiver s CSI Number of Retry 3 Retry interval 1 Minutes Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v Default Body Strings Body String Transmission Enable You can set the following in this page P 200 Setting up InternetFax Setting 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 233 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer ese Q Are you sure OK Cancel The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 234 Setup How to Set and How to Operate E Setting up Printer e Filing settings You can configure how to continue print jobs and e Filing jobs from the Printer e Filing submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after changing them The settings
57. Print PrintOperator eFilingOperator FaxOperator Guest User Fax as the base role User Management Tab Page Overview 125 126 Item name MFP Function Description Allows you to select the privileges to be assigned to the role Copy Function Assigns all copy functions Copy Job Assigns the copy job function Print Function Assigns all print functions Print Job Assigns the print job function Print Management Assigns the print management function Scan Function Assigns all scan functions Remote Scan WSScan Pull Assigns the Remote Scan or Web Services Scan function FAX iFAX Function Assigns all fax ifax functions Internet Fax Transmission Assigns all Internet Fax transmission functions Fax Transmission Assigns the fax transmission function Fax Received Print Assigns the fax Internet Fax received print function al File Share Assigns all local file share functions Store to Local Storage Assigns all local file storage functions Store to USB Device Assigns all storage to USB device functions Remote Assigns all remote functions Send Email Assigns scan to function Store to Remote Server Assigns all storage to remote server functions WS Scan Push Assigns the WS scan push function e Filing Assigns all e Filing functions e Filing Access
58. Raw Jobs Default Orientation Portrait v Raw Jobs Default Stapling OFF Raw Jobs Default Output bin Face down stacker v PCL Form Line 12 0 os P Font Pitch 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 PCL Font Point Size 12 0 POL Font Number 0 PCL Line Termination Auto Symbol set Roman 8 PANES Source Auto Do not Print Blank Pages ON Letterhead Print Mode OFF Item name Description 1 Raw Jobs Duplex Printing Select whether a raw job will be printed on both sides of the paper 2 Raw Jobs Default Paper Size Select the default paper size that applies to a raw job 3 Raw Jobs Default Paper Type Select the default paper type that applies to a raw job 4 Raw Jobs Default Orientation Select the default orientation that applies to a raw job 5 Raw Jobs Default Stapling Select whether a raw job will be stapled 6 Raw Jobs Default Output Bin Select the default output bin that applies to a raw job A banner page that is created by NetWare UNIX and Windows operating systems also will be outputted to the tray set here 7 PCL Form Line Enter the number of lines printed per page PCL Font Pitch Enter the font pitch when the selected font number represents a fixed pitch scalable font The font pitch indicates the number of ANK characters per inch 10 pitch prints 10 ANK characters within an inch 9 PCL Font Point Size Enter the font size when the selected fo
59. Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Registration Tab Page Overview 55 Li Template Properties screen You can set the template you are registering Template Properties 56 Save Cancel ll Select Agent G opy Fax InternetF ax T Scan T Meta Scan Item name Save button Email Save as file Store to e Filing Save to USB Media Description Saves the template contents Cancel button Cancels the operation Select Agent button Allows you to set the selected agent You can set the template details when creating a new agent P 57 Private template settings Copy You can create a template which copies the document Select this agent if you want to print a copy when you are sending a document to another destination You can also specify the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing agent at the same time Fax InternetFax You can create a template for fax or Internet Fax transmission You can also specify the Save as file agent at the same time Scan You can create a template for a scan You need to select either the Email agent Save as file agent Store to e Filing agent or Save to USB Media agent at the same time You can specify up to two agents for a scan template Meta Scan This agent is enabled when the meta scan option is installed You can create a template for the meta scan optio
60. Setting up Confidentiality Setting ccceeceee seca ee 139 Setting up Configuration ccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 213 Setting up Copier settings cceecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeees 225 Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue 185 Setting up Current Language Pack List 00 287 Setting up Date amp Time ssssecsvitacsdesisive dace vabisteaveineanns 140 Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting 141 Setting up DDNS Session cacesiseisciecacdnnian Menem ieed 152 Setting up Default Raw Job Setting ccceeeeee eee 203 Setting up Default setting ccccccecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 183 Setting up Default Setting for PanelUl 08 287 Setting up Definition Information ccscceeeeeeeeeees 318 Setting up Delete XML Format File cceceeeeeees 321 Setting up Department Setting cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 248 Setting up Destination ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward 308 330 Setting up Destination Setting Public template 302 Setting up Device Certificate cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 Setting up Device Information ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 Setting up DNS Session a ieecsiveteshicdids Oise natanisenntaes 151 Setting up Document Print Fax InternetFax Received Forward cssce
61. Store to USB Setting Save Cancel _ Encryption Master Password BRREP EE prr Retype Password Pepper err Encryption Level 128 bit AES i 2 ELEN Authority C Printing _ Change of Documents _ Content Copying or Extraction _ Content Extraction for accessibility DocYYMMDDCYYMMDD is a date 3 ele Name Add the date and time to a file name Registration Tab Page Overview 71 Item name Description 1 File Format Select the file format of the scanned image e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files e PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file e PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files e Slim PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as Multi page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over the quality of the image e Slim PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over the quality of the image e XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file e XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files e JPEG Select this to save scanned
62. Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log or Message Log The log page is displayed 3 Click the REFRESH icon at the upper right of the page to update the information e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration View Logs Print Log ges o Print Log Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log Message Log Document Name wDate Time Type Pages Sets Status User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Go to top ofthis page Tip Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the list in the specified order Logs How to Set and How to Operate 47 E Exporting logs You must be logged in to the access policy mode to export logs For information on logs that can be exported see the following P 44 Export Logs Item list lt access policy mode gt Log in to TopAccess in access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Logs tab and then click the Export Logs menu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration S1 Export Logs 82 REFRESH Export Logs It may take more than 10 minutes if there are a lot of entries Print Job Log Export File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Export Data Format csv XML Create New File amp Clear Log j Clear Log Fax Transmission Journal Export File Name Not Created File
63. format file and the extended field Tip You can register up to 99 XML format files 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Registration menu and XML Format File submenu e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration Registration Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML Format File 2 Click the Browse button under Import XML Format File Select the XML format file you want to register from the displayed dialog box 5 Click the Import button to register The XML format file is registered Tip Select an XML format file and click the Delete button to delete the registered XML format file Setting up Meta Scan Function 347 E Registering Extended Field Definition You can register up to 100 extended field definitions select an XML format file for each of them and set extended field properties as necessary When using applications that interact with Meta Scan follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML format file and the extended field 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Registration menu and Extended Field Definition submenu e Filing Logout Device J
64. including spaces 66 Registration Tab Page Overview Item name Description File Format Select the file format of the scanned image e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files e PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file e PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files e Slim PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as Multi page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over the quality of the image e Slim PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over the quality of the image e XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file e XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files e JPEG Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files Tips e Ifthe Forced Encryption setting is enabled only the PDF Multi and the PDF Single are selectable for a file format For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e Files saved in an XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows S
65. is set as the default Requirements to Apply Select Enable to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in passwords Disable is set as the default Restrictions e The user name and password cannot be the same 2 e The same password cannot be used again Lockout Setting Specify whether or not to enable the lockout setting when the user failed to supply the correct password Enable is set as the default Number of Retry Specify the number of retries before lockout Specify within the range from 1 to 30 times 10 is set as the default Lockout Time Specify the duration to lock out the user Specify within the range from 1 to 1440 minutes 1 is set as the default With SNMPv3 a password of at least one character is required 2 With Cloning you can also register the same password as the file name 3 The Lockout Setting is enabled only when you are using e Filing Boxes 262 Security Item List Security How to Set and How to Operate In the Security Service page you can install a wireless LAN certificate for authentication with the RADIUS server install and export a device certificate to enable SSL and set up its SCEP automatic installation install CA certificate and install certificates for IEEE 802 1X authentication and set up its SCEP P 263 Installing a device certificate P 270 Creating Exporting a client certificate P 272 Installing CA certific
66. lt Entry box gt Enter the text to set as subject Add the date and time to the Subject Select this to append date and time to the subject selected above Tip When Meta Scan is selected you can use a variable as the subject For more information on variables see the following P 343 Variables of XML format files From Address This sets the E mail address of the sender When the recipient replies to a received document the message will be sent to this E mail address Use From Address Setting set by Administrator Select this to use the E mail address specified in Administration Setup Email When User Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled select this to use the E mail address specified in Administration Security Authentication Email Address Setting lt Entry box gt Specify the sender address using up to 140 alphanumeric characters From Name This sets the sender name of the E mail document Use From Name Setting set by Administrator Select this to use the sender name specified in Administration Setup Email When User Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled select this to use the sender name specified in Administration Security Authentication Email Address Setting lt Entry box gt Specify the sender name using up to 64 characters Enter the body message of the Scan to Email documents You can enter up to 1000 characters
67. lt color_mode gt COLORMODE lt color_mode gt lt resolution gt RESOLUTION lt resolution gt lt file_format gt FILEFORMAT lt file_format gt lt no_of_files gt NUMFILE lt no_of_files gt lt no_of _pages gt PAGES lt no_of_pages gt lt file_path gt PATH lt file_path gt lt file_name gt FILE lt file_name gt lt sender_email gt MYEMAIL lt sender_email gt lt deprecated tag start gt lt workflow gt T EMPGROUPNAME TEMPNAME lt workflow gt lt deprecated tag end gt lt scan_info gt lt user_info gt lt user_id gt USER lt user_id gt lt user_domain gt DOMAIN lt user_domain gt lt dept_code gt DEPTCODE lt dept_code gt lt dept_name gt DEPTNAME lt dept_name gt lt deprecated tag start gt lt user_email gt MYEMAIL lt user_email gt lt deprecated tag end gt lt user_info gt lt user_input gt lt field1 name FIELDNAME 1 gt VALUE 1 lt field1 gt lt field2 name FIELDNAME2 gt VALUE2 lt field2 gt lt field3 name FIELDNAME3 gt VALUE3 lt field3 gt Setting up Meta Scan Function 345 lt field4 name FIELDNAME4 gt VALUE4 lt field4 gt lt field5 name FIELDNAME5 gt VALUE5 lt field5 gt lt field6 name FIELDNAME6 gt VALUE6 lt field6 gt lt field7 name FIELDNAME7 gt VALUE7 lt field7 gt lt field8 name FIELDNAME8 gt VALUE8 lt field8 gt lt field9 name FIELDNAME9 gt VALUE9 l
68. of the Secondary SNTP Server Address when Enable SNTP is enabled as required Tip P 143 Setting up TCP IP When the Obtain a SNTP Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the SNTP server address can be obtained using the DHCP server Scan Rate Enter how often this equipment should access the SNTP server to check the time Port Number Enter the port number for the SNTP service Generally 123 is used NTP Authentication Select whether to enable or disable NTP authentication LI Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting Make the required settings for daylight savings time Daylight Savings Time Setting Daylight Savings Time Offset Dates Item name Daylight Savings Time Disable 1 00 Month Week Day of Week Time Start Jan 1st Sun End Jan 1st Sun Description Select Enable to shift the clock to the daylight savings time Disable is set as the default Offset Select the desired offset time difference from the local standard time You can select from between 2 and 2 hours excluding 0 hour in 30 minute increments 1 00 is set as the default Tips Select the applicable period for the daylight savings time e Start Select or enter the start date and time of daylight savings time e End Select or enter the end date and time of daylight savings time e If you change the settings during the day
69. wD Name Email Address Fax Number 10 FirstName10 LastName10 irs thar m The Search Contact page is displayed Select the directory service name that you want to search for in the Directory Service Name box and enter the search terms in the boxes that you want to search Search Contact Enter a partial name or Email address to search for a contact Directory Service Nami LDAP server1 v First Name FirstNameQ1 Last Name Email Address Fax Number Company Department Tips e If you select the model name of this equipment at the Directory Service Name box you can search for destinations in the address book of this equipment e TopAccess will search for destinations that contain the text entered in each item e Leaving the box blank allows wild card searching However you must specify at least one Click Search TopAccess will start searching for recipients in the LDAP server and the Search Address List page will display the results Registration How to Set and How to Operate 97 Select the check boxes of contacts that you want to add to the Address Book Click Research to return to step 3 so that you can change the search criteria and execute the search again Search Address List Add Cancel Research Number of Search Result FirstNameO1 LastName01 User01 example com 012 3456 7890 Go N 3 of this page You can
70. 17 1 Overview LJ Accessing TopAccess from Network Map 1 Click the Start icon and select Control Panel g Windows Media Player D Small Business Resources se Windows Fax and Scan Recent Items g Windows Meeting Space Computer a Windows Photo Gallery Network amp Windows Live Messenger Download Connect To Y Paint Control Panel Default Programs N Help and Support Start Search p 5 Aa fel Z M1 The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Network and Internet Oe gt Control Panel gt v I P Control Panel Home User Accounts Add or remove user accounts System and Maintenance Get started with Windows Back up your computer Classic View Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Security Check for updates Check this computer s security status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Network and Internet View network status and ta Set up file sharing D FE Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Hardware and Sound Play CDs or other media automatically Printer Mouse Additional Options RA Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Recent Tasks View network status and tasks The Network and Internet window appears 3 Click Network and Shari
71. 203 x 196 16 x 15 4 line mm 400 x 391 This describes the file format e Filing TIFF Multi TIFF Single PDF Multi or Encrypted PDF Multi JPEG PDF Single or Encrypted PDF Single Slim PDF Multi Slim PDF Single XPS Multi XPS Single DIB This describes the file color mode Black Gray Scale Color B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 c 0 1 2 3 4 5 A B C 8 x 15 4 line mm 203 x 391 D D 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A E B G C M Mix The file format is recorded as DIB in the scan log if the data are scanned in BMP JPEG TIFF or PNG format using the WIA Windows Image Acquisition driver Tip Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the scan log list in the specified order 42 Logs Tab Page Overview W Message Log lt access policy mode gt The Message Log page displays errors which have occurred Tips e Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator privileges or display privilege in the access policy mode e The default Administrator and Auditor roles can check all message logs For more information on default roles and privileges see the following P 123 Default roles and privileges Device Job Status View Logs Export Logs Message Log e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration
72. 206 Setting up MaiIBOXES cccceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 279 Setting Up MAllDOXES sicvidessdasiicieteneneseniat ecu 100 Setting up Meta Scan Function ccceeceeeeeeeeeees 342 Setting up N W Fax Destination cccscceeeeeeeee ees 196 Setting up N W Fax Folder ccccecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 Setting up NetWare Print ccccecseeeeceeeeeseeneeness 208 Setting up NetWare Session cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeenees 156 Setting up Network ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeess 213 Setting up Network settings ccceceseeseeeeeeeeeeees 217 Setting UP notification 2 0 cece cee eee ee eee eceeeeeeeeneeness 294 Setting up Off Device Customization Architectures SEUINGS ss 2seende teaverieiandnuecaderueeetey 245 Setting up Panel Setting Public template 302 Seting WO POMC seieren tocar a a sal 262 Setting up Policy for Administrator Auditor 261 Setting up Policy for Users cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 260 Setting up POP3 Network Service ccscceeeeeeeee ees 161 Setting up Print Data Converter settings 8 241 Setting up Print Service settings ccccccceeeeeee ees 239 Setting up Printer settings cccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeee ees 236 Setting up Printer e Filing Job Enforcement Continue ccccccceceeeeeteeteeeeeeeees 201 Setting up Printer e Filing settings
73. 719 0 567i 10 0 67841 0 7891 2 0 OOo 0 p_i l Se de ee OPO oToy o oy oj o 2 Item name Description 1 Number Displays the registered department number 2 Department Name Displays the department name Click a department name link to check the information P 107 Department Information screen 3 Dept Code Displays the department code 4 Total Printing Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations 5 Total Scanning Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations 6 Fax Transmission Displays the number of pages transmitted via fax 7 Fax Reception Displays the number of pages received via fax 106 Counter Tab Page Overview LJ Department Information screen Close Department Number Department Name Department Code Print Counter Department Information 1 DepartmentNameO1 123456 Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Fax Communication Counter Small Large Item name Close button Received Description Closes the Department Information screen Department Number Displays the registered department number Department Name Displays the department name Department Code Displays the department code Print Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E mail reception Internet Fax reception Scan Counter D
74. A eather a a 189 Ell SEUNG S sential aeteae cist aap hentutierelwemmmMydattgul ai tactanmat nen mateumearduabiadad uitiet an Nacaguaeanusanelse 198 Neme tFax SeN Sonis a a O 200 Pinteres FiNng Seting Si oa career ohn ates ue beeen see nae es a 201 FVM Se WNC oases ee tiated a rnnaiae niente E A 202 PINT SCTVICE SettINGS aroen a A A A NS 206 Print Data Converter settings ccccscccscccsseecseeceeeceeeceueceueecaeeceeesuessaeesseeseeeeseesaseesgess 210 Embedded Web Browser settings ccccssccscccecceeeceeceecueecaeseuecseecueceeeseeseueseeeauesesesaees 211 Off Device Customization Architecture settings cccccccccceeceeeeeceeeseeesaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeaeeeaes 213 VOSI aea E a ua phltan Pienaar eS 214 Setup How to Set and How to Operate cccccccccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceneeneseneeaneeneseeseeneeeesones 215 Setting up General settings i e c5 fose c5cks nce tiesdsceceaaseid caantiew es dagacendic ac vancoedaueestesaiencsdeccsenseeas 215 Setting UD Network Settings ocsi a ncdooteicetante lade e a eet dees 217 SNMP VS Seung Si adna a A a aA 219 Seting p Copier SCUINGS isna a a E ease eee 225 Seting UP Fax SOMOS mracna a E A AAE a N E AA 227 Seting UP Saves Ne SCTUNGS ieia a a a a A Mewes 229 Setting Up E mail SCUINGS israr a a a r a aaa 231 setimo up Mtenge Fa eS wiv teci He aes isthe sais eee eens aimee een ana eine ee apeates 233 Setting up Printer e Filing SettingS ccccccccseccceeecee
75. Account Control dialog box The Set Network Location Successfully set network settings window appears 7 Click Close Successfully set network settings Network name Unidentified network Ly Location type Private This allows you to see other computers and devices while making your computer discoverable View or change network and sharing settings in Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices on the network 14 Accessing TopAccess 1 Overview LJ With Unidentified Network Windows 7 1 Click the Start icon and select Control Panel Q amp Q Snipping Tool D Remote Desktop Connection Computer Au Magnifier Control Panel m sj Solitaire h y Devices and 1 72 A Adobe Acrobat X Pro Default Programs gt Music Games All Programs Help and Support Search programs and files p Shut down J The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Network and Internet ree a We vaConrol Fanclay X Search Control Pane p Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Network and Intern Ay qi View network status and ta st Choose homegroup and s g options j Hardware and Sound Clock Language and Region View devices and printers Change keyboards or other input methods Adda device Change display language User Accounts and Family Safety p Add or rem
76. Advanced Guide for the font number and internal PCL fonts PCL Line Termination Select the type of the line termination Symbol set Select the symbol set that applies to a raw job Paper Source Select the paper source that applies to a raw job Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether blank pages are printed or not When printing is performed using the UNIX filters or CUPS this setting is not reflected If you do not want to print blank pages in these printings enable Do not Print Blank Pages in the UNIX filter command or CUPS setting For the setting instructions refer to the User s Manual Basic Guide or User s Manual Advanced Guide Letterhead Print Mode Select whether the last page odd page number is printed on the same side as the other odd number pages when printing both sides of a Raw print job whose total page number is odd Select ON to print the last page on the same side back as the other odd number pages Select OFF to print it on the same side front as even number pages Setup Item List 205 W Print Service settings You can configure such print services as Raw TCP Print LPD Print IPP Print FTP Print NetWare Print and Email Print Tip The Print Service submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 S
77. Book None Address Book Template Mail Boxes None Item name Description Security Displays if security level secure erase self test encryption and authentication settings are included Default Settings Displays if the general copy scan fax ifax E mail save as file printer notification log settings and EWB settings are included User Management Displays if the user group role quota department code and my menu with template address book are included Network Print Service Displays if network settings print service wireless LAN Bluetooth and directory service settings are included Address Book Displays if the address book is included Address Book Template Mail Displays if the address book template and MailBox are included Boxes E Import settings You can import address book data and department code information exported from another equipment Tip The Import submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List LL P 277 Setting up Address Book LJ P 278 Setting up MailBoxes LL P 278 Setting up Template iy LU P 278 Setting up Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes Before importing data check that there are no jobs being proces
78. Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA 2 The Email submenu page is displayed 4 In the Email submenu page set the E mail settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version Email Setting From Address From Name Message Header Inbound FAX Routing Received from Sender s TSI Received by Receiver s CSI File Format Black PDF Multi File Format Color PDF Multi v Number of Retry 3 Retry interval 1 Minutes Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v Default Body Strings You can set the following in this page P 198 Email settings 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 231 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer x Q Are you sure OK Ca
79. Create New File amp Clear Log Creates a file according to the file format of the export data Erases logs after a file has been created You can display or download by clicking the created file Clear Log Erases logs Create New File Creates a file according to the file format of the export data You can display or download by clicking the created file Fax Transmission Journal Export You can erase the transmission journal or export download it to a file Create New File amp Clear Log Creates a file according to the file format of the export data Erases logs after a file has been created You can display or download by clicking the created file Clear Log Erases logs Create New File Creates a file according to the file format of the export data You can display or download by clicking the created file Fax Reception Journal Export 44 Logs Tab Page Overview You can erase the reception journal or export download it to a file Create New File amp Clear Log Creates a file according to the file format of the export data Erases logs after a file has been created You can display or download by clicking the created file Clear Log Erases logs Create New File Creates a file according to the file format of the export data You can display or download by clicking the created file Item name Description Scan Log Export You can erase scan logs or export download them in
80. Enter a password for changing the Encrypt PDF setting Encryption Level Select the desired encryption level e 40 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 3 0 PDF V1 1 e 128 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 5 0 PDF V1 4 e 128 bit AES Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 7 0 PDF V1 6 Authority Select the desired types of authority for Encrypt PDF e Printing Select this to authorize users to print documents e Change of Documents Select this to authorize users to change documents e Content Copying or Extraction Select this to authorize users to copy and extract the contents of documents e Content Extraction for accessibility Select this to enable the accessibility feature Tips e Ifthe Forced Encryption setting is enabled you cannot clear the Encryption check box For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e The user password and the master password are not set at the factory shipment e Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one byte alphanumerical characters e The user password must differ from the master password These passwords can be re entered only by an authorized user Users cannot change the settings of the Encryption Level box and the Authority box if they are not authorized to change the master password For the details of the encryption setting r
81. Enter the trap community name for the IP Traps You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols public is set as the default IPX Trap Address Enter the IPX address where the SNMP Traps will be sent You can enter up to 20 alphanumerical characters and symbols When you want to use a user name registered in the SNMP V3 User Information list as an SNMP V3 Trap User Name you must enter the same protocols and passwords registered for the authentication protocol authentication password not displayed on the list privacy protocol and password not displayed on the list into the fields such as SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Protocol SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Password SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Protocol and SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Password If they do not match information registered in the list will be adopted Setup Item List Create SNMP V3 User Information screen You can display this screen by clicking the New button in the Create SNMP V3 User Information page Create SNMP V3 User Information Context Name MFP User Name Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 Authentication Password Privacy Protocol None Privacy Password Permissions Level General User Tip Clicking Save on the Create SNMP V3 User Information screen instantly registers the SNMP V3 user information enabling the registered user to access this equipment via SNMP over a network Item name Desc
82. File Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service You can reconfigure Machine setting by installing Clone File To install Clone File you need to upload Clone File at first 1 cial Item name Description Install button Installs the selected clone file When you click this button a dialog box is displayed to prompt you to enter the password you specified when creating the clone file LJ Setting up File Upload File Upload 1 cs Upload 2 SSS ee Item name Description Browse button Select a clone file Upload button Displays information on the selected clone file and what is included in the clone file LJ Setting up Clone File Information Clone File Information Device Name Not Uploaded Copier Model Version Date Created Item name Description Device Name Displays the device name of the created clone file Copier Model Displays the copier model of the created clone file Version Displays the system ROM version of the created clone file Date Created Displays the created date of the clone file 2 6 Maintenance Item List LJ Setting up Setting data included in Clone File Setting data included in Clone File Security None Default Settings None User Management None Netiork Print Service None Address
83. FileName e FileName Date Page Date Format Select how you add date and time of the file name selected in File Name Format The added information will also be applied to file names attached to E mails YYYY MM DD HH mm S Year 4 digits month day hour minute and second are added YY MM DD HH mm SS Year 2 digits month day hour minute and second are added YYYY MM DD Year 4 digits month and day are added Y Y MM DD Year 2 digits month and day are added HH mm SS Hour minute and second are added YYYY MM DD HH mm SS mm0 Year 4 digits month day hour minute second and random number 2 digits and 0 are added Page Number Format Select the number of digits of a page number applied to Page of the file name selected in File Name Format from 3 to 6 The added information will also be applied to file names attached to E mails 4digits is set as the default Sub ID Format This equipment automatically adds a sub ID identification number to the name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists You can select the number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or AUTO AUTO is selected by default If AUTO is selected a sub ID 4 to 6 digits selected randomly is added according to the status of the file name LJ Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory If SINGLE is selected in MULTI SINGLE PAGE on the scan men
84. Filing Login Device Job Status Logs Counter Template Address Book Change Template Password Group Information Ne heme er Nae s B Templete009 Template Information wo Nene Cd Save Cancel User Name Old Password Retype Passyvo You can configure the following settings in this page P 55 Change Group Password screen Click each button displayed in the page to specify or edit the associated template properties Panel Setting Specify icon settings of the template P 57 Panel Setting Private template Destination Setting Specify the destination to be sent This can be set only when creating the Fax Internet Fax agent or Scan to Email agent P 58 Destination Setting Private template InternetFax Setting Specify how the Internet Fax is transmitted This can be set only when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent P 64 InternetFax Setting Private template Fax Setting Specify how the documents are faxed This can be set only when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent P 64 Fax Setting Private template Email Setting Specify how the documents are transmitted as E mail messages This can be set only when creating a Scan to Email agent P 66 Email Setting Private template Save as file Setting Specify how the documents are saved in a shared folder on this equipment USB media or a network folder This can be set only when creating a Save a
85. IPP Enable or disable the IPP print service Enable is set as the default 2 Port80 Enable Enable or disable Port80 for IPP printing Port631 is usually used for IPP access so users must specify the IPP port to the URL i e http lt IP address or DNS name gt 631 Print for the IPP port When this is enabled this equipment allows IPP access through the Port80 which is the default port for the HTTP access so users do not have to specify the port number in the IPP port i e http lt IP address or DNS name gt Print Disable is set as the default 3 Port Number If enabling the IPP enter the IPP port number You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 631 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number 4 URL Display the URL for IPP printing You cannot change the SSL URL for IPP printing This SSL URL should be set as the print port when users set up the printer driver for IPP printing if the SSL for IPP printing is enabled 5 Enable SSL Enable or disable SSL for IPP printing Disable is set as the default Tips e When the SSL is enabled users can print to the IPP print port using the SSL To print to the IPP prin
86. In Fax Setting you can set the default fax settings that apply to fax operations from the touch panel Fax Setting Terminal ID Fax Number Ringer Yolume Monitor Yolume Completion Tone Yolume Reception Mode Auto Dial Type MF Resolution Standard v Original Mode Text v SO ONOAUNAWND Exposure Auto ON RTI OFF ECM ON Discard ON v Reduction ON Duplex Print OFF Recovery Transmit OFF Stored Time 5 v Journal Auto Print ON v Memory Transmission Report ON ERROR Print 1st Page Image v Multi Transmission Report ON ERROR Print 1st Page Image v Polling Report ON ERROR Relay Originator Always Print 1st Page Image Secure Receive Disable SUN Disable Enable Mon Disable Enable Tue Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Fri Disable Enable Sat Disable Enable Password e eeseeeeeesee8 Retype Password seeeeeeeeesesees Item name Description Terminal ID Enter the terminal ID name company name to identify this equipment The name will be printed at the leading edge of all documents transmitted Fax Number Enter the fax number of this equipment This fax number will be printed at the leading edge of all documents transmitted from Line 1 Ringer Volume Select the ringer volume Monitor Volume Select the volume of the line monitor during transmission Completion Tone Volume Select the volume of the line monitor when completing the printing of a
87. LDAP Server 5 ima Item name Description Number Enter the user number you want to search The search condition should be in the range from 1 to 10000 Department Number Select the department number you want to search User Name Enter the user name you want to search A prefix search is performed with the entered character string Domain Name LDAP Server Enter the domain name or LDAP server you want to search Search button Searches contacts with the entered and selected conditions User Management Tab Page Overview 115 LJ Create User Information screen You can register new user information Create User Information 116 S E Save Cancel _ ds Required User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Authentication Method Password PIN Code ee NO RW DY Role Assignment Group Assignment 1 0 Department Number 1 1 es PANEL Language 12 FANE Keyboard Layout 1 3 Quota Setting Quota Default Quota MFP Local Authentication English US v QWERTY v OFF Item name Description Save button Saves the entered user information Cancel button Cancels creating user information User Name Enter the user name You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols amp _ Domain Name LDAP Server Select the domain name or LDAP server Authentication Method Select the user authent
88. LDAP is running on a server other than a Windows one Attribute type of User Name Enter the attribute type of User Name for LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Attribute type of PIN Enter the attribute type of PIN for the PIN code authentication When you use more than one LDAP server select Enable for LDAP Server2 and or LDAP Server3 and set up the LDAP server as necessary See the settings for LDAP Server Select Disable for unused LDAP servers LDAP Authentication User Authentication Setting User Authentication Authentication failed print job Raw Print Job Auto Release on Login Enable Delete v Enable E Use Password Authentication for Print Job It is not able to print from other than Windows Client when this function is enabled E Enable Guest User Authentication Type LDAP Authentication W Create User Information Automatically LDAP Server Attribute type of User Name a o C A C A a A C A C a a A C a C A a a C A a a C A a A C A Role Based Access Setting Role Based Access using LDAP server Disable v LDAP Server LDAPO1 PIN Code Authentication Setting PIN Code Authentication Minimum PIN Code Length Item name Create User Information Automatically Description Select whether or not to register user information automatically to this equipment Enable is set as the default LDAP Server1 LDAP S
89. LL P 157 Setting up HTTP Network Service LJ P 158 Setting up SMTP Client LL P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service LI P 163 Setting up FTP Server LL P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting LJ P 207 Setting up IPP Print ih LL P 213 Off Device Customization Architecture settings L Deleting an imported device certificate 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Mgnagemem Password Policy R2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Click Delete of Import in Device Certificate Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed Import certuser1 pfs SCEPtAutomatic Not Installed CA Server Address Primary CA Server Address Secondary MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate IP Address v Timeout 10 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHAI mMD5 Poll Interval 1 Minute v Maximum Poll Duration amp Hours X Request Delete The confirmation dialog box appears If no dev
90. N Serial Number a MAC Address de L Save as File amp e Filing Space Available 26201 MB Fax Space Available 978 MB Data Cloning Function Enable v USB Direct Print Enable Location Contact Information Service Phone Number 0 Administrative Message Functions z You can log out by clicking the Logout link at the top right of the page Access Policy Mode 23 24 Access Policy Mode Device Tab Page This chapter describes the Device tab page in the TopAccess end user mode Device Hem ESC enren a E a 26 Displayed Icons aron ce aneesemnoneuniees pec timeeseniauoiaeletengeeenestnauemieces 27 Device Item List TopAccess opens the Device tab which includes a picture indicating the device status At any time the end user may click REFRESH to update the TopAccess status information This tab shows the following information about the device e Filing Login Device 1 es VCE Information m Status Ready Name MFP7447B7 Location f Copier Model OKI MB770 Serial Number MAC Address 00 80 91 74 47 B7 Main Memory Size 2048 MB Page Memory Size 512 MB Save as File amp e Filing Space Available 76065 MB Fax Space Available 943 MB Contact Information 2 Options Phone Number Message Finisher Fax Alerts Paper A4 Paper Available Item name Description Device Information The Paper list shows the tray status e Status Displays the d
91. OONOD OB WD MDN Reply Disable v Item name Description Enable Print Header Select whether to print the E mail header when receiving E mail print jobs Disable is set as the default Enable Print Message Body Select whether to print the body message when receiving E mail print jobs Enable is set as the default Maximum Email Body Print Enter the maximum number of pages to print the body strings of the received E mail print job You can enter between 1 to 99 5 is set as the default Enable Print Email Error Select whether to print the report when an error occurs for E mail printing Enable is set as the default Enable Email Error Forward Select whether to send an error message to an administrative E mail address when E mail printing cannot be completed Disable is set as the default Email Error Transfer Address If enabling the Email Error Forward enter an administrative E mail address where the error message is sent You can enter up to 192 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Enable Partial Email Select whether to print E mail jobs that are partially received Disable is set as the default Partial Wait time Enter how long this equipment should wait before printing a partial E mail job Specify within the range from 1 to 24 hours 24 is set as the default MDN Reply Select whether to send an MDN message reply or not when the equipm
92. P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 6 Click OK to apply the changes Ue HEL uii The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 216 Setup How to Set and How to Operate 8 Administration Tab Page E Setting up Network settings You can configure TCP IP Filtering IPX SPX AppleTalk Bonjour LDAP DNS DDNS SMB NetWare HTTP SMTP Client SMTP Server POP3 SNTP Settings FTP Client FTP Server SNMP Security Setting and others from the Network submenu under the Setup menu Setting the network settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Network submenu Logout Device Registration User Management Administration Setup General BEz The Network submenu page is displayed In the Network submenu page click li
93. Personal C Certificates Trusted Root Certification Authorities C Enterprise Trust Intermediate Certification Authorities Trusted Publishers Untrusted Certificates Third Party Root Certification Authorities Trusted People Smart Card Trusted Roots The Certificate window appears Installing Certificates for a Client PC 9 Click the Details tab and select Thumbprint to check the 40 digit thumbprint F Certificate General Details Certification Path Show lt All 1 Field Value FE Authority Key Identifier KeyID 1la ic 85 84c5 e9 ee 0 CRL Distribution Points 1 CRL Distribution Point Distr FE Authority Information Access 1 Authority Info Access Acc y Enhanced Key Usage Server Authentication 1 3 6 E Application Policies 1 Application Certificate Polic E Thumbprint algorithm shai be cc ca d9 23 0c 67 bf da 9e be cc ca d9 2 67 bf da 9e f5 c2 e c4 14 10 60 90 65 3a N Edit Properties Copy to File Learn more about certificate details Lox 1 0 Open the command prompt and execute the netsh command as shown below Tip If you log in to Windows Vista as a user without the administrator privilege open the command prompt by right clicking the icon and selecting Run as administrator This way you can temporarily have the administrator priv
94. Print Select whether the USB Direct Print function is enabled or disabled Location Enter the installed location of your equipment This is displayed in the Device tab page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for users Contact Information Enter the name of the person who is responsible for this equipment This is displayed in the Device tab page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for users Service Phone Number Enter the telephone number of the person who is responsible for servicing this equipment This is displayed in the Device tab page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for users Administrative Message Enter the message to the users about this equipment This is displayed in the Device tab page that appears first when accessing the TopAccess website for users Setup Item List 137 LJ Setting up Functions Tip Some items may not be changeable depending on the installed options and their settings Functions Save as Local HDD Enable e Filing Enable Email Send Enable v Save as FTP Enable v Save as FTPS Enable v Save to USB Media Enable v Save as SMB Enable Save as Netware Enable iFax Send Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Fax Send Enable Network iFax Enable Network Fax Enable 1 3 feb Services Scan Enable 1 4 Twain Scanning Enable 1 5 Scan to External Controller Enable
95. Print Job page is displayed 2 Select the check box next to the job that you want to print e Filing Login Device Registration Counter Print Job REFRESH Delete Rel R C c C a C e Co Click Release The selected print job is immediately printed WE Checking recovery information You can check the conditions to restart a print job which has been skipped while the job skip feature was enabled Tip For the job skip feature see the following P 139 Setting up Job Skip Control Click the Job Status tab and click the Print menu The Print Job page is displayed 2 Select the check box next to the print job whose job status is Skipped e Filing Logout Device Registration Counter User Management Administration Print Job REFRESH Delete Release Recovery Information Delete All Private Print Jabs Delete All Hold Print Jobs a a CC a a a e CC A CC a ofpe penera pa e p p o e Ama of this page Click Recovery Information The conditions to restart the print job are displayed 36 Job Status How to Set and How to Operate Logs Tab Page Using TopAccess end users can display print job logs transmission journals reception journals and scan job logs Logs Tab Page OV el VOW iiessiese ch esac teense ec ees ge eee ete ieee 38 Mew Logs kiten MS Cpe esa Sa Sa a cen A Sa et hg acl ety er aS IO Sah a SNS 38 Export Logs Item list lt acceSs
96. SMTP server you must configure the DNS server and enable the DNS in the DNS Session Tip When the Obtain a SMTP Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the SMTP server address can be obtained using the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP 158 Setup Item List Item name Description POP Before SMTP Select whether the POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled or disabled Disable is set as the default Authentication Select the type of authentication to access the SMTP server e Disable Select this to access the SMTP server using no authentication e Plain Select this to access the SMTP server using plain authentication e Login Select this to access the SMTP server using the log in authentication e CRAM MD5 Select this to access the SMTP server using CRAM MD5 authentication Digest MD5 Select this to access the SMTP server using Digest MD5 authentication Kerberos Select this to access the SMTP server using Kerberos authentication NTLM IWA Select this to access the SMTP server using NTLM IWA authentication AUTO Select this to access the SMTP server using the appropriate authentication that this equipment detects Login Name Enter the log in name to access the SMTP server if the SMTP authentication is enabled You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Password Enter the passwor
97. SNMP for IPv4 Select this to search this equipment over the network with SNMP protocol when Client Utilities is used under IPv4 environment SNMP for IPv6 Select this to search this equipment over the network with SNMP protocol when Client Utilities is used under IPv6 environment SMB Select this to enable domain name resolution when NetBIOS name is used under IPv4 environment Bonjour Select this to search this equipment over the network with Bonjour protocol Neighbor Discovery Link Local Address Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv6 environment Neighbor Discovery Manual Select this to enable address resolution when this equipment is used under IPv6 environment LLMNR Select this to enable domain name resolution when NetBIOS name is used under IPv6 environment LLTD Select this to search this equipment over the network with Nmap display when Network Mapper is used SLP Select this to enable service discovery when SLP is used Web Services for IPv4 Select this to search this equipment over the network with WS Discovery under IPv4 environment Web Services for IPv6 Select this to search this equipment over the network with WS Discovery under IPv6 environment 170 Setup Item List e The protocol selecting list of the Wake Up setting is made to select the desired protocols regardless of whether the selected protocol is enabled or disabled on each protocol setting If the selected protoc
98. SSL Port Number Item name Description Enable FTP Server Select whether the FTP server is enabled or disabled Select Enable to enable the following functions e FTP printing e Reading writing the address book data using the Address Book Viewer e Backing up Restoring the e Filing data using the e Filing Backup Restore Utility Enable is set as the default Enable SSL Select whether the SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled or disabled for the FTP server Disable is set as the default Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols Default Port Number Enter the port number for the FTP server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 21 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number SSL Port Number Enter the port number that is used to access this equipment using FTP with SSL The port number depends on the port setting in the FTP server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 990 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you ca
99. Save as file and Save to USB Media agents of Meta Scan for templates and register them Meta data is managed by an XML file which defines the scheme to store the information This section describes the data structure using the XML file lt defaultForm3 xml gt registered as the default as an example The default XML file consists of two data areas the basic data area and extended data area The basic data area records device information scan parameters and user information while the extended data area records information entered by the user on the control panel maximum 25 items when running Meta Scan The user can create fields in extended data area to store information entered from the control panel under Extended Field Definition Extended Field Properties When using applications that interact with Meta Scan follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML format file and the extended field LL P 342 Procedure for using Meta Scan LJ P 342 Checking Meta Scan Enabler LL P 343 Editing XML format file LL P 347 Registering XML format file LJ P 348 Registering Extended Field Definition LL P 351 Registering templates for Meta Scan LJ P 354 Meta Scan LL P 354 Checking logs of Meta Scan WE Procedure for using Meta Scan Setup Operation Description Reference Checking the Meta Scan option
100. Search Contact Search Cancel Enter a partial name or Email address to search for a contact v First Name Email Address Fax Number Company Department 1 2 3 4 5 Last Name 6 7 8 9 Item name Description Search button Searches contacts with the entered conditions P 79 Search Address List screen Cancel button Cancels the contact search Directory Service Name Select the LDAP server for the search First Name Enter the search condition Last Name Email Address Fax Number Company Olo IN OO oO P OIN Department Tips e If you select MFP LOCAL at the Directory Service Name box you can search for destinations in the address book of this equipment e TopAccess will search for destinations that contain the text entered in each item e Leaving the box blank allows wild card searching However you must specify at least one LJ Search Address List screen Select from the search address list and add to the address book Search Address List Add Cancel Research Number of Search Result v wame Email Address Fax Number sxample com CONOO RhWNH Item name Description Add button Adds the contact selected in the search address list into the address book Cancel button Cancels the search address list display Registration Tab Page Overview 79
101. Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 5 0 PDF V1 4 128 bit AES Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 7 0 PDF V1 6 Authority Select the desired types of authority for Encrypt PDF e Printing Select this to authorize users to print documents e Change of Documents Select this to authorize users to change documents e Content Copying or Extraction Select this to authorize users to copy and extract the contents of documents Content Extraction for accessibility Select this to enable the accessibility feature Tips If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled you cannot clear the Encryption check box For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide The user password and the master password are not set at the factory shipment Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one byte alphanumerical characters The user password must differ from the master password These passwords can be re entered only by an authorized user Users cannot change the settings of the Encryption Level box and the Authority box if they are not authorized to change the master password For the details of the encryption setting refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords Destination Use local folder Select this to save a received document to the FILE SHARE folder Registration Ad
102. Set Network Location window appears 16 Accessing TopAccess 1 Overview 6 Click Work network Select a location for the Network network This computer is connected to a network Windows will automatically apply the correct network settings based on the network s location Home network N Ne If all the computers on this network are at your home and you recognize them this is a trusted home network Don t choose this for public places such as coffee shops or airports Work network If all the comp Ners on this network are at your workplace and you recognize them this is a ed work network Don t choose this for public places such as coffee shops or Mports Public network d If you don t recognize all the computers on the network for example you re in a coffee shop or airport or you have mobile broadband this is a public network and is not trusted Treat all future networks that I connect to as public and clon t ask me again Help me choose Cancel The Set Network Location confirmation window appears 7 Click Close ee esa ks Set Network Location The network location is now Work Network name Network Location type Work On Work networks you can see other computers and devices on the network and your computer is discoverable View or change settings in Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices on the network Accessing TopAccess
103. Single Sign On for Scan to Email Select whether or not to enable single sign on Enable is set as the default LI Setting up Home Directory Setting You can configure the home directory when home directory is enabled Home Directory Setting Home Directory Enable v Home Directory Server Use User Authentication Server Home Directory Select whether or not to enable home directory Home Directory Server Specify the home directory server e Use User Authentication Server Select this to use the user authentication server as the home directory server Use User Authentication Server Use specific server for Card Authentication Select this to use the user authentication server as the home directory server However use the specified server as the home directory server in the case of Card Authentication e User Specific Server Select this to specify the home directory server If you select Use User Authentication Server Use specific server for Card Authentication or User Specific Server the LDAP server list appears on the screen You can set up to 3 servers Click the Primary button to select the primary server Click the LDAP server name on the list to open the Home Directory Server Setting screen Select the home directory server for each server name If you do not specify the server select Disable Security Item List 255 E Certificate management settings You can manage device
104. Updates Reboot REFRESH Import Method Addition Overwrite File Name aBLOWSE Addition Select this to add the imported address book data into the address book already registered in this equipment Overwrite Select this to delete all the address book data registered in this equipment and replace them with the imported address book data The Import Method page is closed 5 Click Browse in the Address Book area e Filing Logout Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot REFRESH Address Book Import Method Addition Overwrite File Name a ee MailBoxes N File Name The Choose file dialog box appears 6 Select the CSV XML file that contains address book data and click Open x a meee LE a a ee _ l JO IE gt asmin v document vieller e Se E ooo gt B Organize ooo Views v F New Folder Favorite Links Name Date modified Type Size Tags E Documents E Music j Pictures Public Recently Changed B Searches SB Recent Places ME Desktop jf Computer Folders a File name ADDR_CSV081122 csv v Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 297 8 Adminis
105. When the search is complete the Search Address List page will display the results 5 Select the Email check boxes of users you want to add Click Research to return to step 3 so that you can change the search criteria and execute the search again Search Address List Add Cancel Research Number of Search Result1 wame company department Email Address FirstName10 LastName10 i User1 0 example com Go pp ofthis page The value of company and department will depend on the settings determined by the administrator Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 333 334 G Click Add The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page Tip You can remove destinations that you have added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 334 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List 7 Click Save Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete H A ame Destination FirstName10 LastName10 User1 0 example com The contacts are added as destinations Removing the destinations from the Recipient List Select the check boxes of the destinations that you want to remove from the Recipient List and click Delete Recipient List save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search II wNarne irstName10 LastName10 N The selected
106. are replaced with Registration Tab Page Overview 77 78 Item name Description Department Enter the department name of the contact You can enter up to 64 characters Invalid characters are replaced with Keyword Enter the comments on the contact You can enter up to 256 characters Invalid characters are replaced with e You must specify either the First Name or Last Name box and either the Email Address or Fax Number box to register the contact e If you enter number in the Fax Number and 2nd Fax Number a three second pause is added for dialing the fax e To perform fax transmission the Fax Unit is required If the Fax Unit is not installed you cannot perform the fax transmission even if you specify the fax number Q Fax Setting screen Save Reset Line Select Quality Transmit Transmission Type 1 Save button Fax Setting Address Book gt Contact Property gt Saves the entered information Reset button Restores fax settings set for the contact to the default status SUB Enter the mailbox number if you want to send a fax to the contact s fax mailbox You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers and SID Enter the password to send a fax to the contact s fax mailbox You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers and SEP Enter the mailbox number if you want to retrieve a document from
107. as the normal image quality mode This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents which contain both texts and photos e Photo Select the Photo mode as the normal image quality mode This mode is suitable when you are transmitting photo documents Exposure Select the exposure for sending faxes Select Auto to automatically apply the ideal contrast or adjust the contrast manually in 11 stages Transmission Type Select the send mode e Memory Transmit Select the Memory TX mode to automatically send the document after it has been temporarily stored to memory This mode is useful if you want to return original files immediately You can also send the same originals to two or more remote faxes e Direct Transmit Select the Direct TX mode to send the original as it is being scanned This mode is useful if you want confirmation from the remote party Originals are not stored to memory and you can specify only one remote fax at a time Tip You can select Direct Transmit when you have created a template for Fax InternetFax not for Saved as file When Fax InternetFax and Save as file setting are combined this item will be unselectable and will not be displayed ECM Enable or disable the ECM Error Correction Mode to automatically resend any portion of the document affected by phone line noise or distortion Quality Transmit Select this to send a document in the Quality TX mode This fea
108. authority The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website s address Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Click here to close this webpage amp Continue to this website not recommended More information 10 Accessing TopAccess 1 Overview 2 The TopAccess website appears e Filing Login Device Tray 1 A4 Plain None 530 Paper Available You can also access TopAccess using the TopAccessDocMon link For instructions on accessing TopAccess from TopAccessDocMon refer to the Help for TopAccessDocMon Accessing TopAccess_ 11 WE Accessing TopAccess from Network Map Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Confirm the network connection status on the Network Map with the LLTD feature of Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 and then click the displayed icon of this equipment jaa MA P 12 With Unidentified Network Windows Vista P 15 With Unidentified Network Windows 7 P 18 Accessing TopAccess from Network Map Tip You can install the driver required for web services by right clicking the icon and selecting Install For the driver required for web services refer to the User s Manual Basic Guide
109. be printed on paper of a different size For example you can print a document set up for Letter size on A4 paper When disabled this equipment will prompt users for the correct paper size Enable is set as the default Wide A4 Mode for PCL Select whether the width of the printable area of copy paper is widened or not when you are printing a PCL print job on A4 paper Select Enable to widen it for approx 3 5 mm 0 14 inch when in a portrait direction and approx 1 5 mm 0 06 inch when in a landscape direction Thus more data can be printed for each line Disable is set as the default Restriction for Print Job Select whether or not to restrict printing certain print jobs e None Select this to print all data Only Private Select this to print private print jobs only Only Hold Select this to print hold print jobs only Only Private Hold Select this to print private and hold print jobs only 202 Setup Item List LI Setting up Default Raw Job Setting In Default Raw Job Setting you can specify the default raw job setting which applies to a raw job for which no queue name is specified or for which a specified queue name does not exist Tip You can also add LPR queue names and specify the raw job setting for each queue P 204 Setting up Raw Job Setting Default Raw Job Setting Raw Jobs Duplex Printing Disable z Raw Jobs Default Paper Size Ad Raw Jobs Default Paper Type Plain
110. bottom When the portrait originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1 this equipment copies them from right to left When the landscape originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1 this equipment copies them from top to bottom Maximum Copies Select the maximum numbers of pages that users can specify for copying You can select from 999 99 or 9 Setup Item List 183 184 Item name Auto 2 sided Mode Description Select how the 2 sided mode initially applies to copy settings when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder Available only when the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder and the Automatic Duplexing Unit are installed e OFF Select this to initially apply 1 gt 1 SIMPLEX when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder One sided Double sided Select this to initially apply 1 gt 2 DUPLEX when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder Double sided Double sided Select this to initially apply 2 gt 2 DUPLEX when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder User Selection Select this to initially display the screen to select the 2 sided mode when originals are set in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder Sort Mode Priority Setup Item List Select the default sort mode for copying e Non Sort Copies exit without sorting e Staple Copies exit with their corner stapled e Sort Copies exit in the same
111. can upload e STUDIO6550c Series client software to the controller This allows end users to install the software into their system from the TopAccess Install Software link located atthe bottom ofthe TopAccess page Upload Files Driver Files z The following are the required files The Reboot submenu page is displayed 4 Click Reboot to reboot the equipment e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Sofware Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Press the Reboot button to restart the equipment The confirmation dialog box appears 5 Click OK Message from webpage Ea REFRESH When there are jobs in progress they are canceled and the Reboot is executed Is it OK The equipment is restarted While the equipment is being restarted the network will not be available TopAccess will display Please restart after waiting a few minutes The touch panel will display NETWORK INITIALIZING When this NETWORK INITIALIZING message disappears TopAccess will once again be available Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 301 Registration Administration tab Item List Tip Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode c
112. created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting Tip The exported file can be used to import the department codes and the department counters in Import Department Code P 133 Import User Management Tab Page Overview LJ Import e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration Department Management ExportAmport Export Import Export Import It may take more than 10 minutes if there are a lot of entries User Information File Name Browsen Import Combined User Information Role Group File Name Browse Import LDAP Role File Name Browse Import Department Code Import Method Overwrite Addition Addition and Clear Counter File Name Browsen Import Counters of all departments will be cleared if you select Addition and ClearCounter and import User Information You can import user information from a file Click the Browse button to select the file to import and click Open Check the file name and click the Import button Combined User Information Role You can import combined information user information role group from a file Group Click the Browse button to select the file to import and click Open Check the file name and click the Import button LDAP Role Use this item to import the role informa
113. destinations are removed from the Recipient List 2 Click Save Destination Useri 0 example com Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate My Account Tab Page Using TopAccess end users can display their own account information My Account Tab Page OvervieW ssssssssssnnsnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 336 MY ACCOUrnI Hemlin a a aa a a Oe aor Ree a Geen hana naa as 336 My Account Tab Page Overview The My Account tab is displayed if User Authentication is enabled in the Administration tab under Security Authentication User Authentication Setting It displays the account information of the user who is accessing TopAccess Also you can change the display language and keyboard layout on the control panel P 336 My Account Item list E My Account Item list LL P 337 Change Password screen LL P 338 Menu Setting screen LL P 338 Select Menu Type screen LX P 339 Select Template Group screen fy LL P 339 Select Template screen LX P 340 Select URL screen LL P 340 Confirm Permission screen e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration User Management Administration My Account My Account Save Cancel Change Password Menu l User Name Domain Name LDAP Server
114. disable the function to skip jobs which do not match the printing conditions LI Setting up Restriction on Address Book Operation by Administrator 1 No Restriction 2 Can be operated by Administrator only Restriction on Address Book Operation by Administrator Item name Description No Restriction All users can operate on the address book Can be operated by Administrator only Only users whose access policy is set as an administrator can operate on the address book LI Setting up Confidentiality Setting You can set whether to hide or not document names displayed in jobs and logs using asterisks Confidentiality Setting 1 ee Document Name Disable v Item name Description Document Name Select whether to hide or not the document name in jobs and logs using 10 asterisks e Enable Select this to hide the document name e Disable Select this to show the document name Setup Item List 139 140 LJ Setting up Energy Saver Mode You can set Energy Saver mode for your equipment For information on types of Energy Saver mode and how to enter the mode see the User s Manual Setup Guide Energy Save ito Clear No Limit v Ato Power Save 60 Minutes v Sleep Timer 60 Minutes v S225 Mode Auto X Item name Description Auto Clear Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before the touch panel automatically returns to the def
115. document is retrieved it is cleared If a new document is sent to the same box number where another document is stored it is added to the existing box P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox Bulletin Board Creates a bulletin board mailbox The Bulletin Board Box allows multiple document retrievals from the same mailbox Once a document is retrieved it is not cleared If a new document is sent to the same Box it replaces the existing one P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox Forward Creates a multiple transmission relay mailbox When you select this select the agent from Internet Fax Relay Save as file Email or Store to e Filing Use the forward mailbox when you want to forward a fax document to specified destinations automatically Internet Fax Relay Creates a multiple transmission relay mailbox for the Internet Fax or fax This agent can be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing agent LL P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox LL P 84 Destination Setting Mailbox LL P 84 InternetFax Setting Mailbox LL P 84 Relay End Terminal Report Mailbox The Internet Fax Relay agent cannot be used to forward an inbound fax routed via Inbound FAX Routing Save as file Creates a shared folder forwarding mailbox This agent can be combined with the Internet Fax Relay Email or Store to e Filing agent LL P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox LL P 85
116. e Remote 2 Select this to save in the folder set in Remote 2 LJ Setting up Folder Name You can select whether to add information related to this equipment or users to the name of a folder created automatically when you save files Folder Name 1 Folder Name Setting Add MachineName v Item name Description Folder Name Setting Select additional information of the name of a folder created when you save files e Disable Select this not to add any information e Add MachineName Select this to add the NetBIOS name of this equipment e Add UserName Select this to add a user name set in user authentication Setup Item List LJ Setting up Format You can set how to name files of the scanned images when you save them into the FILE SHARE folder of this equipment or USB Format ee File Name Format FileName Date Page Date Format YY MM DD HH mm S3 Page Number Formatt Adigits v Sub ID Format AUTO These settings are applied to the file attached to Email Item name Description File Name Format Select the format of the file name Information such as file name date and time or page number is added according to the selected format The added information will also be applied to file names attached to E mails e FileName Date Page e FileName Page Date e Date FileName Page Date Page Filename Page FileName Date e Page Date
117. each Input Method is displayed for mandatory setting Mandatory setting items Optional setting items Numerical value Maximum Value Minimum Value Default Value Settable value 999 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 999 Decimal value Maximum Value Minimum Value Default Value Settable value 999 999 999 999 999999 to 999 999 999 999 999999 Text Maximum Length Minimum Length Default Value Settable value 0 to 256 List List Items Default Value You can register up to 256 List Items Select from the registered selection items You can set from 1 to 126 characters in Name You can set from 1 to 126 characters in Value However the total number of characters set in Name and Value must be from 2 to 127 Address None Default Value Password None Default Value Settable value 0 to 256 Date None Default Value Click the Save button to register the extended field properties You can register up to 25 extended field properties The extended field properties are registered 350 Setting up Meta Scan Function Mi Registering templates for Meta Scan You must register a template for Meta Scan before using the Meta Scan function A template can be a public template which is registered by an administrator or a private template which is registered by a user or an administrator Both templates can be used to register a Meta Scan template The following procedure sh
118. equipment The role information setting file is a file in which the attributes of the external authentication server and corresponding MFP are defined in XML You can edit the role information setting file exported from the equipment and import it back to the equipment E Exporting the role information setting file See the following page for how to export the role information setting file P 131 Export E Defining the role information setting file The role information setting file is written in XML format The role of this equipment can be assigned to the attribute set in the external server by defining the role information setting file in accordance with the external authentication server setting The three examples of the major definition method for this file are explained here Alphanumeric characters can be used for the content of each element An asterisk can be used as a wildcard for the lt attributeValue gt element Tip The role of the user that does not correspond to the lt RoleSet gt element is defined in the lt AnyOtherUser gt element This element can only be used once LJ When setting one role to one attribute Attribute name set in the external authentication server Department Attribute value set in the external authentication server ITDept Role name to be set Administrator lt RoleSetting gt lt RoleSet gt lt Condition gt lt AttributeName gt department lt AttributeName gt lt AttributeValu
119. equipment You can enter up to 127 characters other than semicolon and backslash Web Services Scan Select whether the Web Services Scan is enabled or disabled e Enable Select this to enable the Web Services Scan e Disable Select this to disable the Web Services Scan Scanner Name Assign the scanner name for this equipment You can enter up to 127 characters and symbols other than semicolon backslash gt lt and MFP model name Serial number is set as the default Scanner Information Assign the scanner information for this equipment You can enter up to 127 characters other than semicolon and backslash Authentication for PC Initiated Specify whether to enable user authentication before accepting a scan from a client PC Scan e Do not accept any job Select this not to accept any jobs regardless of the result of user authentication Accept the job if user name is valid Select this to accept jobs only after successful user authentication Accept any job Select this to accept any jobs regardless of the result of user authentication 168 Setup Item List LJ Setting up LLTD Session Enable this setting for confirming the device connection status installing devices or accessing the TopAccess This setting also allows you to discover the desired device over the local network and view device information such as location IP address
120. groups Before registering private templates you have to register the private template group You can classify the private templates according to every department every user and use by registering the private template groups Also each private template group can be protected by a password Tips e You can define up to 200 private template groups To define the private template groups you can specify the group name owner and E mail notification setting e The required template may have already been created by a user who is granted administrator privileges in access policy mode or other user Check the existing templates to see if they can be used before creating a new template or group Click the Registration tab and the Template menu The Template Groups page is displayed 2 Click the Undefined group link to create a new private group Click the defined group name link to edit the group information e Filing Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Wuda AddressBook Inbound FAX routing Template Groups Please select a group to edit below Public Template Groups User Name AllGroups Defined Groups Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 O71 081 O91 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 e If you select the private template group that has not been defined the Group Properties page is displayed Skip to step 5 e f you select the defined private template group that is not prote
121. gt User 0l gt Downloads 4 Search Downloads Organize v New folder x Favorites Date modified Type BD Desktop mt Downloads SB Recent Places No items match your search Libraries Documents d Music E Pictures E Videos i Computer a O ALF 12 ts or __ I a File name SNMPv3 0001 attribute 1 x Hide Folders ve Export SNMP V3 User Information File Name Size SNMPv3 0001 attribute 1 id 0 132812 Internet Protected Mode On fay 100 The export operation may be unstable if administrators are accessing this equipment from multiple computers simultaneously in the access policy mode to export information Be sure that the administrator accesses this equipment from only one computer when exporting 222 Setup How to Set and How to Operate LJ Deleting SNMP V3 user information Click the SNMP Network Service button from the Network submenu under the Setup menu 2 Select the check box of SNMP V3 user information that you want to delete from the SNMP V3 user information list and then click Delete Tip Click Delete All to delete all the SNMP V3 user information SNMP Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable SNMP W172 Enable v Read Community public Read Write Community private Enable SNMP V3 Disable v SNMP V3 User Information Authentication Protocol Privacy Protocol Permissions L
122. if required when Static IP is selected in the Address Mode box Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 However you cannot set 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Q Setting up Filtering EJ You can set filtering in order to restrict access from client computers to this equipment Filtering can be specified with an IP address or a MAC address MAC address filtering is given priority over IP address filtering Filtering Enable IP Filtering Disable v IP Filtering Rule Permit 3 ee Filtering Start Address Ena Address Filter 1 I 0 0 Fitter 2 Filter 3 Fitter 4 Fitter 5 Fitter 6 Fitter 7 Filter 3 Filter 9 Fitter 10 4 E able MAC Address Filtering Disable 5 MAC Address Filtering Rule Permit 6 AC Address Filtering Mac Address Fitter 1 Fitter 2 Fitter 3 Fitter 4 Fitter 5 Fitter 6 Fitter 7 Fitter 6 Fitter 9 Fitter 10 Setup Item List 145 Item name Description Enable IP Filtering Select Enable for IP address filtering When Enable is selected access from devices ona network to which the IP address specified in IP Filtering is set is restricted under conditions set in IP Filtering Rule Disable is set as the default IP filtering is valid only in a network environment implemented with IPv4 It is not available in an IPv6 network environment If you need to use IP add
123. in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Note This selection will be applicable for all IKEv1 settings IP Address IP Address x E Enable PFS Integrity Encryption E AES 256 cBC AES 192 CBC AES 128 CBC AES CTR M wi 3DES CBC DES CBC Diffie Hellman algorithm MODP 1024 Group 2 Modify IKE OK Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings IKE Type IKE Version IKEv1 Main Mode Authentication Method Certificate Preshared Key IKEv2 Authentication Method Certificate Preshared Key Local ID Remote ID Session Key Settings Generate a new key after FilterIKE Transforms 28800 iSeconds SHA4 MDS E AES XCBC MAC IKE Key Name TESTO1 Note This selection will be applicable for all IKEv1 settings IP Address v IP Address v E Enable PFS Integrity Encryption _ AES 256 CBC l AES 192 CBC iv AES 128 CBC AES CTR 3DES CBC DES CBC Diffie Hellman algorithm MODP 1024 Group 2 178 OK button Item name Description 1 Saves the key setting Cancel button Cancels registration of the key Reset button Setup Item List Returns the settings to the defaults Item name IKE Key Name Description Enter the name of the IKE key You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters
124. language for the touch panel PanelUl Keyboard Layout Select the panel keyboard layout displayed on the touch panel Maintenance Item List 287 WE System Updates settings You can update the system on your equipment Tip The System Updates submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List LL P 288 Setting up Install Software Package LL P 288 Setting up Current Software List LI Setting up Install Software Package Install Software Package 1 File Name Browse Install Item name Description File Name Select the software pack file to be installed Browse button Allows you to select the software pack file Install button Installs the selected software pack file LI Setting up Current Software List Displays a list of installed System Firmware Current Software List ame ersion ate Created 130SFOvv0020 42 SFOvyoo30 r1 30HDOWwoo20 r1 30HDOWO030 rye 130FYWV 03 PR KXKRRKKK Item name Description Name Displays the name of the System Firmware Version Displays the version of the System Firmware Date Created Displays the Created date of the System Firmware Date Installed Displays the installed dat
125. line noise or distortion 14 Discard Select whether to discard the lower portion of the received fax image if it is larger than the recording paper 15 Reduction Select whether to reduce the received fax image if it is larger than the effective printing area of the recording paper 16 Duplex Print Select whether to print the received fax images on both sides of the recording paper Available only when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed 17 Recovery Transmit Select whether to re transmit a fax after failing the initially specified number of redial attempts When this is enabled select the stored time length from 1 to 24 hours 18 Journal Auto Print Select whether to automatically print a transmission and reception journal after every transmission completed 19 Memory Transmission Report Select how to print a result report after a memory transmission OFF Select this to not print a memory transmission report Always Select this to print a memory transmission report with all page images for each memory transmission completed ON ERROR Select this to print a memory transmission report with all page images only when the memory transmission is not successfully completed Always Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a memory transmission report with the 1st page image for each memory transmission completed ON ERROR Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a memory transmission report with the 1st page
126. locked user selected in the user account list Reset Password button Resets the password of the user selected in the user account list P 117 Enter Password screen Set Registered Quota button Initializes the registered quota for the user selected in the user account list Set Registered All Quotas button Initializes all registered quotas Reset Counters button Resets counters for the user selected in the user account list Reset All Counters button Resets counters for all departments Number Displays the registration number of the user 10001 to 10007 are assigned to default users User Management Tab Page Overview Item name Description User Name Displays the user name Undefined Admin Service Auditor Faxope Guest and Printope are default users You can check the user information by clicking the user name P 118 User Information screen Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server registered in the user information Department Number Displays the department number registered in the user information Status Displays the user status LJ Search User Account screen You can search registered users Select items to be searched and enter or select the search conditions Search User Account Number Start End Department Number 0001 DepartmentNameQ1 User Name Domain Name
127. menu Select the check box of SNMP V3 user information that you want to export from the corresponding list and then click Export SNMP Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable SNMP V172 Enable v Read Community public Read Write Community private Enable SNMP V3 Disable v Administrator Enaf Dawe v3 trap Disable v SNMP V3 Trap User Name SNMP 3 Trap Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 v SNMP 3 Trap Authentication Password SNMP Y3 Trap Privacy Protocol None v The Export page is displayed KE When Please save the Network settings before exporting the user information appears click Save on the Network submenu page and then export Right click the link for the file name of user information to be exported and then select Save Target As Export SNMP V3 User Information File Name SA Ra om 1 Open in New Window Save Target As Print Target N 2 ut Copy Copy Shortcut Paste aF Blog with Windows Live I E mail with Windows Live a Translate with Bing All Accelerators gt Add to Favorites Append Link Target to Existing PDF Append to Existing PDF Convert Link Target to Adobe PDF Convert to Adobe PDF Properties The Save As dialog box appears Setup How to Set and How to Operate 221 8 Administration Tab Page 4 SEEGI the file location and click Save gt dg
128. mm SS Year 2 digits month day hour minute and second are added YYYY MM DD Year 4 digits month and day are added Y Y MM DD Year 2 digits month and day are added HH mm SS Hour minute and second are added YYYY MM DD HH mm SS mm0 Year 4 digits month day hour minute second and random number 2 digits and 0 are added e None Date is not added Page Select the number of digits of a page number applied to Page of the file name selected in Format from 3 to 6 4digits is set as the default Sub ID This equipment automatically adds a sub ID identification number to the name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists You can select the number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or AUTO AUTO is selected by default If AUTO is selected a sub ID 4 to 6 digits selected randomly is added according to the status of the file name Add line information to File Name Select this check box to add the incoming line information Line 1 Line 2 and Internet Fax to the file name The Add line information to File Name check box is ON as the default Up to 999 files that are sent from the same sender can be stored in the same destination If 999 files that are sent from the same sender have already been stored in the specified destination this equipment will print the received document from the same sender instead of storing them as files Registra
129. other Microsoft products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries e Apple AppleTalk Macintosh Mac Mac OS Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc in the US and other countries Preface 1 e Adobe Acrobat Reader and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries e Mozilla Firefox and the Firefox logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mozilla Foundation in the U S and other countries e IBM AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks of Novell Inc e TopAccess is a trademark of Toshiba Tec Corporation e Other company and product names given in this manual or displayed in this software may be the trademarks of their respective companies LJ Security Precautions e To prevent the configuration settings from being changed illegally or similar change the initial administrator password at the time of shipping before you use this product Also the administrator password should be altered periodically e Be sure to log out when leaving your computer while changing TopAccess settings for security purposes e For security purposes do not access any other site while you are logged in to TopAccess 2 Preface CONTENTS PPPOE AC eck cease ENNE N E EE EA PEA N E DE eect ance E E EIA E E E ate ae tekun eu E 1 Chapter 1 Overview
130. policy MOE cc cceccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeees 44 Log Settings Item list lt access policy MOda he acl eae OIA esc ete 45 Logs How to Set and How to Operate cecccecccssecseeceeeeeeeeeseneeseeeeeseeeaneeenesseneseeeesaneneaes 47 Displaying JOD NOG S stasis se ocak wien E E N E EAS 47 FXO IMIG OO Seawssca lacs tli ete Seats A E umtuanacenanenecenedial 4axceuniaeiaredssue a duakicesiuasicasndnunenstan demas wane 48 Logs Tab Page Overview You can check the job history BA BA BA Check the logs periodically to ensure that there is no unauthorized access to the equipment as a result of spoofing Tips e Logs are recorded from the moment the equipment is turned on until it is shut down Log recording continues also after entering the Sleep mode e Up to 100 logs are displayed in chronological order with the most recent first You can check up to 5 000 logs in Print Job Log Export Fax Transmission Journal Export Fax Reception Journal Export and Scan Log Export and up to 10 000 logs in Messages Log Export by exporting them The oldest logs are deleted when the number of logs exceeds the maximum limit e The default Administrator and Auditor roles can check all logs For more information on default roles and privileges see the following P 123 Default roles and privileges e When user authentication is enabled you can
131. range from 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to Ffff fE TERR TP PP PTF Use DHCPV6 Server for options Select this check box to use the optional information IPv6 address for the DNS server etc which is issued from the DHCPv6 server Tips e When Manual is selected a stateful address cannot be set e Ifthe selected IPv6 address is already assigned DAD Duplicate Address Detection detects it and notifies you on the touch panel of this equipment Setup Item List 147 Item name Description Use Stateless Address Use the IPv6 addresses Stateless addresses issued from routers e Use DHCPV6 Server for IP Address M flag Use the IPv6 address issued from the DHCPvV6 server in the stateless network environment Use DHCPv6 Server for options O flag Use the optional information IPv6 address for the DNS server etc issued from the DHCPV6 server in the stateless network environment FQDN Option The FQDN option is available if Use DHCPv6 Server for IP Address is selected Select Server or Client for Update Method if using the FQDN option Server is set as the default IP Address Stateless Addresses obtained from routers are displayed Up to 7 IPv6 addresses can be retained Tip When this equipment receives a router advertisement RA from a router of which M flag configuration is 0 the DHCPv6 function is disabled If you change a router advertisement RA M flag configuration from 0 to 1 it is nece
132. received fax 186 Setup Item List Item name Description 6 Reception Mode Select how this equipment activates when a fax is received e Auto Select this to automatically receive incoming originals when the bell rings Select this when the line is being used exclusively by the fax transmission e Manual Select this to manually receive incoming originals after pressing the Start button on the control panel e TEL FAX Select this to automatically detect whether the incoming call is a telephone call or a fax transmission Select this option when connecting this equipment to a line which is also used as a telephone line 7 Dial Type Select the dial type for Line 1 e DP Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for Line 1 e MF Select this to use Multi frequency type for Line 1 Tip The following items are displayed for some models 10PPS Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 10PPS 20PPS Select this to use the Dial Pulse type for 20PPS PB Select this to use a tone type push phone line 8 Resolution Select the default resolution for sending faxes e Standard Select this to use the standard mode as the default resolution This mode is suitable when you are frequently transmitting text documents with normal size characters e Fine Select this to use the fine mode as the default resolution This mode is suitable when you are transmitting docu
133. save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files Tips e Ifthe Forced Encryption setting is enabled only PDF Multi and PDF Single are selectable for a file format For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e Files saved in XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed 310 Registration Administration tab Item List Item name Description Encryption Set this to encrypt PDF files if you have selected PDF Multi or PDF Single in the File Format setting Encryption Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files User Password Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files Master Password Enter a password for changing the Encrypt PDF setting Encryption Level Select the desired encryption level e 40 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to one compatible with Acrobat 3 0 PDF V1 1 128 bit RC4
134. scanned file to a network folder How you can set this item depends on how the user with administrator privileges configured Remote 1 in the Save as file submenu under the Setup menu When you select Allow the following network folder to be used as a destination you can only select Use Administrator Setting The protocol and the network path are displayed below this item When you select Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination you can select Use User Setting and enter the following items to specify where to save the file If you are allowed to specify a network folder select Use User Setting and enter the following items to specify where to save the file Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a scanned file to the network folder e SMB Select this to send a scanned file to the network folder using the SMB protocol e FTP Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server e EFTPS Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL e NetWare IPX SPX Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the IPX SPX protocol e NetWare TCP IP Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the TCP IP protocol Server Name When you select FTP as the protocol enter the FTP server name or IP address where a scanned file will be sent For example to send a scanned file to the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP
135. select FTP as the protocol an anonymous login is assumed if you leave this box blank Password Enter the password to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare server if required Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation 5 Destination Remote 2 Select this check box to save a received document to Remote 2 How you can set this item depends on how the 2nd Folder has been set up in the Save as file submenu in the Setup menu If Remote 2 does not allow you to specify a network folder you can only select Use Administrator Setting The protocol and the network path are displayed below this item If the Remote 2 allows you to specify a network folder you can specify the network folder settings See the description of the Remote 1 option for each item Registration Administration tab Item List Item name Description File Name Format Select the format of the file name Information such as file name date and time or page number is added according to the selected format e FileName Date Page e FileName Page Date e Date FileName Page Date Page Filename e Page FileName Date e Page Date FileName e FileName Date Page Comment Enter the comment on the file Date Select how you add date and time of the file name selected in Format e YYYY MM DD HH mm SS Year 4 digits month day hour minute and second are added YY J MM DD HH
136. select all users in the list by clicking on the W button The value of company and department will depend on the settings made by the user who is granted administrator privileges in access policy mode G Click Add Selected contacts are added to the Address Book LJ Managing groups in the Address Book You can create groups that contain the multiple recipients This enables you to specify the groups for the destinations instead of specifying each recipient separately when operating Scan to Email or Fax or Internet Fax transmission You can also delete groups 1 Click the Registration tab and the Address Book menu The Address Book page is displayed 2 Click the Groups submenu The groups list is displayed 3 Click New to add a new group Or click the corresponding link to the group which you want to edit or delete in the group list Login Registration Counter Address Book Contacts Groups The Group Properties page is displayed 98 Registration How to Set and How to Operate Enter the group name in the Group Name column Click Delete to delete the selected group e Filing Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter emplate Address Book nbound uting Group Properties Address Book 3 Required Group Name GroupName1 ID jEmail Fax jwName Email Address Fax Number S 1 F E Firsttvamet LastName10 User10 example com 901 2345 6789
137. template LL P 303 Setting up Scan Setting Public template LL P 303 Setting up Email Setting Public template LL P 303 Setting up Extended Field Settings LI Setting up Panel Setting Public template You can specify how the template icons are displayed on the touch panel in the panel setting page You can also configure the template notification function P 57 Panel Setting Private template LI Setting up Destination Setting Public template In the Recipient List page you can specify the destinations to which the fax Internet Fax or Scan to Email document will be sent When you are setting destinations for an E mail agent you can only specify the E mail addresses for the destinations When you are setting destinations for a Fax Internet Fax agent you can specify both fax numbers and E mail addresses for the destinations The Fax Unit must be installed in this equipment to specify the fax numbers for the destinations You can specify the destinations by entering their E mail addresses or fax numbers manually selecting destinations from the address book selecting destination groups from the address book or searching for destinations in the LDAP server P 58 Destination Setting Private template LJ Setting up InternetFax Setting Public template In the InternetFax Setting page you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent P 64 InternetFax Setting Private templat
138. the contact s fax mailbox You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers and PWD Enter the password to retrieve a document from the contact s fax mailbox You can enter up to 20 characters using numbers and ECM Select whether to enable or disable ECM Error Correction Mode If ON is selected it facilitates error free communications by automatically resending any portion of the document affected by phone line noise or distortion Line Select Select whether specifying the line to be used If this is set to Auto this equipment automatically selects the line to be used However Line 2 can be applicable only when the 2nd Line for Fax Unit is installed Quality Transmit Select whether to send a document in the Quality TX mode If ON is selected this equipment sends documents at a slower speed than normal so that the transmission will be less affected by line condition Transmission Type Registration Tab Page Overview Select whether the document will be sent in Memory Transmit mode or Direct Transmit mode LJ Search Contact screen You can search for contacts in the LDAP server and add them to the address book Tip In order to use the LDAP search the directory service must be set up by a user who has been granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode Before operating the LDAP search ask your administrator if the Directory Service has been configured
139. the received faxes or Internet Faxes are forwarded You can only specify E mail addresses as the destination You can specify the destination when you have selected InternetFax as the forwarding agent Recipient List Re ipient ist Search Delete Item name Description Save button Saves recipient settings Cancel button New button Cancels the settings Displays a screen where you can register an E mail address as the recipient P 77 Contact Property screen Address Book button Allows you to select a recipient from the address book Address Group button Allows you to select an address book group as a destination Search button Allows you to search a recipient from the address book P 79 Search Contact screen Delete button Deletes the selected recipient Name Displays the names registered to the address book Destination Displays the E mail addresses Contact Property screen You can specify an E mail address as the recipient 3 4 Conta t Proj erty Ok Cancel Reset 308 Required Destination Item name Description Destination Enter the E mail address OK button Saves the recipient Cancel button Cancels the settings Reset button Deletes the entered E mail address Registration Administration tab Item List Q Setting up InternetFax Se
140. the registered name of the group P 80 Group Properties screen Contacts Displays how many address books are registered in the group LJ Contact Property screen af l ntar Prana rty Address Book e save Cancel Reset Delete Fax Setting Either Either First Name Gt ame Email Address ee Fa umber OHTA Department 6 7 8 9 10 oo Fax Number 11 12 13 es EY OFC Item name Description Save button Saves the entered information Cancel button Cancels adding or editing a contract Reset button Erases information entered in the given box Delete button Deletes the displayed contact Fax Setting button Registers the contact for fax transmission P 78 Fax Setting screen First Name Enter the first name of the contact You can enter up to 32 characters Invalid characters are replaced with Last Name Enter the last name of the contact You can enter up to 32 characters Invalid characters are replaced with Email Address Enter the E mail address of the contact You can enter up to 192 characters Fax Number Enter the fax number of the contact You can enter up to 128 characters 2nd Fax Number Enter the second fax number of the contact You can enter up to 128 characters Company Enter the company name of the contact You can enter up to 64 characters Invalid characters
141. the touch panel Select this item if you want to change PanelUl Keyboard Layout Displays the registered keyboard patterns for the touch panel Select this item if you want to change Quota Setting e OFF No output restriction e ON Restricts output Quota Displays the remaining number for output The number entered in Default Quota decreases each time a page is printed and output is prohibited when it reaches 0 You can manually change the remaining number of outputs to a desired value Default Quota Enter the default number assigned for the user Up to 99 999 999 can be entered Print Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E mail reception Internet Fax reception Scan Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record User Management Tab Page Overview 119 120 LJ Role Assignment screen You can select roles to be assigned Role Assignment OK Cancel Available Role o _ Assigned Role AccountManager Administrator Oman meta ScanOperator Print PrintOperator eFilingOperator ColorPrintCopyOperator FaxOperator Auditor Guest ers OK button Saves the assigned roles Cancel button Cancels assigning roles Available Role Displays a list of registered roles Select the role to be assigned and c
142. to create an extended field as a character string List Select this to create an extended field as a list selection Address Select this to create an extended field as an address Password Select this to create an extended field as a password Date Select this to create an extended field as a date List Items Specify list items to be selected for the extended field The registered list items are listed in the List items When you register a list item enter Name and Value and then click Add If you select an item and click Move Up the selected item moves up in the list Click Move Down to move it down Select an item and click Delete to delete an unnecessary item from the list Name Enter the name of the item Value Enter a value or text to be applied for the selected item e You cannot exceed the total number of characters displayable in the List Items 127 e You cannot use a semicolon in Name or Value Minimum Length Specify the minimum number of characters that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a character string Registration Administration tab Item List 319 Item name Description Maximum Length Specify the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a character string Minimum Value Specify the minimum numerical value that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a numerical value Maximum
143. transmission only failed in a combined setting of save as file and E mail Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 329 6 Click each button displayed in the page to specify or edit the associated properties Destination Setting TO Destination Setting CC Destination Setting BCC Destination Setting Specify the destination This can be set only when registering the Internet Fax or Email agent P 330 Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward InternetFax Setting Specify how the Internet Fax is transmitted This can be set only when registering the Internet Fax agent P 309 Setting up InternetFax Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward Email Setting Specify how the documents are transmitted as E mail messages This can be set only when registering the Email agent P 314 Setting up Email Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward Save as file Setting Specify how the documents are saved in a shared folder on this equipment or a network folder This can be set only when registering the Received to File agent P 310 Setting up Save as file Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward Box Setting Specify how the documents are saved in e Filing This can be set only when registering the Store to e Filing agent P 316 Setting up Box Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward 7 After configuring the desired pr
144. up SMTP Client P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service P 163 Setting up FTP Server P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting P 207 Setting up IPP Print P 213 Off Device Customization Architecture settings P 281 Directory Service settings DDBEDEBED Q Deleting a device certificate installed automatically 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Counter User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Managemem Password Policy R2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Select SCEP Automatic in Device Certificate and then click Delete Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed Import Not Installed SCEP Automatic certuser1 ptx Iq CA Server Address Primary 192 168 1 1 CA Server Address Secondary 192 168 10 1 MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate IP Address v Timeout 10 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHAI MD5 Poll Interval 1 Minute v Maxirnurm Poll Duration amp Hours X The confirmation dialog box appears e A CA certificate alread
145. 0 To select this you must upload a key file and a private key file If any of them is not uploaded the security setting will be disabled Primary Login Name Enter the primary login name if the security method selected in the above setting is GSS TSIG You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Primary Password Enter the primary password if the security method selected in the above setting is GSS TSIG You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Secondary Login Name Enter the secondary login name if the security method selected in the above setting is GSS TSIG You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Secondary Password Enter the secondary password if the security method selected in the above setting is GSS TSIG You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash TSIG SIG 0 Key file Use this setting to upload or delete a key file to be used for TSIG and SIG 0 To upload it click Browse and specify a private key file to be uploaded and then click Upload To delete it click Delete Setup Item List 153 Item name Description TSIG SIG 0 Private Key file Use this setting to upload or delete a private key file to be used for TSIG
146. 01 Server IP Address 192 168 1 1 Port Number 339 Authentication Search Base User Name Password Search Timeout 1 Enable SSL Disable 636 Directory Service Name Enter the directory service name to identify the directory service You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Server IP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN of the LDAP server You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols Port Number Enter the port number to access the LDAP server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 389 is used to access the LDAP server without SSL When the SSL is required generally the 636 port is used to access the LDAP server Maintenance Item List 281 Item name Description Authentication Select the SASL authentication protocol If you do not know the authentication type select Auto e Auto Select this to access the LDAP server using the appropriate authentication that this equipment detects Kerberos Select this to access the LDAP server using the Kerberos authentication Digest MD5 Select this to access the LDAP server using the Digest MD5 authentication CRAM MD5 Select this to access the LDAP server using the CRAM MD5 authentication Login Select this to access the LDAP server using the login authentication Plain Sele
147. 011 01 4 16 46 41 d document in controller shared folder 0114 pdf Peas file 201101 4 16 33 16 d document in controller shared folder 0114 pdf Peas file 201101 f 4 15 36 42 d document in controller shared folder 0114 pdf Peas file 2011 01 4 15 33 38 ad document in controller shared folder 0114 pdf Pias file 2011 01 4 11 20 00 ad document in controller shared folder 0113 pdf Peas file 2011 01 f 3 12 55 03 d document in controller shared folder 0113 pdf Peas fie 2011401 f 3 11 34 46 2 sd document in controller shared folder 0112 pdf Peas file 2011 01 2 15 59 36 td document in controller shared folder 0111 pdf Peas file 2011 01 f 1 16 07 38 2 d document in controller shared folder 0107 pdf Peas file 2011 0197 08 44 01 1 5 ad document in controller shared folder TTT Item name Description TO Name Displays the destination name to where the scanned document was sent via an E mail TO Email Displays the destination E mail address to where the scanned document was sent via an E mail File Name Displays the file name stored in a shared folder or e Filing This item may not be displayed depending on the access policies File names are displayed using 10 asterisks when the Confidentiality Setting is enabled P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting Agent Displays the agent of the scan job Date Time Dis
148. 128 characters Locality Name Enter the city or town name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 128 characters Organization Name Enter the organization name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Organizational Unit Name Enter the organizational unit name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Common Name Enter the FQDN or IP address of this equipment with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Validity Period Enter the number of months in the validity period of the self signed certificate Password Enter the password of the certificate with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Q Setting up Certificate Setting Certificate Setting Signature Algorithm SHAI v Public Key R542046 v Item name Description Signature Algorithm Select the signature algorithm to be used in Certificate SHA1 Select this to use SHA1 SHA256 Select this to use SHA256 SHA384 Select this to use SHA384 SHA512 Select this to use SHA512 Public Key Select the public key to be used in Certificate RSA1024 Select this to use RSA1024 RSA2048 Select this to use RSA2048 Security Item List LJ Setting up CA Certificate When you want to enable SSL and verify with a CA certificate for the SMTP Client POP3
149. 141 Setting up Store to USB Device Setting PUBIC TEM plate siressa i a 303 Setting up System Message Notification Events 284 Setting up TOP IP c cxcswatereckwnetmuneatedalonmedaabaunsastundned te 143 Setting up Template cccccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 280 Setting up the directory service cceceeeeeeeceeeeeeees 292 Setting up the notifications of system errors ANd events ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenes 294 Setting up URL List for Menu Screen and Hard Button 212 Setting up User Authentication Setting 08 249 Setting up User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File 06 192 Setting up Wake Up Setting cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 Setting up WEB General Setting ccccceeeeeeeees 142 Setting up Web Services Setting ccccecceeeeeeees 168 Setup How to Set and How to Operate c eeeee 215 Setup SMMISt chcae tosses cos seents AA 136 SNMP V3 settings arier it cottensumomenseds 219 Store to USB Device Setting Private template 71 SUPPOMER DFOWSENS orients a e Ear 9 System Updates settings cccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 288 T Template Groups ssacecedssvicecadsbvnsasawisatateveaseactvneosnanenes 50 Template MEM ANSt sccscctastestanavateetanmacnteveniaacavteemateaen 50 Template ISL ee A 54 Template Properties ix ess wicsaciacieviadsacrwabicxuseanscrigeters 56 ToOpAccess Conditions
150. 18 19 24 25 3 Templates 16 ites E A StoF S Text StoF D Text oa Color sPDF Color sPDF Go to top ofthis page Displays icons of the templates Click Undefined to register a new template P 53 Group Properties screen Name 1 Name 2 Displays the names registered on the touch panel P 57 Panel Setting Private template 54 Registration Tab Page Overview List View Panel View List view Jump to 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 Templates 16 inc Displays the names registered on the touch panel LL P 57 Panel Setting Private template Click Undefined to register a new template LO P 53 Group Properties screen User Name Displays the user name registered on the panel setting Click Undefined to register a new template P 53 Group Properties screen Agent Displays the agent registered to the template Click Undefined to register a new template P 53 Group Properties screen LJ Change Group Password screen You can change the password of a private template group Change Group Password Group Information Name User Name Oo Templete001 UserName001 Item name Description Save button Saves the new password Cancel button Cancels the password change Old Password Enter the current password New Password Enter the new password
151. 2 fT fT pa j2 G m cD fT fT peas IS i bem a a mf J pen cD co bed Cc 2 a T 2 ic fom a T 2 ojojo j a a wwf ofa CCPC HC J j poms 2 2 2 D fm fT fT 2222 cD fiT T T 2 fiS fiS jS Item name Description 1 Displays Public for the public template group Displays Public Template Groups for the public template group You can click to check the registered templates P 93 Displaying public templates User Name Tip Templates in the public template group are created and managed by users who are granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode See the following description for registering public template groups P 322 Registering public templates Registration Tab Page Overview 51 Private Template Groups AllGroups Defined Groups Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 091 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 os ffenmietenos CCS oe a e e SSCS C O e e C E e e Ce E e e mo mema ea Go to top ofthis page No o9 _ Undefinea Undefined CS Displays the group number 2 Name Displays the group name Click the name of a registered template to check and edit the registered templates LU P 86 Registering and editing private template groups Click Undefined to register templates LL P 53 Group Properties screen 3 User Name Displays
152. 5 Email Setting Private template ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 66 Emal setings nrerin adtcc cee ees e E au 198 Embedded Web Browser settings ccceceeeeeeeee 211 Enabling the role base access Setting 0cceeees 356 End user mode soraia at ek dra Sala cet eS aa 8 Enter PassWord reisene areas sdwnte a EE E a 117 Entering the destinations manually 59 330 KD OME resorni ao O o 131 Export Logs Menr lS scctscauetestocasiert eee edge as 44 Expor settings aire biccott aai nate oe dsoats 279 Export Import ltem list ci eucies a sauecthaveotvanevaaataratoanmact 131 Exporting address book data in the CSV XML format ccccceceeeceeceeeeseeeeeees 299 EXD OMIMG OOS airea 48 Exporting SNMP V3 user information 0c 00e0 221 Exporting the address book data ccseceeeeeeeeees 299 Exporting the role information setting file 355 Extended Field Definition ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 317 Extended Field Properties ccceceeceeseceeceeeeseeeeees 15 Extended Field settings aictere coc tadest eee tdaadacs 195 Extended FieldS nisin apan nT ite en nn lem ane an ese 318 Extended Fields Properties ccscceceeceeeeeseeeeeees 319 F Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings 307 Fax ooN aana e tac ae oes geticn telat ade 78 Fax Setting Private template cccceeceecseeeeee e
153. 80 Item name Description Research button Returns to the Search Contact screen to change the search criteria and execute the search again Number of Search Result Displays the number of found contacts Check box Select contacts to be registered to the address book Name Displays the search result Email Address Fax Number Q Group Properties screen You can create groups that contain multiple recipients This enables you to specify a group as the destination when sending an E mail Internet Fax or fax to multiple recipients Group Properties Address Book gt OK Cancel Reset Delete hol moyuicu Group Name GroupNameQ5 ID jEmail Fax vame Email Address Fax Number _ ft Firsth me10 LastName 0 User10i f example com Firsth me09 LastNameO9 User09i f example com 890 129 4 5678 Firsth me08 LastName0s User08i f example com 789 01 f 3 4567 FirstNameO7 LastName0 User07if example com 6768 90 f 2 3456 FirstNameO6 LastName06 User06 example com SSO OND HAWN E FrstName04 LastName04 User04 example com 345 6789 0123 s E E ce fr E frenano aeetrfnroeceeson pr J E frenano ae oeaan psr Go to top ofthis page q 8 7 6 5 FirstName05 LastNameO5 User05 example com 456 7890 1234 4 3 2 1 Item name Description OK button Registers the selected contacts as a group
154. Assigns the e Filing access functions Function list Displays operations functions enabled disabled by privileges assigned to the role selected from MFP Function Even if one item is selected from MFP Function more than one function may be enabled Example If you select the Send Email check box in Remote from MFP Function Send Email in Remote and that in Scan Function on the Function list will be enabled User Management Tab Page Overview LJ Edit Role screen You can confirm and edit roles However you cannot edit the default roles Edit Role Save 2 Required Role Name Role001 MFP Function Copy Function Copy Function Copy Job Function rint Function api Print Management can Function RemoteScanV vSScan Pull Print Function Function adalah Internet Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Fax Received Print Scan Function Local File Share Function Store to Local Storage Store to Local File Share aas Store to Remete Server Send Email re Store to e Filing RemoteScanWSScan Pull Send Email Store to Remote Server WS Scan Push Device Management ia User Department Management Device Setting Function Status aeaa User Department Management User Department Management Log Management User Department Mana
155. Check whether the Meta Scan option P 342 Checking Meta Scan Enabler can be used with your equipment Editing the XML format file If necessary edit the XML format file P 343 Editing XML format file for meta data Registering an XML format file Register an XML format file for meta P 347 Registering XML format file data Registering an extended field If necessary register an extended P 348 Registering Extended Field Definition definition field definition Registering a template for Meta Scan Register a template for Meta Scan P 351 Registering templates for Meta Scan Operation Description Reference Meta Scan Perform a meta scan using a template LLJUser s Manual Advanced Guide Using for Meta Scan Scan Templates Checking Meta Scan logs Check the scan log to confirm if meta P 354 Checking logs of Meta Scan data has been correctly created WE Checking Meta Scan Enabler The Meta Scan Enabler is required to use the Meta Scan function For the details contact your distributor You can check whether the Meta Scan option is set on your equipment as follows Meta Scan function is available if Meta scan enabler is registered under ADMIN GENERAL LICENSE MANAGEMENT 342 Setting up Meta Scan Function E Editing XML format file Edit XML format files in accordance with the applications that interact with Meta Scan You can define variables in the XML for
156. Click the Registration tab and the Template menu The Template Groups page is displayed 2 Click the group name link where you want to register or edit the private template Login Device Job Status Registration Counter Template Address Book Inbound FAX routing Template Groups Please select a group to edit below Public Template Groups Ne Rare jli Te All Groups Defined Groups pe E Jump to e Ifyou select the defined private template group that is not protected by a password the Private Templates page is displayed Skip to step 4 e f you select the defined private template group that is protected by a password the Input Group Password page is displayed Go to the next step Tips e The page displays all 200 private template groups in default page view You can display only defined private template groups by clicking on the Defined Groups link e If you know which private template group you want to define or edit click the number of the private template group in the Jump to links Registration How to Set and How to Operate 89 When the Input Group Password page is displayed enter the password for the selected private template group and click OK Login Job Status Counter Device Template Input Group Password Group Information No ame EE C d CC Cancel The Private Templates page is displayed 4 From the templates list click th
157. Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the owner of the print job e Print jobs that have finished being printed are displayed in the Logs tab e Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order LI Recovery Information screen The Recovery Information screen displays the conditions for resuming printing Recovery Information Close p5002ttd Item name Close button UI ee Cause Recovery Condition Paper Size Paper Type SCL Paper Ii E Usplayeu Wawer The nanar sive ane tuna ava alienlaucel in Paper Size and Paper Type Description Closes the Recovery Information screen Cause Displays the cause of the print interruption Recovery Condition Displays the procedure for resuming printing Paper Size Displays the paper size set for the interrupted print job Paper Type Displays the paper type set for the interrupted print job Tray Displays the paper source set for the interrupted print job Job Status Tab Page Overview 31 E Fax InternetFax Job Item list The Fax InternetFax Job page displays the following information for each fax transmission job e Filing Login Device Registration Counter Mileite No ro N User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Gotot 9 10 Item name Description Delete button The selected fax job is deleted
158. EFRESH Address Book Fia an DOR aiaa z File Size 15 A Open Date Created TU Open in New Tab Export Data Format cs Open in New Window Save Target As Create New File MailBoxes Print Target File Name Not Cre Cut File Size z Date Created Ey The Save As dialog box appears 7 Select the file location and select All Files in the Save as type box x Wi Organize gaa Views v BR New Folder PENR lt Date modified Type Size W Desktop This folder is empty SB Recent Places jl Computer E Documents Pictures E Music More Folders Filename POA lt Save as type CSV File ooo oy Hide Folders 8 Click Save The CSV XML file that contains the address book data is saved in the selected location 300 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate E Rebooting the equipment An administrator can reboot the equipment If rebooting is performed warming up may take longer than normally Rebooting the equipment 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Reboot submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance N 1 Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot You
159. Email i e Ag ate Time UserName Domain Name LDAP Server as file 2011 0195 15 21 35 Co pleted as file 20117019 5 15 21 13 Cor pleted as file 2011 0195 15 21 00 as file 201140195 15 20 53 Cor pleted Delete button The selected scan job is deleted TO Name Displays the destination name to where the scanned document is sent via an E mail TO Email Displays the destination E mail address to where the scanned document is sent via an E mail File Name When the job performs the Scan to File or USB or Scan to e Filing it displays the document name to be stored File names are displayed using 10 asterisks when the Confidentiality Setting is enabled P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting Agent Displays the agent of the scan job Possible values of agent are Email Save as file Store to e Filing and Store to USB Media Date Time Displays the date and time when the scan job is released from the touch panel They are displayed using year month day hour minute and second For example 2012 12 24 12 34 56 Pages Displays the number of pages of the scan job Status Displays the status of the scan job Possible values of status are Wait Suspended Processing and Scanning User Name Displays the user account name who is the owner of the scan job Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who is the
160. FTP server enter 192 168 1 1 in this box When you select NetWare IPX SPX as the protocol enter the NetWare file server name or Tree Context name when NDS is available When you select NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the IP address of the NetWare file server Port Number Command Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select FTP as the protocol Generally is entered for the control port When is entered the default port number that is set for FTP Client by an administrator will be used If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client ask your administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number Network Path When you select SMB as the protocol enter the network path to the network folder For example to specify the users scanned folder in the computer named Client01 enter Client01 users scanned When you select FTP as the protocol enter the directory in the specified FTP server For example to specify the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter user scanned When you select NetWare IPX SPX or NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the folder path in the NetWare file server For example to specify the sys scan folder in the NetWare file server enter sys scan Login User Name Enter the login user name to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare server if required When you
161. IPX SPX e Auto Sense Select this to use an appropriate frame type that the equipment found first e IEEE 802 3 Ethernet II IEEE 802 3 Snap IEEE 802 2 Instead of Auto Sense select the frame types to be used from these options Actual Frame Displays the actual frame type of the equipment 148 Setup Item List Q Setting up AppleTalk You can set the protocol to enable communication over AppleTalk AppleTalk must be configured to enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computers Apple Talk Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable Apple Talk Enable v Device Name Desired Zone i Item name Description Enable Apple Talk Select whether the AppleTalk protocol is enabled or disabled Enable this when configuring AppleTalk printing Disable is set as the default Device Name Enter the device name of the equipment that will be displayed in the AppleTalk network You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Desired Zone Enter the zone name where the equipment will connect if required You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash The equipment will connect to the default zone if you enter Q Setting up Bonjour In Bonjour you can enable or disable the Bonjour networking that is available for Mac OS X B
162. Internet Fax recipients and select the Fax check boxes of users you want to add as the Fax recipients Address Book Group All Groups v Fax Email Address Fax Number irstName10 LastName10 usert O example com 201 2345 6789 irstName09 LastName09 User09 example com 890 1234 5678 i irstName0s LastName0 User08 example com 789 01 23 4567 irstNameO LastNameO usera7 example com 678 301 2 3456 irstName06 LastNameO6 usera6 example com 587 8901 2345 irstNameO5 LastName05 useras example com 458 7690 1 234 irstName04 LastNameO4 usero4 example com 245 6789 01 23 irstName03 LastName03 usera3 example com 234 5678 901 2 irstNameO2 LastName02 usero2 example com i 23 4567 8901 irstName01 LastName01 User01 example com e When you are creating a Scan to E mail template only the Email check boxes are displayed in the Address Book page e You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed Tip If you want to sort the Recipient List by a specific group select the desired group name in the Group box Click Add The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page Tip You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 63 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 5 Click Save Recipient List Save
163. Internet Protocol Version Py4 v Source Address My IP Address Destination Address Any IP Address Protocol Type Source Port Destination Port Any v Any Any SSeONoOuA WO N gt Filter Action Permit Block Negotiate Security Security Protocol Type ESP Modify Filter OK Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Filter Name test01 Internet Protocol Version IPv4 Source Address My IP Address Destination Address Any IP Address lt Protocol Type Any v ao source Port Destination Port SSeLONOUR WwW N gt Filter Action Permit Block Negotiate Security Security Protocol Type ESP Item name Description OK button Cancel button Reset button Filter Name Saves the folder setting Cancels registration of the folder Returns the settings to the defaults Enter a filter name You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp backslash apostrophe semicolon comma and Select the IP version for IPsec e IPv4 Select this to use IPsec under the IPv4 environment e IPv6 Select this to use IPsec under the IPv6 environment Internet Protocol Version Source Address The IP address of this equipment is set as the source address to which the filter is applied My IP Address is displayed in this box T
164. Janse oct sie acne Aunts saad sant A r a aa 76 npo nd FAX routing Mem WStc cerecdnccs ose lease Sevan O eae een eae Rat hin AT A 81 Registration How to Set and How to Operate cccceeceeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneseenensenesaes 86 Managing template S abies tesco treecen cae Wamset a a a A E E 86 Managipg address DOOK wit esncchccieaces nenna oles E a A E sens 94 Managing mMalDoxeS ene a a ae T a ee a een onee erence rar 100 Registration Tab Page Overview You can register templates the address book and inbound fax routing LL P 50 Template Item list LI P 76 Address Book Item list LL P 81 Inbound FAX routing Item list E Template Item list 50 iy hy iy LL P 50 Template Groups screen LL P 53 Group Properties screen LL P 54 Private Templates screen LL P 55 Change Group Password screen LL P 56 Template Properties screen LO P 57 Private template settings LJ Template Groups screen You can check the template registration status You can save agent settings for copy fax Internet Fax and scan operated from the control panel on your device into a template Users can select the template when they copy fax Internet Fax or scan from the control panel for easy operation Templates are managed in groups and up to 60 templates can be saved in a group There can
165. Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard pattern displayed on the touch panel User Management Tab Page Overview Item name Description Quota Setting e OFF No output restriction e ON Restricts output Quota Displays the remaining number for output The number entered in Default Quota decreases each time a page is printed and output is prohibited when it reaches 0 You can manually change the remaining number of outputs to a desired value Default Quota Enter the default number assigned for the user Up to 99 999 999 can be entered LJ Enter Password screen You can display the Enter Password screen by selecting the check box of the user whose password you want to change in the User Accounts item list and clicking the Reset Password button Enter Password OK Cancel T ee Password OK button Saves the entered password Cancel button Cancels the password change Password Enter the new password User Management Tab Page Overview 117 LJ User Information screen You can update registered user information User Information Save Cancel Delete Reset Counters Required User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Authentication Method Password O 0O NOOU A WN PIN Code Role Assignment Group Assignment Department Number PanelU Language PanelUl Keyboard Layout Quota Setting Quota Default Quota
166. L List for Menu Screen and Hard Button Select URL 04192 168 1 1 p 4192 168 10 1 Go to top ofthis page Item name Description Save button Registers the selected URL Cancel button Cancels registration of the URL Name The registered URL name is displayed URL The registered URL is displayed LJ Confirm Permission screen You can display granted permissions of the user who is accessing TopAccess Confirm Permission Role Information Copy Function Copy Job Print Function Print Job Enable Scan Function Store to Local File Share Fax iFax Function Internet Fax Transmission Output Setting Color Print Disable Local File Share Store to Local Storage Item name Description OK button Closes the Confirm Permission screen Role Information The role information assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess is displayed My Account Tab Page Overview Functional Setups This chapter contains the following contents Setting up Meta Scan Function asicicciaw cies castes cecaen dares citencentesbatneonds tanapchtenaaniein nieces 342 Procedure for using Meta SCAN stg esti teas aces ely oa a ah oN Sh edo i Ee eae i as 342 Checking Meta Scan Enabler cccccccccccssscecccesececcceeneccceeecececsauececseeuseeessuuecececsueeeesseegeeesseasseesssgeeessaaeeesenas 342 EANO XME format FING ait sca e E E E e e heen idaeswanees 343 Re
167. Length Requirements to Apply Lockout Setting Number of Retry Lockout Time Available Period Expiration day s Minimum Password Length 0 64 Disable v Do not allow the following strings to be used as passwords Enable v 10 1 30 Minute s 1 1440 Disable day s 1 999 Specify the minimum number of digits for the password Specify within the range from 0 to 64 0 is set as the default Requirements to Apply Select Enable to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in passwords Disable is set as the default Restrictions e The user name and password cannot be the same e The same password cannot be used again e A password consisting of sequences of the same characters cannot be used e A password containing the characters entered in the restricted character text box cannot be used Lockout Setting Specify whether or not to enable the lockout setting when the user failed to supply the correct password Enable is set as the default Number of Retry Specify the number of retries before lockout Specify within the range from 1 to 30 times 10 is set as the default Lockout Time Specify the duration to lock out the user Specify within the range from 1 to 1440 minutes 1 is set as the default Available Period Select Enable to specify how long the password is valid before its expiry Disable is set as the default Expiration day
168. Login Device Job Status Template Group Properties Group Information No Nema CSN Required OC weak This Email address is used as default recipient each for template Nese Emailto User006 example cam You can configure the following settings in this page P 53 Group Properties screen Registration How to Set and How to Operate 87 88 5 Registration Tab Page Registration Template Change Group Password Group Information Name Se UserName pos Bfswow femme Old Password Retype Passwo You can configure the following settings in this page P 55 Change Group Password screen Click Save to apply changes Click OK This step is not required if you have selected Edit in step 4 Registration How to Set and How to Operate LJ Registering or editing templates In each private template group you can create up to 60 templates To define the private template specify the panel settings that will be displayed in the control panel and agent settings Each private template can also be protected by a password Tip Each template can be created in combination of the following agents e Copy template can be combined with the Save as file or Store to e Filing agent e Fax Internet Fax template can be combined with the Save as file agent e Scan template can be created with up to two agents in a combination of the Save as file Email and Store to e Filing agents
169. MP communication between the SNMP Browser of the Client computer and this equipment will be disabled Enter the SNMP Read Write community name for the SNMP access You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash private is set as the default Read Write Community e tis recommended to change the default Read Write Community name for security reasons e If changing the Read Write Community name match the setting with the applications in use Otherwise applications that use MIB TopAccess TWAIN driver File Downloader and AddressBook Viewer will become unavailable The SNMP communication of the printer driver also will be unavailable so that obtaining the configurations confirming the department code and obtaining the available boxes in e Filing will be disabled Enable SNMP V3 Select whether SNMP V3 monitoring with MIB is enabled or disabled This must be enabled to allow users to connect using TopAccessDocMon TWAIN driver File Downloader and the AddressBook Viewer Setup Item List 165 166 Item name Create SNMP V3 User Information Description SNMP V3 user information registered into this equipment is displayed in a list SNMP V3 user information can be registered edited deleted or exported For the details see the following LA P 219 Registering or editing SNMP V3 user information LL P 221 Exporting SNMP V3 user information
170. More Folders A Filename WATLE v Save as type Security Certificate z a Hide Folders Save Cancel 9 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Tip You can improve the security level of a client computer by installing the exported certificate into the computer Security How to Set and How to Operate 271 E Installing CA certificate When you want to enable SSL and verify with a CA certificate for the SMTP Client POP3 Network Service FTP Client or Directory Service you must install the CA certificate You can install up to 10 CA certificates in this equipment LJ P 272 Installing CA certificate LL P 273 Deleting CA certificate LI Installing CA certificate 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Managemen Password Policy 2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Select the encryption of CA certificate and click Browse to select a CA certificate file Then click Upload Certificate Files The CA certificate is installed 5 Click Save on the Certificate management submenu 6 Then you can enable SSL by selecting Verif
171. Network Service FTP Client or Directory Service you must install the CA certificate You can install up to 10 CA certificates in this equipment CA certificate CA Certificate PEM 2 D CA certificate DER Delete Item name Description CA Certificate PEM Selects the certificate in the PEM format Upload button Uploads the certificate Delete button Deletes the registered certificate CA certificate DER Selects the certificate in the DER format Upload button Uploads the certificate Delete button Deletes the registered certificate LI Setting up Certificate Files You can display a list of registered certificate files Security Item List 259 E Password Policy settings You can configure policies for the password to register Tip The Password Policy submenu can be accessed from the Security menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on Security menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 247 Security Item List LL P 260 Setting up Policy for Users LJ P 261 Setting up Policy for Administrator Auditor LJ P 262 Setting up Policy for e Filing Boxes Template Groups Templates SecurePDF SNMPv3 Cloning LI Setting up Policy for Users You can configure policies for user registration Password Policy Policy for Users Minimum Password
172. Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 6 Click OK to apply the changes Message from webpage y e Are you sure Setup How to Set and How to Operate 235 8 Administration Tab Page The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status E Setting up Printer settings You can configure printer operations and printer options for RAW print jobs from the Printer submenu under the Setup menu P 237 Setting up Raw Job Setting Setting the Printer settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Printer submenu Administration T General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA 2 The Printer submenu page is displayed 4 In the Printer submenu page set the Printer settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status User Management Administration Setup Setup Printer Setting General Setting Period of time
173. Overview Q Save as file Setting Mailbox In the Save as file Setting page you can specify how and where a received fax will be stored Instructions on how to do the Save as file setting for the mailbox are the same as for the Save as file setting for a private template Operations are the same as the following procedure P 68 Save as file Setting Private template You cannot specify USB media as the storage in the Save as file Setting Page LJ Email Setting Mailbox In the Email Settings page you can specify the content of E mail document to be sent Instructions on how to do the E mail setting for the mailbox are the same as for the E mail setting for a private template Operations are the same as the following procedure P 66 Email Setting Private template LJ Box Setting Mailbox In the Box Setting page you can specify how a received fax will be stored in the Box Operations are the same as the following procedure P 71 Box Setting Private template Registration Tab Page Overview 85 Registration How to Set and How to Operate LL P 86 Managing templates L9 P 94 Managing address book LJ P 100 Managing mailboxes E Managing templates LL P 86 Registering and editing private template groups LL P 89 Registering or editing templates LL P 93 Displaying public templates LJ Registering and editing private template
174. P 196 Setting up N W Fax Folder LJ Setting up Local Storage Path You can see the folder path where files are stored by the Save as file to local folder You can open the local folder by browsing this equipment from a Windows network Local Storage Path Storage Path FILE_SHARE Send scanned documents to a sub folder in the storage path The sub folders will be named after the associated template and will be of the format Group Number GroupName TemplateName Send scanned documents directly to the storage path Storage Path Displays the local storage path where files are stored when files are saved to the local folder by the Save as file functions Send scanned documents to a sub Select this to save the files in the sub folder that is named as Group Number Group Name folder in the storage path Template Name Send scanned documents directly Select this to save the files directly in the storage path to the storage path Setup Item List 189 190 LJ Setting up Storage Maintenance In Storage Maintenance you can select how to delete files stored in the local folder The folder that was created when storing the files in the local folder will be deleted automatically when all files in the folder are deleted Storage Maintenance 5 Do not delete documents automatically 1 2 Delete documents after 30 day s Item name Description Do n
175. Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version 2 The General submenu page is displayed Setup How to Set and How to Operate 215 8 Administration Tab Page 4 In the General submenu page set the General settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer e Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version General Setting Device Information Name oe Copier Model ee Med oo 2 ol me Serial Number m agp MAC Address bene om jl Save as File amp e Filing Space Available 26205 MB Fax Space Available 977 MB Data Cloning Function Enable USB Direct Print Enable Location Contact Information Service Phone Number Administrative Message You can set the following in this page LX P 137 Setting up Device Information LX P 140 Setting up Energy Save LX P 138 Setting up Functions LX P 140 Setting up Date amp Time LL P 139 Setting up e Filing Notification Events LL P 141 Setting up SNTP Service LX P 139 Setting up Job Skip Control LL P 141 Setting up Daylight Savings Time Setting M P 139 Setting up Restriction on Address Book Operation J P 142 Setting up WEB General Setting by Administrator
176. Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML Format File Ne Rane E Public Public Template Groups Panel View List view Please click a template picture to edit Jump to 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 T Hule on 6 EE COPY MODE FAX MODE es SCAN TO bs SCAN TO ota Pema o B FILE PA SCAN TO SCAN TO SD LP eriuns AE FILese mai Gott lt lt e lf the templates list is displayed in the List view click the Undefined template name to register a new template Click the defined template name to edit an existing template e If you click an icon that has not been defined the Template Properties page to select agents is displayed Skip to step 6 e If you click a defined icon the Template Properties page is displayed Go to the next step Tips e You can change the template list view by clicking on either Panel View or List View e If you know which public template you want to define or edit click the number of the public template in the Jump to links 5 When you select a defined template icon the Template Properties will be displayed Click Edit e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Registration Template Properties Public Template Group Information No a C Ne Pubic Public Template Groups Template Information it Change Password Reset Template Rane E SCAN TO_FILE
177. Save as file Setting Mailbox Creates an E mail forwarding mailbox This agent can be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing agent LL P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox LL P 85 Email Setting Mailbox Store to e Filing Creates an e Filing forwarding mailbox This agent can be combined with the Internet Fax Relay agent Save as file agent or Email agent LL P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox LL P 85 Box Setting Mailbox 82 Registration Tab Page Overview Q MailBox Setting Mailbox In the MailBox Setting page specify the general information of the mailbox such as the box number password owner comment and notification e The Notification and Document Print options are not available when creating the Confidential mailbox or Bulletin Board mailbox e Mailbox communication is disabled if the settings on this equipment and information registered for the destination do not match Check how the box number and the fax number of the destination are registered on the journal before entering the box number MailBox Setting Save Cancel Required cee y umber Password wee EF Name UserNameQ01 ernt C Send Email when an error occurs Notification E Send Email when job is completed Email Address Document Print Always v Item name Description Box Number Enter the box number of the mailbox Yo
178. Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed Fax Received Forward Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed InternetFAX Received Forward Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed You can select jobs to be notified Scan Send E mail when an error occurs Send E mail when job is completed Received Fax InternetFax Send E mail when an error occurs Send E mail when job is completed Fax Received Forward Send E mail when an error occurs Send E mail when job is completed InternetFAX Received Forward Send E mail when an error occurs Send E mail when job is completed Maintenance Item List 285 Mi Languages settings 286 You can specify the language for the touch panel of your equipment Tip The Languages submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the fol LL P 286 Sett I P 287 Sett I P 287 Sett lowing pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List ing up Install Language Pack ing up Current Language Pack List ing up Default Setting for PanelUl Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages 1
179. Setting up LPD Print In LPD Print you can set the LPD print options to enable the LPD LPR print service LPD Print Enable LPD Enable 1 2 Port Number 515 3 Banners OFF Item name Description Enable LPD Port Number Enable or disable LPD print service Enable is set as the default Enter the port number for LPR printing You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 515 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number Banners Select whether to print a banner page for each print job using LPR printing OFF is set as the default 206 Setup Item List LJ Setting up IPP Print In IPP Print you can set the IPP Print options to enable the IPP print service Item name Description IPP Print Enable IPP Port80 Enable Port Number URL Enable SSL SSL Port Number SSLURL Printer Name Authentication User Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Password Enable Disable 631 http iMFPO7088510 631 Print Disable v 445 https MFPO 7088510 443 Print MFPO7088510 Disable user 1 Enable
180. Size Date Created Export Data Format csv XML m Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File Fax Reception Journal Export File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Export Data Format csv KML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File Scan Log Export File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Export Data Format csv XML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File Messages Log Export File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Export Data Format csv XML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File E Tip File sizes are displayed in bytes Select the file format CSV XML for the log you want to export Create the file by clicking the Create New File button for the log you want to export Click the file name 0 01 A CG Save the log file Your browser will display a confirmation dialog box Select the process for saving the log as a file and follow the displayed instructions 48 Logs How to Set and How to Operate Registration Tab Page This chapter contains instructions on how to register templates the address book and mailboxes Registration Tab Page Overview cccccccceeeeeseeeseeeceneseaneceneeeenesseescaneeceneeenessenessenesannesags 50 PE OAS TOMI MNS caps sce ek ek a oe OA ee a A lh N ae 50 Address BOOKING NS 25 28 oh octet ela eects cten te EO
181. Storage Store to USB Device Remote Send Email Store to Remote Server WS Scan Push e Filing e Filing Access Fax iFax Function 1 4 Part of operations functions is permitted User Management Tab Page Overview Internet Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Q Create New Role screen You can register a new role Create New Role Re Ro Save Cancel quired le Name j5 Role MFP Function Copy Function Copy Job rint Function Print Job Print Management can Function RemoteScanWsSScan Pull FawiF ax Function Internet Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Fax Received Print Local File Share Store to Local Storage Store to USB Device emote Send Email Store to Remote Server WS Scan Push Save button Copy Function Function Print Function Function Print Job Store to e Filing Print Management Scan Function Function Fax iFax Function Function Saves the entered role information Cancel button Cancels creating the role Role Name Enter the role name You can enter up to 128 characters Base Role Select a role which is used as a base of the new role You can select any registered roles or default roles CopyOperator ScanOperator
182. The equipment searches user name authenticated in Attribute type of User Name of the LDAP server If the user name authenticated has been found in the specified schema the schema value set in the Attribute type of From Name becomes the sender name If the user name authenticated has not been found in the specified schema the format set in Account Name of From Address From Name of Email Setting becomes the sender name Restriction setting for Email When User Authentication or Email Authentication is enabled select whether to set the Destination Email address of the authenticated user as a destination e None Not used as a destination Fixed To Only the Email address of the authenticated user is used for To To The Email address of the authenticated user is added to To Cc The Email address of the authenticated user is added to Cc Bcc The Email address of the authenticated user is added to Bcc LI Restriction Setting for Destination You can restrict the destination of the From Address to the one registered in the LDAP server when transmitting via fax internet fax or E mail Restriction Setting for Destination Restriction Setting for Destination Enable LDAP Server LDAP Server4 Disable LDAP Server2 Disable LDAP Servers Disable Restriction Setting for Destination Enable Select this to restrict the destination of the From Address to the one registered in the LDAP server w
183. User Accounts Add or remove user accounts Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Additional Options 1 Overview 3 Click Network and Sharing Center Control Panel Home J em and Maintenance View network status and tasks y unt View network computers and devic Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Security Network and Internet N A Internet Options Hardware and Sound Change your homepage Manage browser add ons Delete browsing history and cookies Programs User Accounts Offline Files Appearance and Encrypt your offline files Manage disk space used by your offline files Personalization Clock Language and Region Windows Firewall Turn Windows Firewall on or off Allow a program through Windows Firewall Ease of Access Additional Options People Near Me Sign in or out of People Near Me Change People Near Me settings Classic View Sync Center Sync with other computers mobile devices or network folders View sync results Resolve sync conflicts Recent Tasks View network status and tasks The Network and Sharing Center window appears 4 Click Customize of Unidentified network Public network o aes O as lt Network and Internet Network an
184. Value Specify the maximum numerical value that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a numerical value Default Value Specify the default value for the extended field Password Specify the default password for the extended field if the field is a password Date Specify the default date for the extended field if the field is a date The following shows the types and settable items of an extended field for each Input Method is displayed for mandatory setting items Input method Extended field type Numerical value Maximum Value Minimum Value Default Value Settable value 999 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 999 Decimal value Maximum Value Minimum Value Default Value Settable value 999 999 999 999 999999 to 999 999 999 999 999999 Maximum Length Minimum Length Default Value Settable value 0 to 256 List Items Default Value You can register up to 256 List Items Select from the registered selection items Mandatory setting items Optional setting items You can set from 1 to 126 characters in Name You can set from 1 to 126 characters in Value However the total number of characters set in Name and Value must be from 2 to 127 Address None Default Value Password None Default Value Settable value 0 to 256 Date None Default Value LI Definition Properties screen Definition Properties Definition Informatio
185. W Fax Folder Setup How to Set and How to Operate 229 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer Ez Q Are you sure OK Cancel When using Internet Explorer the changes may not be reflected on the Save as file page immediately after changing the settings and clicking Save If that happens click the Save as file submenu to refresh the page 230 Setup How to Set and How to Operate E Setting up E mail settings You can configure E mail transmission operations from the E mail submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the E mail settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Email submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Se N Sau Revie
186. a GO lt work_folder Certificate v Search p By Organize 9 Views v BB New Folder STS Name Date modif Type Size Tags W Desktop This folder is empty 23 Recent Places z j Computer E Documents E Pictures Te Music More Folders A Filename Waa Page eae v Save as type Security Certificate z a Hide Folders Pn ee 1 0 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Tip You can improve the security level of a client computer by installing the exported certificate into the computer Security How to Set and How to Operate 265 266 1 1 Then you can enable SSL for the following network settings LL P 150 Setting up LDAP Session LL P 157 Setting up HTTP Network Service LJ P 158 Setting up SMTP Client LL P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service LI P 163 Setting up FTP Server LL P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting LJ P 207 Setting up IPP Print ih LL P 213 Off Device Customization Architecture settings LJ Installing an imported device certificate 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Security Security Authentication Certificate Managem
187. a file Create New File amp Clear Log Creates a file according to the file format of the export data Erases logs after a file has been created You can display or download by clicking the created file Clear Log Erases logs Create New File Creates a file according to the file format of the export data You can display or download by clicking the created file Messages Log Export You can erase message logs or export download them in a file Create New File amp Clear Log Creates a file according to the file format of the export data Erases logs after a file has been created You can display or download by clicking the created file Clear Log Erases logs Create New File Creates a file according to the file format of the export data You can display or download by clicking the created file E Log Settings Item list lt access policy mode gt LL P 45 Log Authentication LL P 46 Log size Tip Displays only when you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator or display privileges in the access policy mode LJ Log Authentication You can specify whether or not to use log authentication Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration View Logs ExportLogs Log Settings Log Settings Save Cancel ae as Log Authentication Enable Log Authentication Disable v Item name Descriptio
188. a notification message to the specified E mail address when an error error occurs occurs Notification Send Email when Select this to send a notification message to the specified E mail address when a job is job is completed completed Registration Tab Page Overview 57 Item name Description Notification Email to Enter a recipient E mail address for the notification message You can either select an option to send it to the E mail address set in a private group or specify an E mail address When you enable the Notification setting make sure to set up the E mail settings in the Email submenu of the Setup menu in the TopAccess access policy mode For instructions on how to set up the E mail settings see the following section P 231 Setting up E mail settings Destination Setting Private template In the Recipient List page you can specify the destinations to which the Fax Internet Fax or Scan to E mail document will be sent When you are setting up the destinations for the Scan to Email agent you can only specify the E mail addresses for the destinations When you are setting up the destinations for the Fax InternetFax agent you can specify both fax numbers and E mail addresses for the destinations When Creating a Fax Internet Fax agent Destination Setting Destination When Creating an Email agent TO Destination Setting TO Destination CC Destination Setting CC
189. abled for POP3 transmission e Disable Select this to disable the SSL for POP3 transmission e Verify with imported CA certification s Select this to enable the SSL using the imported CA certificate Accept all certificates without CA Select this to enable the SSL without using imported CA certificate e When Verify with imported CA certification s is selected you must import the CA certificate in this equipment P 263 Security How to Set and How to Operate e Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols POP3 Server Address Enter the IP address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of the POP3 server when Enable POP3 Client is enabled You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash If you use FQDN to specify the POP3 server you must configure the DNS server and enable the DNS in the DNS Session Tip When the Obtain a POP3 Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings you can obtain the POP3 server address from the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP Authentication Enable or disable the authentication for accessing the POP3 server e Disable Select this to disable the authentication e NTLM SPA Select this to access the POP3 server using the NTLM SPA authentication e Kerberos Select this to access the POP3 server using the Kerberos authentication Type POP3 Login Select th
190. age network users with Windows domain authentication when you already manage your network using Windows domains When Windows domain authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password that is registered in the Windows domain to operate the touch panel P 250 Windows Domain Authentication e LDAP Authentication You can manage network users with LDAP authentication when you already manage your network using LDAP When LDAP authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password that is registered in the LDAP server to operate the touch panel P 251 LDAP Authentication 7 PIN Code Authentication Select the PIN code authentication method e Disable Select this no to use the PIN code authentication Use the user name and password for authentication e Enable Select this to use the PIN code authentication Instead of the PIN code it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication 8 Minimum PIN Code Length Enter a figure that specifies the minimum digits for the PIN code Security Item List 249 Windows Domain Authentication User Authentication Setting User Authentication Enable v Authentication failed print job Raw Print Job Delete v Auto Release on Login Disable v E Use Password Authentication for Print Job It is not able to print from other than Windows Client when this function is enabled E Enable Guest User Authentication Type Windows Doma
191. ailbox hub You can set up a maximum of 300 mailboxes You can also delete mailboxes If you want to delete an Open Mailbox the document must first be retrieved printed or canceled from the Open Mailbox 1 Click the Registration tab and the Inbound FAX routing menu The Inbound FAX routing page is displayed 2 Click New to set up a new mailbox Or click the box number link which you want to edit or delete in the mailbox list Login Device Job Status Registration Counter Inbound FAX routing Inbound FAX routing REFRESH New TWserNeme Ager Comer 003 UserName003 erName003 Email amp Save as file 00 UserName002 Confidential us erName001 Conftide Po e If you click New skip to step 5 e If you click the box number link that is not protected by a password skip to step 4 e If you click the box number link that is protected by a password go to the next step 3 Enter the password for the mailbox and click OK e Filing Login Device Job Status Registration Counter Inbound FAX routing inp MailBox Password Pa X2 eeesee 100 Registration How to Set and How to Operate 4 Click Edit or Delete Login Device Job Status Counter Inbound FAX routing MailBoxes Properties Mailboxes Natifeation If you have clicked Delete the delete confirmation dialog box is displayed Cli
192. ame to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required When you select FTP as the protocol an anonymous log in is assumed if you leave this box blank You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols Password Enter the password to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters symbols and spaces A single space only can also be entered Setup Item List 195 Description 10 Retype Password Entertne same password again fora confirmation LI Setting up N W Fax Destination You can configure a network folder to store documents that are sent using the N W Fax driver with the Save as file option enabled N W Fax Destination Do not allow any network folder to be used as a destination 5 Use Network Folder Destination Do not allow any network folder to Select this to not allow any network folders to be used as Save as file destinations for N W be used as a destination Faxes documents When selected users can only save an N W Fax document with the Save as file option enabled to local storage Use Network Folder Destination Select this to allow network folders to be used as Save as file destinations for N W Fax documents When selected set the N W Fax Folder settings to specify which network folder to use LJ Setting up N W Fax Folder In the N W Fax Folder you can specify in whi
193. ample com rstName08 LastName08 User08 example com The selected destinations are removed from the Recipient List Registration Tab Page Overview 63 InternetFax Setting Private template In the InternetFax Setting page you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent InternetFax Setting Required Scanned from Device Name Template Name Date Time 1 Subject 2 From Address User01 example cam 5 File Format TIFF S 6 ee Faginent Page Size No Fragmentation v TE Ooo o Item name Description 1 Subject This sets the subject of the Internet Faxes Select Scanned from Device Name Template Name Date Time to automatically apply the subject or enter the desired subject in the box If you enter manually the subject will be Subject Date Time From Address Enter the E mail address of the sender When the recipient replies to a received document the message will be sent to this E mail address You can enter up to 140 alphanumerical characters From Name Enter the sender name of the Internet Fax You can enter up to 64 characters Body Enter the body message of the Internet Fax You can enter up to 1000 characters including spaces File Format Select the file format of the scanned image Only TIFF S TIFF FX Profile S format can be selected Fragment Page Size Select the size of the message fragmenta
194. an access the Registration menu from the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it P 22 Access Policy Mode ane LL P 302 Public Template settings LL P 304 Public Menu LL P 307 Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings LL P 317 Extended Field Definition LL P 321 XML Format File E Public Template settings 302 You can edit panel settings and destination settings from the Public Template submenu page under the Registration menu Instructions on how to set up for public templates are the same for setting for private templates Tip The Public Template submenu can be accessed from the Registration menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Registration menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode L9 P 302 Registration Administration tab Item List LL P 302 Setting up Panel Setting Public template LL P 303 Setting up Save as file Setting Public template LL P 302 Setting up Destination Setting Public template LI P 303 Setting up Box Setting Public template LL P 302 Setting up InternetFax Setting Public template LL P 303 Setting up Store to USB Device Setting Public template LL P 303 Setting up Fax Setting Public
195. and symbols other than amp backslash apostrophe semicolon comma and Tip Up to 30 IKE keys can be created IKE Type IKEv1 Main Mode Select this to use IKEv1 Certificate Select this to use an electronic certificate To select this IPsec certificate must be installed in this equipment in advance Preshared Key Select this to perform authentication by sharing key information with the recipient of the communication in advance Enter key information to be shared in the entry box You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp lt and If you register more than one Preshared Key for IKEv1 only the one that you registered last will be valid IKEv2 Select this to use IKEv2 Certificate Select this to use an electronic certificate To select this IPsec certificate must be installed in this equipment in advance Preshared Key Select this to perform authentication by sharing key information with the recipient of the communication in advance Enter key information to be shared in the entry box You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp lt and e Local ID Select among IP Address FQDN Email and Key ID When you have selected the Key ID enter the value to the corresponding item You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp lt and e Remote ID
196. and SIG 0 To upload it click Browse and specify a private key file to be uploaded and then click Upload To delete it click Delete LI Setting up SMB Session In SMB Session you can specify the SMB network properties to access this equipment through a Microsoft Windows Network and enable SMB printing When you enable the SMB users can also browse the local folder in the equipment You can also specify the WINS server when the WINS server is used to enable the Windows print sharing and Windows file sharing services between the different subnets SMB Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings SMB SMB Server Protocol Enable v Restriction None z NP tBIOS Name MFP07088510 Logon Workgroup Workgroup Domain Primary Domain Controller Backup Domain Controller Logon User Name Password Primary WINS Server SECONdary WINS Server SMB Signing of SMB Server If client agrees digital signature is done for the communication Digital signature is always done for the communication on the server side Digital signature isn t done for the communication for the server SMB Signing of SMB Client If server agrees digital signature is done for the communication Digital signature is always done for the communication on the client side Digital signature isn t done for the communication for the client Item name Description SMB Server Pro
197. aneyeeatencwhunden 138 Setting up General Setting ccccccecceecseeeeeseeee ees 202 Setting up General settings ccccceeeeeseeeeeseeeeees 215 Setting up Home Directory Setting cccccceeeeee 255 Setting up Home Page Setting cccceseeeeeeee ees 211 Setting up HTTP Network Service ccceceeeeeee ees 157 Setting up Import XML Format File cceceeee ees 321 Setting up Install Language Pack cccecseceeeee ees 286 Setting up Install Software Package cccseeeeees 288 Setting up InternetFax Setting cccceecceeeeeeeeee ees 200 Setting up InternetFax Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward csec00 309 Setting up InternetFax Setting Public template 302 Setting up InternetFax settings cccecceeeeeeeeee ees 233 Selling up IP SECUNIY wcesesnesieetakoiece idee 172 Setting up IPP Print ecccesisistaccauestandvccsesunaiesebonatageeans 207 Seting up IPY sanoneen versa peasatesGsauatuendgobenee 147 Setting up IPX SPX arinnar a ii 148 Setting up Job Notification Events ccceceeeeee ees 285 Setting up Job Skip Control cccccseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 Setting up LDAP Session cccecseceeeeeceeteeeeeeeeness 150 Setting up LLTD Session cece eecseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenees 169 Setting up Local Storage Path ccccecceceeeeeeee ees 189 S tting up LPD Print seiorn aia
198. answeatentitandsanetsiaaantebiameiannaicnees 10 Accessing TopAccess by entering URL ccccccsssscesseseeenssececsececsaecessseeetsecensuecensaesessaseeetseeessseeeeseaseessegess 10 Accessing TopAccess from Network Map Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 0cc cseeee 12 TopAccess Screen DESCIIDUONS sivsccesiedescsdinessceacecaceceieccnessatoinbeevcuatecsnessaueians awesadnesieaeentacnines 21 ACCESS PONGY MOOG cirein iaaa iaaa 22 TopAccess Overview TopAccess is a management utility that allows you to check device information of this equipment and job status and to carry out device setting and maintenance through a web browser TopAccess has an end user mode and a access policy mode End user mode End users can e Display general device information including status tray accessory configuration and paper supply information e Display and manage the status of print jobs fax Internet Fax transmission jobs and scan jobs submitted by the user The Fax Unit is required to display and manage the fax transmission jobs e Display the job logs for print fax Internet Fax transmission fax Internet Fax reception and scan The Fax Unit is required to display the fax transmission and fax reception job logs e Register and modify templates e Add or modify contacts and groups in the address book e Register and modify mailboxes The Fax Unit is required e Display counter logs e Download client software
199. arch to return to step 3 so that you can change the search criteria and execute the search again Search Address List Add Cancel Research Number of Search Result1 Email j Fax wName Email Address Fax Number irstNameO1 LastName01 User01 example com 012 3456 7890 age e You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed e The value of company and department will depend on the settings made by the user who is granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode 62 Registration Tab Page Overview G Click Add The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page Tip 7 Click Save You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 63 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete M me Destination The contacts are added as destinations Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Select the check boxes of the destinations that you want to remove from the Recipient List and click Delete Recipient List wame Save Cancel News Address Book J Address Group J Search Delete Destination x rstName10 LastName10 Useri 0 example com rstNameO9 LastName09 User09 ex
200. artment Information screen ma ma P 108 User Counter screen lt access policy mode gt P 109 User Information screen lt access policy mode gt LJ Total Count screen You can display total counters of the printer counter and scan counter and total counters for small size and large size paper Total Counter Print Counter Copy Fax Printer List Total Smal co os a Total Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Counter type Description Print Counter Displays the total output count value Scan Counter Displays the total scanned count value 104 Counter Tab Page Overview Print Counter Print Counter small paper Print Counter large paper Print Counter 1 Copy Counter Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations Fax Counter Displays the number of pages printed by fax reception Printer Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E mail reception Internet Fax reception 4 List Counter Displays the number of pages printed by system page print operations Scan Counter Scan Counter small paper Scan Counter large paper Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Counter Description Copy Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by copy operations Ne
201. as 1 file and those of its back side are also saved as 1 file Make to the file like a scanned When 1 page of an original is scanned the scanned data are saved as 1 file When you manuscript 2 sided originals scan 1 sheet of a 2 sided original for example the data of both the front and back sides 2 become 1 files pages are saved as 1 file Q Setting up User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File If user authentication is enabled you can select whether a user name and a password used for user authentication are automatically applied to LOGIN USER NAME and PASSWORD to be used for saving files into a network folder specified in REMOTE 1 2 or not This setting is applied only when Use Network Folder Destination of the Destination setting for the Remote 1 or the Remote 2 is checked User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File Username and password of the device 5 Login User Name and Password Template registration User Name and Password is prioritized to expand template Login User Name and Password Login User Name and Password is prioritized to expand template Item name Description User name and password of the User names and passwords being logged in will not be applied Enter LOGIN USER NAME device and PASSWORD as required when scanning originals Login User Name and Password A user name and a password being logged in will be automatically applied Whe
202. as file Setting page you can specify how and where a received document will be stored You can specify the destination when you have selected InternetFax as the forwarding agent Save as file Setting See File Format TIFF Multi _ Encryption User Password Beep pppprr Retype Password penn nnn Master Password RRR p pr err Retype Password REPEEEEEET Encryption Level 128 bit AES Encryption Authority C Printing C Change of Documents LJ Content Copying or Extraction C Content Extraction for accessibility Select following 2 items J Use local folder Storage Path WMFPO7317401 FILE_SHARE Remote 1 Use Administrator Setting Protocol SMB Network Path Use User Setting Protocol SMB FTP FTPS NetWare IPXISPX NetWare TCP IP Server Name Port Number Command EJ Network Path oooO O O O Destination Login User Name E Password Retype Password Remote 2 Use Administrator Setting Protocol SMB Network Path Use User Setting Protocol SMB FTP FTPS NetWare IPXISPX NetWare TCP IP Server ame Port Number Command E Network Path E Login User Name Password Retype Password Lid Format FileName Date Page Comment File Name Date None Page 4digits v SubID Auto v v Add line information to File Name File Format Select the file format to which the received document will be saved e TIFF Multi Select this to
203. ate 6 263 Security LOMA NISU nivevdessensenayne da vonbdeuucewauuauitenaslessidedteles 247 Select Menu Type sssri irrien 305 338 Select TCM Plate wicsincicanccaseics veciavevacecsxiethimnavans 306 339 Select Template Group ccccecceeceeseeeeeeeeees 305 339 Select WR erasan aa AAA 306 340 Selecting the destinations from the address bOOK ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 331 Selecting the groups from the address book 61 332 Setting for saving Meta data cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 346 Setting up Address BOOK cceceeeceeceeeeeeeeees 217 219 Setting up AppleTalk cccccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaes 149 Setting Up BOM OUR petsrenneiocecquteemciacateutsc ia 149 Setting up Box Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward ssceeeees 316 Setting up Box Setting Public template 303 Setting up CA Certificate 2 00 0 cceecceceecseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 259 Setting up Category Setting ccceccecceeeeeeceeeeeeees 275 Setting up Certificate Files 2 0 ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 259 Setting up Certificate Setting ccccceececeeeeceeeeeeees 258 Setting up Client Certificate 2 0 0 0 ccceccecseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 Setting up Clone File sii s6 cvavandssetatconsnianencsae gue tawutwanters 214 Setting up Clone File Information ccceceeeeeeeeeees 2 6 Setting up Combined cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 280
204. ate Q LL Q WE installing a device certificate To enable SSL for HTTP setting FTP server setting IPP Print Service Web Services Print or Off Device Customization Architecture settings you must install a device certificate for each To install these device certificates you need to create a self signed certificate install them from an authentication agency or the CA server You can also install them automatically from the CA server using SCEP iY an iy lt r iy a an iy a iy lt r P 264 Creating exporting a self signed certificate P 266 Installing an imported device certificate P 267 Deleting an imported device certificate P 268 Installing a device certificate automatically P 269 Deleting a device certificate installed automatically Tip When you want to enable SSL for HTTP setting FTP Server IPP Print Web Services Print or Off Device Customization Architecture settings the certificates required to install to the equipment and the client PC are as follows Use SSL for Required Certificate for this equipment Required Certificate for Client PC Device Certificate Device certificates installed from authentication agency CA server Self signed Certificate CA Certificate Self signed Certificate Client Certificate CA Certificate HTTP FTP IPP Print Off Device Cus
205. ated on different networks Scope Set this for specifying the scope of groups that provide SLP services The default value is DEFAULT Set this for specifying the scope of groups that provide SLP services Tips More than one group can be entered for Scope by separating them with a comma Characters lt gt cannot be entered in the scope Do not leave this field blank or the SLP setting will be disabled You can search a particular service using Konqueror SUSE Linux or SLPSNOOP utility Novell client which is a User Agent UA 164 Setup Item List LJ Setting up SNMP Network Service In SNMP Network Service you can enable or disable the SNMP to monitor the device status using a network monitoring utility If an administrator wants to monitor the device status with a monitoring utility programmed to match the MIB you must enable the SNMP and SNMP Traps SNMP Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable SNMP 12 Enable Read Community Read Write Community Enable SNMP Y3 public private Disable 1 2 3 4 5 New Delete jl Delete All Export SNMP V3 User Information 6 Enable SNMP V3 Trap Disable v 7 SNMP V3 Trap User Name E _ 8 SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 9 SNMP 3 Trap Authentication Password 10 SNMP V3 Trap Privacy Protocol None 11 SNMP V3 Trap Pri
206. ation settings P 334 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 331 5 Click Save Recipient List Destination A ame a Bpen eae Bpen oeae o pee The contacts are added as destinations Selecting the groups from the address book By this method you can select groups from the address book 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Address Group Recipient List i wName Destination The Address Group page is displayed 3 Select the Group check boxes that contain the desired destinations Address Group Group w Group Name poms o Beem Eh ooo GroupNamed1 op ofthis paqe Click Add All destinations in the selected groups are added to the Recipient List page Tip You can remove destinations that you have added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 334 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List 5 Click Save Recipient List a aia GroupName01 Group FirstName10 LastName10 User1 0 example com FirstName09 LastName09 User09 example com FirstName08 LastName0s User08 example com FirstNameO LastNameO User07 example com aolajlalalali User01 example com The contacts are added as destinations 332 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to O
207. ault display Auto Power Save Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before entering Power Save mode Sleep Timer Select how long your equipment can remain inactive before it automatically enters the Sleep mode the Super Sleep mode Sleep Mode Select the Auto Sleep or Shut off mode after the specified Sleep Timer time The following network settings are required for this equipment to enter the Super Sleep mode e Select Disable for Enable IPv6 or select Manual for Link Local Address in the IPv6 setting P 147 Setting up IPv6 e Select Disable for Enable IPX SPX in the IPX SPX setting P 148 Setting up IPX SPX e Select Disable for Enable Apple Talk in the Apple Talk setting P 149 Setting up AppleTalk e Specify one of the following in POP3 Network Service Disable for Enable POP3 Client No entry for POP3 Server Address No entry for Account Name 0 for Scan Rate P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service e Disable IEEE 802 1X authentication For the IEEE 802 1X authentication method under the wired LAN environment refer to the following chapter in the User s Manual Advanced Guide Chapter 2 SETTING ITEMS ADMIN IEEE 802 1X Authentication Setting See the following page for network access settings for your equipment in the Super Sleep mode P 170 Setting up Wake Up Setting If the wireless LAN option is mounted to the device used super sle
208. ay agent Operations are the same as the following procedure P 58 Destination Setting Private template Q InternetFax Setting Mailbox In the InternetFax Setting page you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent Operations are the same as the following procedure P 64 InternetFax Setting Private template LJ Relay End Terminal Report Mailbox On the Relay End Terminal Report page you can specify a destination to which the transmission result list will be sent Cancel Reset pan A el a Fax ID vame Email Address Fax Number 6 foal rananet asters seciaeowiecon ieee CY 6 fs ranean 6 fe preneren seotaeomiecon iar CS 6 poespas asters seceaeompecon ieee CY 6 os ronan asters lseciaeonpecon i CY 6 for preneren astra secraeompecon o CS 5 o seat net isategecapocon peor WOZ dems o o eoffctensctento iertgeampecn ioraasares 30 to top ofthis page Item name Description Add button Adds settings to transmit the relay end terminal report Cancel button Cancels the settings Reset button Resets the settings Entry box Enter the E mail address or fax number of the recipient Recipient list Displays the registered destinations Select the E mail address or fax number of the destination You cannot specify more than 1 destination for the destination of the Relay End Terminal Report 84 Registration Tab Page
209. b Item list E Print Job Item list The Print Job page displays the following information for each print job e Filing Login Registration Counter Driilt _Inh gt REFRESH Delete Release Recovery Information Go to top of th i page W Document Name wDate Time Status Paper UserName Domain Name LDAP Server The following screen is displayed if you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode e Filing Logout Device Registration Counter User Management Administration 30a Rn REFRESH fecovery Information Delete All Private Print Jobs Delete All Hold Print Jobs X Docume t Name vDate Time Z je Status Paper Pa es user Name Domain NamefLDAP Server Go to top of thi Jaage Item name Description Delete button If the selected print job is owned by a user who is logged in to TopAccess the job is deleted Release button If the selected print job is in the print queue the job is printed Recovery Information button If the selected print job was skipped while the job skip feature was enabled the recovery information screen is displayed LL P 31 Recovery Information screen LL P 139 Setting up Job Skip Control Delete All Private Print Jobs This item is displayed if you are logged in with a user account which is granted button administrator privileges in the a
210. be one public template group and up to 200 private template groups Group type Public Template Groups Description The public template group can be created and maintained only by users who are granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode Registered templates are available for all users Max number of groups Max templates saved Private Template Groups Users can create templates in private template groups Users can also set passwords on groups and registered templates to restrict the use of them Groups and templates without a password are available to all users Registration Tab Page Overview 5 Registration Tab Page Public Template Groups Device Job Status Registration Template Template Groups Please select a group to edit below Public Template Groups 1 B _ Name User Name 3 All Groups Defined Groups Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 091 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 S a e on emee pene OOOO os femeteoe CCC os e CCS os A e e SSCSCSCSCSCSSSTTCCCCC Y C undetines _____ undetned SSCS merma SSS Undefined Undefined Go to top ofthis page J 7 ojojo j j ejojn mm G a G a e i cp Se 2 cD Pico Pico iS 222 co Pio Pia oo cc Cyc yc yc 3 4 Pia pia eo e S j2 Pe 53 aes D J 2 T T bed ic fom om T w E ISS J 2 j
211. been set in Remote Setting List you can select a network folder from the list Otherwise select Allow the following network folder to be used as a destination Tip If you want to allow users to specify either Remote 1 or Remote 2 select the one that is not set for the network folder as a destination and select Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination of the selected folder Remote Setting List screen In this screen you can set a list of network folders for Save as file destination which can be selected from Remote 1 and Remote 2 Remote Setting List amaA T Hame Protocal Metwork Path Sampleggi SMe Wd 92 7675 0 7 scan Go to top of this pa oO N il WN Item name Description OK button Registers the remote setting list Cancel button Cancels the registration of the remote setting list New button Sets a new remote setting P 195 Remote Setting screen Edit button Edits the item selected in the remote setting list P 195 Remote Setting screen Delete button Deletes the item selected in the remote setting list Name Displays the name of the remote setting Protocol Displays the protocol of the remote setting Network Path Displays the network path of the remote setting 194 Setup Item List Remote Setting screen In this screen you can set the network folders for Save as file destination tha
212. blic Template Groups Ro Rare ide ane AllGroups Defined Groups ee Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 091 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 i OS iera e emee fenes OO C a C 3 05 ooo oor undefined e oa undefined Jonefned 3 The templates list in the public group is displayed Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Template Public Template template Groups Group Information User Name No Name sid Public Public Template Groups Panel View List view Please login as an administrator to edit public templates ice COPY MODE FAX MODE SCAN TO i SAVING E MAIL Ge sre STORE SCAN TO TO E FILING wile FILE amp E MAIL Go to top ofthis page Tips e You can change the template list view by clicking on either Panel View or List View e If you know which public template you want to view click the number of the public template in the Jump to links Registration How to Set and How to Operate 93 E Managing address book P 94 Managing contacts in the Address Book P 98 Managing groups in the Address Book LJ Managing contacts in the Address Book There are two ways to manage contacts in the Address Book e Adding editing and deleting contacts manually P 94 Adding editing and deleting contacts manually e Add new contact searching for a
213. body message of the E mail document You can enter up to 1000 characters including spaces File Format Select the file format to which the received document will be converted e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files Tips If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled only the PDF Multi and the PDF Single are selectable for a file format For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Files saved in an XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed 314 Registration Administration tab Item List Item name Description Encryption Set this to encrypt PDF files if you have selected PDF Multi or PDF Single in the File Format setting Encryption Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files User Password Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files Master Password
214. c template Box Setting Specify how the documents are saved in e Filing This can be set only when registering the Store to e Filing agent P 303 Setting up Box Setting Public template Store to USB Setting Specify how the document is saved in USB media Scan Setting Specify how the documents are scanned This can be set only when creating a Save as file agent Email agent or Store to e Filing agent P 303 Setting up Scan Setting Public template Extended Field settings Specify extended field definition information and extended field settings P 303 Setting up Extended Field Settings Password Setting Specify the password to the template if it is newly created After configuring the desired template properties click Save The template properties are registered 324 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate LJ Resetting public templates You can reset a public template that you have registered You can reset a public template that you selected or you can reset all public templates that are registered in the public template groups LL P 325 Resetting a public template LL P 327 Resetting all public templates Resetting a public template To reset an unnecessary public template perform the following procedure 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administrati
215. can register frequently used templates and template groups and External Interface Enabler shortcuts Tip The Public Menu submenu can be accessed from the Registration menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Registration menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 302 Registration Administration tab Item List LL P 305 Select Menu Type screen LL P 305 Select Template Group screen ane LL P 306 Select Template screen LL P 306 Select URL screen Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML Format File Cancel Delete uus jungennegq Oo O d o oO Oo as D 5o o o D 5 m o Cancel button Cancels the operation Delete button Deletes the selected public menu No The public menu number is displayed Tip In the public menu you can register 64 types Name The templates registered in the public menu or the registered names of the External Interface Enabler are displayed Click a registered name to check and edit a registered public menu LL P 305 Select Template Group screen LL P 306 Select URL screen Click Undefined to register a new public menu LL P 305
216. cation is enabled in any template You can select whether notification will be sent or not for each template Password Enter the password if setting a password to the private group You can enter up to 20 characters including numbers sharp marks and asterisks Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Registration Tab Page Overview 53 Li Private Templates screen You can edit the template you are registering Private Templates template Groups Gloun A Esi l mae Password Reset ee User Name oon nplete001 Usel lame001 Please click a template picture to edit Jump to IDcard Copy PP Im Edit button Allows you to edit the private template group information P 53 Group Properties screen Change Password button Allows you to change the password for the private template group P 55 Change Group Password screen Reset button Resets registration of the private template group No Displays the number of the private template group Name Displays the name of the private group User Name Displays the owner of the private template group Template list You can display the template list You can change the view by clicking Panel View or List View Panel View Panel View List view Please click a template picture to edit Jump to 5 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 1 1 6 7 12 13
217. cceeeeeeeeeaeeeees 84 InternetFax Setting Private template cceceeeees 64 InternetFax Settings c2isuchscies cere ariel chaste 200 J Job Status How to Set and How to Operate 34 JOD Status Tab pier ascetic eeeei an ea a 29 Job Status Tab Page Overview ccccecceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 30 L Languages settings cccccecceeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 286 DAP Authentication ssnin naa 251 KST VIEW aoaea E Mruenatetas 99 L g Settings Item iSt wxiesshcessccleeteiideadesea eets tinadiatess 45 LOG SIZO soin E Oulu Eta ticad ea eee tthe ca et 46 Logs How to Set and How to Operate cecceeeeeeeee 4 OOS Malt stapes cage ence ote ta eee an tae 37 Logs Tab Page Overview cccccceceseeceeceeeeeeaeeseeseees 38 Long File Name Setting ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 M MailIBox Properties cccecceeeeeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeess 82 MailBox Setting Mailbox cccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 290 Maintenance ltem list 2i ceccice cactus ee deedicteake 214 Managing address book ccccccecceceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeaeeeees 94 Managing contacts in the Address Book 2000068 94 Managing directory service ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 292 Managing groups in the Address Book sssssseeeeee 98 Managing mailboxes cccecceecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 100 Managing t
218. ccess policy mode You can delete all private print jobs displayed in the list Delete All Hold Print Jobs button This item is displayed if you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode You can delete all hold print jobs displayed in the list 30 Job Status Tab Page Overview Item name Document Name Description Displays the document name of the print job Document names are displayed using 10 asterisks when the Confidentiality Setting is enabled P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting Date Time Displays the date and time when the print job was released from the client computers They are displayed using year month day hour minute and second For example 2012 12 24 12 34 56 Type Displays the print job set in the printer driver Possible values of print job are Normal Print Scheduled Print Private Print Proof Print and Hold Print Status Displays the status of the print job Possible values of status are Paused Wait Suspend Skipped Process Printing and Scheduled Paper Displays the paper size of the print jobs Pages Displays the number of pages of the print job Sets Displays the number of copies set for the print jobs User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the print job Domain Name LDAP Server Tips
219. ceived Forward is available only when the Fax Unit is installed on this equipment e Two lines become available in Fax Received Forward by installing the 2nd Line for FAX Unit in the FAX Unit It is possible to set the reception setting in each line LL P 307 Setting up Document Print Fax InternetFax Received Forward LI P 308 Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward iY LL P 309 Setting up InternetFax Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward LL P 310 Setting up Save as file Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward LL P 314 Setting up Email Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward LL P 316 Setting up Box Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward Q Setting up Document Print Fax InternetFax Received Forward esx You can configure printing of forwarded documents Document Print ON ERROR Item name Description Document Print Always Select this to always print forwarded document ON ERROR Select this to print the received document when an error occurred on all forwarding destinations For example the document is not printed when the E mail transmission only failed in a combined setting of Save as File and E mail Registration Administration tab Item List 307 LI Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward You can specify the destinations to which
220. certificates and client certificates Tip The Certificate Management submenu can be accessed from the Security menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Security menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 247 Security Item List LJ P 256 Setting up Device Certificate LJ P 257 Setting up Client Certificate LJ P 258 Setting up Certificate Setting LL P 259 Setting up CA Certificate LL P 259 Setting up Certificate Files LI Setting up Device Certificate You can configure the device certificate for encrypted communications using wireless LAN IEEE 802 1X authentication IPsec or SSL Device Certificate 1 self signed certificate Installed Create Export 2 Import Not Installed Delete 3 SCEP Automatic Not Installed CA Server Address Primary 10 10 70 111 CA Server Address Secondary 10 10 70 121 MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate IP Address v Timeout 30 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHAt MDS5 Poll Interval 1 Minute v Maximum Poll Duration amp Hours v Delete Item name Description self signed certificate Creates a certificate for encrypted communications using SSL on your device Create button Displays the Create s
221. ces CN Configuration DC 2k3domain DC com certificateRevocationList base objectClass cRLDistributionPoint RL h ta in com CertEnroll 2k3ca c Edit Properties Copy to File Learn more about certificate details If no FQDN connection is established ask your administrator to perform either of the following options In the hosts file accessible from the following folder path add the IP address and the host name C WINNT system32 drivers etc Configure the DNS server to handle the name to address resolution Installing Certificates fora Client PC 363 11 APPENDIX 364 Installing Certificates for a Client PC Index A About the maintenance functions sccseeeeeeeees 290 Access policy mode le sicecsttsetieaicet eet coasts 8 22 ACCESSING LOPACCESS iesiti 10 Accessing TopAccess by entering URL 0000 10 Accessing TopAccess from Network Map 12 18 Add a new contact from the LDAP server 08 97 AGAF INGI aariaa r atenatn sa nana ne teeta cheat 174 PAGAN aeo he an tdteueradiasta basnwuevanateantuehuawmensatasatee ee 178 Add Manual Ky ailioson ia 176 Add New LPR Queue 3 saci ctiessiestestaduvadvacuneGnewenantente 204 Ada NEW URG ernennen a a coutsuare masa naene 212 Add POlicy eccecceseeceseeseecceccceseeseeseerseretestessereerearees 182 PAPO ene ep te ee et on 180 Adding new contacts from the LDAP server
222. ch network folder N W Fax documents are saved NAW Fax Folder Protocol SMB FTP OFTPS Nettare IPX SPX NetWare TCP IP Server Name Port Number Commanda Network Path Login User Name DOSS Password Retype Password Check box Select the check box so that the popup prompts you to enter the network path or the server name if you try to save the settings without it Protocol Select the protocol for uploading an N W Fax document to a network folder e SMB Select this to send an N W Fax document to the network folder using the SMB protocol FTP Select this to send a file to the FTP server FTPS Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL NetWare IPX SPX Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the IPX SPX protocol NetWare TCP IP Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the TCP IP protocol Server Name When you select FTP as the protocol enter the FTP server name or IP address where an N W Fax document will be sent For example to send an N W Fax document to the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter 192 168 1 1 in this box When you select NetWare IPX SPX as the protocol enter the NetWare file server name or Tree Context name when NDS is available When you select NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the IP address of the NetWare file server Port Number Command Enter the port nu
223. check the logs associated with the user account you used to log in Furthermore a user account to which the default Administrator or Auditor role have been assigned can check all logs P 38 View Logs Item list P 44 Export Logs Item list lt access policy mode gt P 45 Log Settings Item list lt access policy mode gt E View Logs Item list 38 ane a Pa aa S an a an 1h a an a S a an P 38 Print Log P 39 Transmission Journal P 40 Reception Journal P 41 Scan Log P 43 Message Log lt access policy mode gt LI Print Log The Print Log page displays the following information for each print job log e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration View Logs Print Log Print Log Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log Message Log Document Name wDate Time 5 Paper Pages Sets Status User Name Domain Name LDAP Server 2011 11 91 11 54 11 ag LT 1 1 OK Go to top f fthis page 9 Item name Description Document Name Displays the document name of the print job Document names are displayed using 10 asterisks when the Confidentiality Setting is enabled P 139 Setting up Confidentiality Setting Date Time Displays the date and time that the print job was released from the client computers Type Displays the print job type
224. ck OK 5 Select agents and click Select Agent Login Device Job Status Registration Counter Inbound FAX routing MailBoxes Properties MailBoxes V Confidential C Bulletin Board 3 C Forward Internet F ax Relay Save as file _ Email Store to e Filing You can configure the following settings in this page P 82 MailBox Properties screen 6 Click each button displayed in the page to set the template properties MailBox Setting Specify mailbox settings P 83 MailBox Setting Mailbox Destination Setting Specify the destination to be sent This can be set only when creating an Internet Fax Relay agent or Email agent P 84 Destination Setting Mailbox InternetFax Setting Specify how the document is transmitted as an Internet Fax This can be set only when creating an Internet Fax Relay agent P 84 InternetFax Setting Mailbox The Internet Fax Relay agent cannot be used to forward an inbound fax routed via Inbound FAX Routing Relay End Terminal Report Specify the destination for the relay end terminal report when forwarding has been performed This can be set only when creating an Internet Fax Relay agent P 84 Relay End Terminal Report Mailbox Email Setting Specify how the document is transmitted as an E mail message This can be set only when creating an Email agent P 85 Email Setting Mailbox
225. ck the SNMP Network Service button from the Network submenu under the Setup menu 2 Click New to create new SNMP V3 user information or click the desired user name on the list to edit SNMP V3 user information already registered SNMP Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable SNMP W12 Enable Read Community public Read Write Community private Enable SNMP Y3 Disable Delete Al N SNMP V3 User Information Geer userName feutrertication Protocol C e O e E Enable SNMP 3 Tra Disable v SNMP V3 Trap User Name SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 v SNMP 3 Trap Authentication Password The Create SNMP V3 User Information page is displayed 3 Specify the following items and click Save Create SNMP V3 User Information Cornegge MFP User Name Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 v Authentication Password Privacy Protocol None ki Privacy Password Permissions Level General User You can set the following in this page P 167 Create SNMP V3 User Information screen The Create SNMP V3 User Information page is closed and the newly created user information is registered on the SNMP V3 user information list The confirmation dialog box appears Tip Clicking Save on the Create SNMP V3 User Information screen instantly registers the SNMP V3 user information enabling the registered user to access t
226. ct this to access the LDAP server using the plain authentication Simple Bind Select this to access the LDAP server using the Simple Bind authentication Search Base Enter the search base When you configure the Active Directory in Windows server make sure to enter this option You can enter up to 256 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash User Name Enter the log in user name if a user name is required to access the directory service You can enter up to 256 alphanumerical characters and symbols Password Enter the password if required to access the directory service You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols Search Timeout Select the timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the LDAP server Specify within the range from 1 to 5 1 is set as the default Enable SSL Select whether the SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled or disabled for communicating the LDAP directory service e Disable Select this to disable the SSL for communicating the LDAP directory service e Verify with imported CA certification s Select this to enable the SSL using the imported CA certificate Accept all certificates without CA Select this to enable the SSL without using imported CA certificate e When Verify with imported CA certification s is selected you must import the CA certificate in this equipment P 263 Securi
227. cted by a password the Private Templates page is displayed Skip to step 4 e f you select the defined private template group that is protected by a password the Input Group Password page is displayed Go to the next step Tips e The page displays all 200 private template groups in default page view You can display only defined private template groups by clicking on the Defined Groups link e If you know which private template group you want to define or edit click the number of the private template group in the Jump to links 86 Registration How to Set and How to Operate 5 Registration Tab Page When the Input Group Password page is displayed enter the password for the selected private template group and click OK e Filing Login Device Job Status Registration Template Input Group Password Group Information Ne a e SYNE C CSCSCS CN Si Cansei The Group Properties page is displayed 4 Click Edit Change Password or Reset Login Device Registration Template Private Templates template Groups Group Information Edit Change Password Dh I A A E fuses If you select Reset you can reset the unnecessary private group and restore it to an undefined private group Skip to step 7 If you reset the group information all private templates registered in the group will be deleted 5 Enter the items below as required e Filing
228. ctory service or click a directory service name to edit an existing directory service Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance New Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot N Default Server Directory Service Name Server IP Address Search Base C a e a fioaeseveop mm o pem fem S pesme aam oo Go to top ofthis page The Directory Service Properties page is displayed 292 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 8 Administration Tab Page 5 Enter the following items as required e Filing Logout Logs Registration User Management Administration Maintenance Directory Service Properties Directory Service List Required Directory Service Name LDAP servert1 Server IP Address i et Part Number 389 Authentication Search Base User Name Password Search Timeout 1 Enable SSL Disable SSL Port Number 636 You can set the following in this page P 281 Directory Service Properties screen e f you use FQDN to specify the LDAP server you must configure the DNS server and enable the DNS in the DNS Session e Specify a user who is a member of the Domain Admin or Account Operator group in the Windows Server when you are enabling user managem
229. d In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 240 Setup How to Set and How to Operate W Setting up Print Data Converter settings For information on Print Data Converter contact your service representative or your service technician You can configure Print Data Converter from the Print Data Converter submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after changing them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the Print Data Converter settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Print Data Converter submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration R gt The Print Data Converter submenu page is displayed In the Print Data Converter submenu page set the Print Data Converter settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Registrat Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version Save Cancel Print Data Converter Setting Print Data Conver
230. d Sharing Center Z j A begs Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices T View full map Connect to a network Set up a connection or network lk A 5 lt k Manage network connections MEDIA PC EN Unidentified network Internet Diagnose and repair This computer Mi Unidentified network Public network Access Local only Connection Local Area Connection l Sharing and Discovery i Network discovery On File sharing On Public folder sharing Off Printer sharing Off no printers installed Password protected sharing On See also Media sharing Off O O OO O Internet Options d 7 Show me all the files and folders I am sharing Windows Firewall s Show me all the shared network folders on this computer The Set Network Location window appears Accessing TopAccess 13 5 Select Private of Location type and then click Next ar a Customize network settings Network name Unidentified network Location type Public Discovery of other computers and devices will be limited and the use of the network by some programs may be restricted 1 omputer discoverable Help me choose Network Icon Merge or delete network locations e The User Account Control dialog box appears e Ifthe user account control is disabled the Set Network Location Successfully set network settings window appears Go to step 7 6 Click Continue in the User
231. d date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting LDAP Role You can create an export file for LDAP roles When the role information setting file has been imported the imported file is created Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting P 355 Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP Department Information Small Large Counter You can create an export file for department information small large counter Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting Department Information You can create an export file for department information Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting Department Information All Counters You can create an export file for department information all counter Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and
232. d symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Common Name Enter the FQDN or IP address of this equipment with alpbhanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Email Address Enter the E mail address with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Validity Period Enter the number of months in the validity period of the self signed certificate Q Setting up Client Certificate Client Certificate Client 2011111 certpfe Create Item name Description Client Certificate Creates the client certificate Create button Displays the Create Client Certificate screen Specify items necessary for the certificate to create the client certificate P 258 Create Client Certificate screen Security Item List 257 258 Create Client Certificate screen Create Client Certificate Save Cancel Country Region Name State or Province Name Locality Name Organization Name Organizational Unit Name Common Name e validity Period Jb month s 1 99 DONOJ AUN Password Save button Saves the Client certificate Cancel button Cancels creating the certificate Country Region Name Enter the country or region name using two alphanumerical characters and symbols Example JP State or Province Name Enter the state or province name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to
233. d to access the SMTP server if the SMTP authentication is enabled You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Maximum Email InternetFax Size Select the maximum size that this equipment is allowed to send using the SMTP Specify within the range from 2 to 100 MB Port Number Enter the port number for accessing the SMTP server when Enable SMTP Client is enabled The port number depends on the port setting in the SMTP server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 25 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number SMTP Client Connection Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the Timeout 1 180 SMTP server Specify within the range from 1 to 180 seconds 30 is set as the default Setup Item List 159 LJ Setting up SMTP Server In SMTP Server you can enable or disable SMTP transmission for receiving the Internet Fax and E mails This function is usually set when you want to enable the Offramp Gateway feature SMTP Server Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Sa
234. delete print jobs fax internetfax jobs and scan jobs released by end users Job Status Tab Page Overview eo ssece sees coecetoeniew tee cecencunpetinebikcaevdeacenyoec seed ernie cadences 30 PPI SOLO REMIS sel 55 fase a oh sal oa aN ti oc ata NS OS hed hae rh tid Aad ONS 30 Fax InternetFax Job Item NS eae aced sees tsecags esses tended caieaaice Maeeeciaseee ghatace ded ue deeds Sx dalliieagaxdande ualstenancitoeeaecbends 32 PS CaSO Hemis hanen E E a eames tuo re get Soon aaa cas oe aes nose OR eos ecde 33 Job Status How to Set and How to Operate cceccceccceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeenesaneeanesenesenesenesees 34 DISDIAVING PRINT ODS sser E E E Grid ciataatenicentateuensecddaeeiaaiddet A NRS 34 Deleting JODS asa A E N E E E E an tenniiees 35 Deleting private print jobs and hold print jobs cc cccesccecesseeceeseeseesecseseeseeseceeeaeeeeseeesseeeeseeeeeseeeeenseeeenseenens 35 Releasing DMINLI ODS veresteiccs pracen o a a Cena 36 Checkingrecoverny IMOrnnaloN eein a a a E 36 Job Status Tab Page Overview You can display and delete print jobs fax internetfax jobs and scan jobs You can also print print jobs immediately Tip When user authentication is enabled you can operate on jobs associated with the user account you used to log in However a user account with administrator privileges can operate on all jobs LL P 30 Print Job Item list LL P 32 Fax InternetFax Job Item list LL P 33 Scan Jo
235. dministrator can create and maintain public templates and manage the public template group Users can display and use public templates but cannot modify them The public group can contain up to 60 public templates Typically these are general purpose templates available to all users An administrator can perform the following public template management operations in TopAccess access policy mode Q LL P 322 Creating or editing public templates P 325 Resetting public templates Q Creating or editing public templates Use the Templates page to create or modify templates Creating or editing public templates 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Registration menu and Public Template submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Registration The Public Template submenu page is displayed 322 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate Display in the Panel View Click an undefined blank icon to create a new template or click a defined icon with an image to edit an existing template e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management l Administration Registration Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax
236. e 2 Friendly Name Print Web Services Print Enable v Printer Name Printer Information Scan eb Services Scan Enable Scanner Name Scanner Information Authentication for PC Initiated Scan Accept any job v Note Accept any job Accounted as Guest if user name is invalid Enable Guest account with Remote Scan permission Item name Description Enable SSL Specify whether or not to use SSL in Web Service e Enable Select this to use SSL e Disable Select this no to use SSL Friendly Name Assign the friendly name for this equipment You can enter up to 127 characters and symbols other than semicolon backslash gt lt and comma Web Services Print Select whether the Web Services Print is enabled or disabled e Enable Select this to enable the Web Services Print e Disable Select this to disable the Web Services Print To enable Web Services Print using SSL a certificate must be installed in this equipment or a client computer For the details see the following pages P 263 Security How to Set and How to Operate Printer Name Assign the printer name for this equipment You can enter up to 127 characters and symbols other than semicolon backslash gt lt and MFP model name Serial number is set as the default Printer Information Assign the printer information for this
237. e Registration Administration tab Item List LJ Setting up Fax Setting Public template In the Fax Setting page you can specify how the fax will be sent P 64 Fax Setting Private template LJ Setting up Email Setting Public template In the Email Setting page you can specify the content of the Scan to Email document to be sent P 66 Email Setting Private template Q Setting up Save as file Setting Public template In the Save as file Setting page you can specify how and where a scanned file will be stored P 68 Save as file Setting Private template Q Setting up Box Setting Public template In the Box Setting page you can specify how scanned images will be stored in the Box P 71 Box Setting Private template Q Setting up Store to USB Device Setting Public template On the Store to USB Device Setting page you can set the method for saving templates in USB media P 71 Store to USB Device Setting Private template LJ Setting up Scan Setting Public template In the Scan Setting page you can specify how originals are scanned for the Save as file Email and Store to e Filing agent P 73 Scan Setting Private template LI Setting up Extended Field Settings P 75 Extended Field settings Registration Administration tab Item List 303 E Public Menu In the public menu you can set the menu screen that is displayed when you press the Menu button You
238. e Undefined icon to register a new template or click defined icon to edit the template Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Template ddres Private Templates template Groups Group Information No Rave p 008 emee Panel View Listview Please click a template picture to edit Jump to 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 COPY MODE Undefined i Undefined Undefined F LJ e lf the templates list is displayed in the List view click the Undefined template name to register new template or click the defined template name to edit the template e If you select the private template that has not been defined the Template Properties page to select agents is displayed Skip to step 7 e If you select the defined private template that is not protected by a password the Template Properties page is displayed Skip to step 6 e If you select the defined private template that is protected by a password the Input Template Password page is displayed Go to the next step Tips e You can change the template list view by clicking on either Panel View or List View e If you know which private template you want to define or edit click the number of the private template in the Jump to links 90 Registration How to Set and How to Operate 5 Registration Tab Page When the Input Template Password page is displayed enter the password for the selected privat
239. e used e For Windows Vista you must log in to Windows as a user who has the Administrators privilege e Before importing certificates make sure that User Account Control UAC is turned off From Control Panel gt User Accounts gt Turn User Account Control On or Off clear the check box for the Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer option and click OK Sl GO 82 User Accounts Turn User Account Control On or Off v p Searct Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer E Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer OK l Cancel On the MMC select and right click on the appropriate folder to store the certificate and select All Tasks gt Import i D Consolel Console Root Certificates Local Computer Personal File Action View Favorites Window Help e af ol ssa Console Root Object Type a 9 Certificates Local Computer Personal usted Find Certificates a 1 J Inte Med All Tasks b Find Certificates Trusted I i N Untruste View l 2 Import _ Third Pa cea men eee ae Advanced Operations 3 a Trusted New Taskpad View Io o j Smart Ca Refresh Export List Help Select the appropriate folde
240. e Files Directory Service Notification Setting Email Setting Notify administrator at Email Address 1 a Notify administrator at Email Address 2 Notify administrator at Email Address 3 temas scription 4 Save button Stores settings for transmitting the report to the registered E mail address LI Setting up Email Setting Notification Setting Email Setting T Notify administrator at Email Address 1 F Notify administrator at Email Address 2 Notify administrator at Email Address 3 Notify administrator at Email Register E mail addresses for administrators who receive the notification Address 1 The notification is sent to the selected administrators by E mail Notify administrator at Email Address 2 Notify administrator at Email Address 3 Maintenance Item List 283 Q Setting up System Message Notification Events System Message Notification Events Device Paper Misfeed Drawer Out of Paper DoorDrawer Open Print Needs Attention Toner Empty Used toner container is Full Power Status HAN Option Attachment History Maintenance Change Settings Maintenance User Data Exportlmport Cloning System Updates Factory Default Log Full Network Error Security Error Warning Information Received FaxInternetFax Error Warning Information Scan Warning Information e Filing Warning Information You can select the eve
241. e POP3 login type e AUTO Select this to automatically designate the POP3 log in type of the POP3 server POP3 Select this to use the general POP3 log in type APOP Select this to use the APOP log in type APOP allows users to access the POP3 server by encrypting the user name and password If it is not possible to log in to the mail server using Auto manually set the type of POP3 log in to either POP3 or APOP Setup Item List 161 Item name Description Account Name Enter the account name for this equipment to access the POP3 server You can enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Enter the account name without the domain name when NTLM SPA or Kerberos is selected in the Authentication option Password Enter the password for this equipment to access the POP3 server You can enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Scan Rate Enter how often this equipment should access the POP3 server for new messages You can enter a value in the range from O to 4096 5 is set as the default Port Number Enter the port number to access the POP3 server The SSL port number depends on the port setting in the POP3 server You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 110 is used SSL Port Number Enter the port number to access
242. e Setting User Department Management User Department Management Log Management Read Export Job Management Job Operation AccountManager User Department Management User Department Management CopyOperator Copy Function Copy Job User Management Tab Page Overview 123 124 Default role names ScanOperator Privileges Scan Function Permitted operations functions Store to Local File Share Store to Remote Server Send Email RemoteScan WSScan Pull Local File Share Store to Local Storage Store to USB Device Remote Send Email Store to Remote Server WS Scan Push Print Print Function 1 Print Job PrintOperator Print Function 1 Print Management eF ilingOperator Scan Function 1 Store to e Filing e Filing e Filing Access FaxOperator Fax iFax Function Internet Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Auditor Log Management 1 Read Guest No privilege settings No settings User Copy Function Copy Job Store to Local File Share Store to Remote Server Store to e Filing Print Function 1 Print Job Store to e Filing Scan Function Store to Local File Share Store to Remote Server Send Email Store to e Filing RemoteScan WSScan Pull Fax iFax Function 1 Internet Fax Transmission Fax Transmission Store to Local File Share Store to Remote Server Local File Share Store to Local
243. e Windows Domain Authentication Use network authentication managed by the Item name PIN Code Description Displays the PIN code for the user authentication You can set this item only when the authentication method is MFP Local Authentication e The PIN code is up to 32 figures 0 9 long The minimum length is specified on User Authentication Setting P 249 Setting up User Authentication Setting e If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in Role Assignment This can be configured when MFP Local Authentication is selected in Authentication Method Displays the registered roles Click the Edit button and select roles from the displayed screen P 120 Role Assignment screen If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in Group Assignment This can be configured when MFP Local Authentication is selected in Authentication Method Displays the registered groups Click the Edit button and select groups from the displayed screen P 120 Group Assignment screen If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in Department Number Displays the registered departments Select this item if you want to change P 128 Department Management Item list lt access policy mode gt PanelUl Language Displays the registered display languages of
244. e desired authority items on encrypted PDF files e Printing Select this to authorize users to print documents e Change of Documents Select this to authorize users to change documents e Content Copying or Extraction Select this to authorize users to copy and extract the contents of documents Content Extraction for accessibility Select this to enable the accessibility feature Tips If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled you cannot clear the Encryption check box For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide The user password and the master password are not set at the factory shipment Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one byte alphanumerical characters The user password must differ from the master password These passwords can be re entered only by an authorized user Users cannot change the settings of the Encryption Level box and the Authority box noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password For the details of the encryption setting refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords Destination Use local folder Select this to save a scanned file to the FILE SHARE folder Tip When Meta Scan is selected you can only specify one destination Registration Tab Page Overview 69 70 Item name 4 Destination Remote 1 Description Select this check box to save the
245. e function all day specify 00 00 for Disable and 00 00 for Enable For a day on which you want to disable the Secure Receive function all day specify 00 00 for Disable and 24 00 for Enable To print the fax jobs the Secure Receive function received you must set Line1 Password and Retype Password For the password you can enter up to 20 alphanumerical characters and symbols _ W Save as File settings You can configure the Save as file settings that apply to the Save as file operations Tip The Save as file submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List a LL P 189 Setting up Local Storage Path 1 LL P 190 Setting up Storage Maintenance a LL P 190 Setting up Destination mea LL P 190 Setting up Folder Name 1 LO P 191 Setting up Format a LL P 191 Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory a LL P 192 Setting up File Composition 1 LO P 192 Setting up User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File mea LO P 192 Setting up Searching Interval mea LL P 193 Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 1 LU P 196 Setting up N W Fax Destination ea LL
246. e gt IT Dept lt AttributeValue gt lt Condition gt lt Role gt Administrator lt Role gt lt RoleSet gt lt AnyOtherUser gt User lt AnyOtherUser gt lt RoleSetting gt LJ When setting multiple roles to one attribute Attribute name set in the external authentication server Department Attribute value set in the external authentication server ITDept Role name to be set 1 Administrator Role name to be set 2 PrintOperator lt RoleSetting gt lt RoleSet gt lt Condition gt lt AttributeName gt department lt AttributeName gt lt AttributeValue gt IT Dept lt AttributeValue gt lt Condition gt lt Role gt Administrator lt Role gt lt RoleSet gt lt RoleSet gt lt Condition gt lt AttributeName gt department lt AttributeName gt lt AttributeValue gt IT Dept lt AttributeValue gt lt Condition gt lt Role gt PrintOperator lt Role gt lt RoleSet gt Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP 355 lt AnyOtherUser gt User lt AnyOtherUser gt lt RoleSetting gt LJ When setting one role to multiple attributes Attribute name set in the external authentication server 1 Department Attribute value set in the external authentication server 1 Sales Attribute name set in the external authentication server 2 Title Attribute value set in the external authentication server 2 SeniorManager Role name to be set Print lt RoleSe
247. e is set to 0 14 Priority Transmit Select whether the document will be sent prior to other jobs Registration Tab Page Overview 65 Email Setting Private template In the Email Setting page you can specify the content of the Scan to Email document to be sent Email Setting Required Use Email Setting in Administration Setting Send data from Device name Template Name 1 Subject Add the date and time to the subject Use From Address Setting set by Administrator 2 ss From Address E Use From Name Setting set by Administrator 3 FCT ame E File Format PDF Multi Encryption User Password ecccccccce Retype Password jeeeesesesee Master Password ecccccccce Retype Password jeeseeseseese Encryption Level 128 bit AES Encryption Authority Printing Change of Documents Content Copying or Extraction Content Extraction for accessibility DocYYMMDDCYYMMDD is a date File Name Add the date and time to a file name Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v Item name Description Subject This sets the subject of the E mail Use Email Setting in Administration Setting Select this to set the subject specified in Administration Setup Email as subject Send data from Device Name Template Name Select this to set the Template Name data sent from Device Name as subject
248. e new settings Policy Name TESTO1 n Profile Name m TESTO OK button Saves the profile setting Cancel button Cancels registration of the profile Policy Name Enter the policy name You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than amp backslash single quotation semicolon comma double quotation and Tip Up to 10 policies can be created Profile Name Select profiles to apply to the policy You can select multiple profiles 182 Setup Item List WE Copier settings You can specify copier settings Tip The Copier submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List LL P 183 Setting up Default setting LL P 185 Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue Q Setting up Default setting In Default setting you can set the default copier settings that apply for copy operation from the touch panel Copier Setting Default setting Original Mode Text Photo v Exposure Auto v MPT Plain Magazine Sort 2in1 4in1 Write Laterally v Maximum Copies 999 v Auto 2 sided Mode Sort Mode Priority Non Sort v Original Mode Select the default original mode for black and white originals e Te
249. e of the System Firmware 288 Maintenance Item List 8 Administration Tab Page E Reboot settings You can reboot your equipment The Reboot submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu P 22 Access Policy Mode P 274 Maintenance Item List Maintenance Item List 289 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate This section details procedures for maintaining this equipment It covers backing up and restoring files deleting files stored in this equipment and updating the software on TopAccess Yh a an NY a an NYT a an NYT a an Yh a an Yh rN Yh a an NYT a P 290 About the maintenance functions P HIDDEN Uploading the client software P HIDDEN Removing the client software P 291 Deleting the data from local folder P 292 Managing directory service P 294 Setting up notification P 296 Importing and exporting P 301 Rebooting the equipment E About the maintenance functions 290 You can carry out the following maintenance tasks in the Maintenance menu of the TopAccess access policy mode Backing up data in the hard disk An administrator can create backup files of the address book mailboxes and templates in the hard disk This ma
250. e password again for a confirmation Setup Item List 197 E Email settings You can configure the E mail settings that are needed for Scan to Email operations This section describes necessary settings for E mail transmissions Tip The Email Setting submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period LI Setting up Email Setting You can specify the file format fragment message size and default body strings that apply to the Scan to Email documents Email Setting From Address From Name NleSsage Header Inbound FAX Routing Received from Sender s TSI Received by Receiver s CSI _ File Format Black PDF Multi File Format Colour PDF Multi v Number of Retry 3 Retry interval 1 Minutes Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v 1 2 3 4 5 6 T7 8 9 Default Subject Factory Default 1 0 Add the date and time to the Subject Enable v 41 Editing of Subject Enable v Default Body Strings 13 jody String Transmission Enable 14 ACC Address Display OFF As for File Name Forma
251. e specified SMTP server for transmission over the Internet Enable is set as the default Enable SSL Select whether the SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled or disabled for SMTP transmission e Disable Select this to disable the SSL for SMTP transmission e Verify with imported CA certification s Select this to enable the SSL using the imported CA certificate Accept all certificates without CA Select this to enable the SSL without using imported CA certificate e When Verify with imported CA certification s is selected you must import the CA certificate in this equipment P 263 Security How to Set and How to Operate e Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols SSL TLS Select the protocol for the SSL when the Enable SSL option is enabled e STARTTLS Select this to send a message in TLS Transport Layer Security using STARTTLS that is the extension command for SMTP transmission e Over SSL Select this to send a message in SSL Secure Socket Layer When you select Over SSL make sure to change the port number correctly Generally 465 port is used for the Over SSL instead of 25 port SMTP Server Address Enter the IP address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of the SMTP server when Enable SMTP Client is enabled You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash If you use FQDN to specify the
252. e template and click OK Device Job Status Logs Registration Template Input Template Password Group Information No os 3 Templete009 Template Information C X The Template Properties page is displayed User Name User Name On the Template Properties page click either Edit Change Password or Reset Template e Filing Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Template Template Properties Template Groups private Templates Group Information Now Name S oo Bftemwmteons Template Information No a A o Ber S Edit _ Change Password Reset Template J Copy Panel Notification Automatic Start Disable Copy vr If you select Reset Template you can reset an unnecessary private template and restore it to an undefined template Skip to step 10 Enter the items below as required e If you have selected Edit in step 6 select the agent and click Select Agent Device Registration Template Template Properties Template Groups gt private Templates Copy Fax InternetF ax Scan C Meta Scan Email Cl Save as file C Store to e Filing C Save to USB Media You can configure the following settings in this page P 56 Template Properties screen Registration How to Set and How to Operate 91 e If you have selected Change Password in step 6 enter the following items and skip to step 9 e
253. earch must be registered by a user who is granted administrator privileges in access policy mode P 292 Managing directory service 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Search Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book J Address Group a Destination The Search Contact page is displayed 3 Select the directory service name that you want to search for in the Directory Service Name box and enter the search terms in the boxes that you want to search Search Contact Search Cancel Enter a partial name or Email address to search for a contact Directory Service Nam LDAP server1 v First Name FirstNameQ1 Last Name Email Address Fax Number Company Department Tips e f you select the model name of this equipment at the Directory Service Name box you can search for destinations in the address book of this equipment e TopAccess will search for destinations who match the entries e Leaving the box blank allows wild card searching However you must specify at least one 4 Click Search TopAccess will start searching for destinations in the LDAP server and the Search Address List page will display the results 5 Select the Email check boxes of users you want to add as the E mail recipients or Internet Fax recipients and select the Fax check boxes of users you want to add as Fax recipients Click Rese
254. eate Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot ff You can set the following in this page P 280 Delete Files settings The data are deleted Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 291 E Managing directory service An administrator can register the directory service properties of the LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol server using TopAccess When a new directory service is added the users can search destinations using the LDAP server Setting up the directory service 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Directory Service submenu Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance 1 You can upload e STUDIO6550c Series client software to the controller This allows end users to install the software into their system from the TopAccess Install Software link located atthe bottom ofthe TopAccess page Upload Files Driver Files v The following are the required files 2 The Directory Service submenu page is displayed Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Click New to add a new dire
255. eceeeeeeeceeeeceeecuecegeceuseseeessueseeessueenas 235 Setting up Printer settings rsrsrsrs neriie E E AT E EEEE AAEN 236 Setting up Print Service SettINGS cccecceccsecssecceesseeterccuetsetcusccsetenccurecseteetcuteseeteetcuttas 239 Setting up Print Data Converter settings 2 0 0 0 cece cccceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseceeeseeeaeeseeeeeeseenes 241 CONTIGUNAG tHe EWE UNCION saeia a a a a a 243 Setting up Off Device Customization Architecture settings ccccececceccceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeees 245 Displaying version INTOFMAUION oe oisectscecnaacewedliod sedan bod vetiobied decuwel ahd olewelloutcweteteled anseeslodddeens 246 Securty Kem EIS rc ccia ts ocak a O 247 4 CONTENTS Authenticaton Sengsoro E a A a tadhaa team aa A 247 Certificate management settings ccccccseccceeecsseceeeceeecueecaeeceeeceueceueecaeesaeessuesueeseeeaas 256 Fassword FONCY SetUNgS setidsiacouss ndovaiennsdowslesaautuctiue add tae a tenet aN tedlawtmioatecs 260 Security How to Set and How to Operate ccc ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseanseeneeenenans 263 Installing a device Certificate cceccccccsecccsccceeecececeueeceeecucecseecsueceessueesueesueesaeessaeesaeesaass 263 Creating Exporting a client Certificate ccccccccseecssecceeeeeeeseesaeeecaeesaeeseeeseeeeseeeaseesagees 2 0 MAS LAINIOR CAV COMING AUC nnna a a degade Ped aE a ares 212 Maintenance Item LIS seie telah sceccsiet dia vie doccatiee eldee h
256. ed If the SMB Signing of SMB Server is disabled in an SMB server the communication is performed without the digital signature Digital signature is always done for the communication on the client side Select this to make this equipment always access an SMB server with a digital signature When the SMB Signing of SMB Server is disabled in an SMB server the communication is not allowed Digital signature isn t done for the communication for the client Select this to communicate to an SMB server without the digital signature If the SMB Signing of SMB Server is always enabled in an SMB server the communication is not allowed e Ifyou do not know whether the SMB Signing of SMB Server is enabled or disabled in the SMB servers it is recommended to select If server agrees digital signature is done for the communication If this is set incorrectly the SMB communication may become unavailable The digital signature is always done for the communication on the server side as the default on Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Therefore specify If server agrees digital signature is done for the communication or Digital signature is always done for the communication on the client side for SMB communications with a Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Q Setting up NetWare Session In NetWare Session you can set the NetWare Bindery or NDS service This must be set when configuring a Novell printing environment
257. ed Internet Faxes to another Internet Fax device This agent can be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing agent Save as file Forwards received faxes or received Internet Faxes to a shared folder on the equipment or a network folder This agent can be combined with another agent Email Forwards received faxes to an E mail address This agent can be combined with the Save as file agent or Store to e Filing one Store to e Filing Forwards received faxes to e Filing on the equipment This agent can be combined with another one The image quality of the file that is stored by Save as file E mail and Store to e Filing is different from the output of the received fax when it is printed 5 Select whether or not to print the forwarded documents in the Document Print box e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration etup Maintenance Registration Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML Format File Save Select Agent Forward InternetF ax Save as file E Email E Store to e Filing Zl Save as file Setting ON ERROR K x Always Select this always to print forwarded documents ON ERROR Select this to print the received document when an error has occurred on all forwarding destinations For example the document is not printed when E mail
258. ed faxes and Internet Faxes to a specified address using fax received forward and Internet Fax received forward functions You can check all faxes and Internet Faxes received by this equipment using these functions LL P 328 Registering the Fax or Internet Fax received forward LL P 330 Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward e You can also forward using the F code communications function on this equipment when communicating with a fax which supports the F code communications function You need to create a mailbox in advance Also you can use the TSI sender information forwarding function by making the counterpart fax number as a box number and forwarding documents in the box mailbox to a specified saving location P 100 Managing mailboxes e The Fax Received Forward can be registered only when the Fax Unit is installed e When the 2nd line board is installed the received faxes are forwarded to the specified destinations according to the Fax Received Forward setting regardless of whether the faxes are received through line 1 or line 2 The received fax and Internet Faxes can be transmitted to the following destinations e Other Internet Fax devices e Local folder in this equipment or network folders e E mail addresses e Box in this equipment LJ Registering the Fax or Internet Fax received forward Tip The procedures to register the Fax Received Forward and Internet Fax Rece
259. ed the XML format file LJ Setting up Delete XML Format File Delete XML Format File File Name File Size Date 1 2 3 Item name Description 1 File Name Select the XML format file to be deleted 2 File Size Displays the file size of the XML format file 3 Date Displays the imported date of the XML format file Registration Administration tab Item List 321 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate You can register public templates and relay transmissions of received faxes Internet Faxes in the Registration menu in the TopAccess access policy mode Public Template An administrator can create public templates to register to the public template group This template group can be accessed by all users in the network P 322 Registering public templates Fax Received Forward Internet Fax Received Forward An administrator can register an agent which forwards all received faxes Internet Faxes to a specified destination This enables the administrator to check all faxes received by this equipment P 328 Registering Fax and Internet Fax received forward The Fax Received Forward can be registered only when the Fax Unit is installed Extended Field Definition P 317 Extended Field Definition XML format file LL P 343 Editing XML format file LL P 347 Registering XML format file E Registering public templates An a
260. eeeee 223 Deleting the data from local folder cscceceeeeeeees 291 Department Counter aivciireiiases ios ie tiiasaaticectaeesiens 106 Department Information ceceecseceeeeeseeeees 107 129 Department Information Edit cccccseceeeeeeeeeee 130 Department Management ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 106 Department Management Item list ceeeeeee enone 128 Destination Setting Mailbox ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Destination Setting Private template ceeeeeeee 58 Device eM NISE sirieias a E Ea 26 Device T ab enaa ase needa ease sauaseae 25 Directory Service Properties cccccceceeeeseeeeeeeeees 281 Directory Service settings cccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 Displayed ICONS aosan r 27 Displaying job lOGS cccccececceeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 47 Displaying Print JODS aicinn 34 Displaying public templates cccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Displaying templates in the public group 02c0eee 93 Displaying the department counter cceceeeeee 111 Displaying the total counter cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 Displaying version information ccccseceeeeeeeeeees 246 E ECE AEE ETA T oa gaya EE E E E E E EE 204 E Git ROIG einna ao S eva vous tester eaen dees 127 Editing XML format file c cecceceeeceeceeeeeeneeeeeees 343 Email Setting Mailbox s2t siciote accion 8
261. eeees 307 Setting up e Filing Notification Events ce 139 Setting up Email Address Setting ccccecceeeeeeees 253 Setting up Email Authentication cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 252 SENG Up E mail Print sesno e e 209 Setting up Email Setting ccceeeceeseeeeeeeeees 198 283 Setting up Email Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward seceeeees 314 Setting up Email Setting Public template 303 Setting up E mail settings ccceccecceceeeceeeeeeees 231 Setting up Energy Save cccccccecceccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 140 Setting up Extended Field Settings ccccceeeeee 303 Setting up Extended Field settings ccceceeeeeee 318 Setting Wp Fax Setting acier iiics a ara i 186 Setting up Fax Setting Public template 8 303 Setting up Fax settings cccccecceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 227 Setting up File Composition ssesosenonsennrerenerrrererrene 192 Setting Up File Upload ccrten henne ee 2 6 Seting Up Filtering sects eee ecaice erent ede 145 Setting up Folder Name cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 190 Setting UD FORMAL sas aisvasistacceineacvaestenrad a A 191 Setting up FTP CHEM atvcsicccss sovnsdicaesereatateiauemuaoeane 162 Seting up FIP PRIN nannaa uceama teats 208 Setting up FTP Server lt seviccssetesindcdessdes becnttaesrecerabeniand 163 Seting UP FUNCIONS cwwicisidecicwcaawavaceat
262. eeeeseeeeees Of Private Templates javsvwiedsaccswocsivescunasnstwansand egucssamenusaaee 54 Procedure for using Meta Scan cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 342 Publie Men scsnioonneniaenn anna 304 Public Template Groups ccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeees 51 Public Template settings ccccscceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 R Reboot settings iiss dec lcctacceri ceed eee eetel sacs 289 Rebooting the equipment ccecceeeeceeceeteeseeeeeees 301 Reception Journal cccceececceecseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteneeeees 40 Recovery Information cc iciicicecids dcr hiods imeaiatiniceshoiees 31 Registering a Server oo ccc ceccecceccaeeeeceeeceeceeeseeeeeeeeees 243 Registering and editing private template groups 86 Registering Extended Field Definition 00006 348 Registering Fax and Internet Fax received forward 328 Registering or editing SNMP V3 user information 219 Registering or editing templates ccecceeeeeeeeeeeee 89 Registering public templates cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 322 Registering templates for Meta Scan cceceeeeeeees 351 Registering the Fax or Internet Fax received forward c cscceeceeeeeeeeeeees 328 Registering XML format file ccccceeceeeeeeeeeee eens 347 Registration How to Set and How to Operate 86 322 Registration Item list ccccccsececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 Registration Tab a dein tte
263. efer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords File Name Format Select the format of the file name Information such as file name date and time or page number is added according to the selected format e FileName Date Page e FileName Page Date e Date FileName Page e Date Page Filename e Page FileName Date e Page Date FileName e FileName _ Date Page Comment Enter the comment on the file Date Select how you add date and time of the file name selected in Format e YYYY MM DD HH mm SS Year 4 digits month day hour minute and second are added e YY MM DD HH mm SS Year 2 digits month day hour minute and second are added e YYYY MM DD Year 4 digits month and day are added e YY MM DD Year 2 digits month and day are added e HH mm SS Hour minute and second are added e YYYY MM DD HH mm SS mm0 Year 4 digits month day hour minute second and random number 2 digits and 0 are added e None Date is not added Page Select the number of digits of a page number applied to Page of the file name selected in Format from 3 to 6 4digits is set as the default Sub ID This equipment automatically adds a sub ID identification number to the name of a file that you are saving the same file name exists You can select the number of digits of this sub ID from 4 to 6 or
264. eir cuheeuebind candaantendtauedetnlscanuineneveunbeateden 274 Create Clone File SCTINGS session ialetts berdeeyt ered Secedereeeetes Meee ele siete diocese dene attain 274 Stall Clone File Setting Sursis a E E E en a ETA 2 6 1a 91 ait A 6 0 coe ene er ee ee eee oe eo EE ere ee ee eR eer ee 211 EO Re Se WING S eaa E sas A nek teens ere 279 DGIGIS FIGS SCUINGS iavisus det du scsen tals ceasing sled a T aa E A 280 Directo Service Settings scat ceeetuadicueh stats Posettedt a ten hued iia Mend cce cin cn cnet i tad 281 INOUTICARION SEUNG Ssi rusan ee aa e EE une Gueateens ade eee sans N 283 Languages SCUINGS sisscnrc sdb aus seewst secs a a a a due a a aa 286 System Updates SeN S risg a aa aA a dave Mensano IRA 288 REDOOLSENO S na a a a a a a a EE 289 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate cccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseenesenenees 290 About the maintenance functions ccccccceeccesecceeeceeeceeecuecaueceueecaeecsueceuessueecueessueeaees 290 Deleting the data from local fOIGED ec eccc cece eececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeaueeseeesanes 291 Managing directory SCIVICC uiios Ul sin eee det castes a a a 292 SCHUNG UD NOLINGATON s cthc6o2aivnco dais a a kous sheeted aa 294 IMPOMING aNnGeXPORING eissciecs sotaseuac es E a ied N 296 Rebooting the equipment sev nirstsricasian ciate venstaudubevnctdanuine tout uaiwiteveiadellttonatiwevesmusdabSiuneadanveuwieiudugy 301 Registration Admini
265. elect this to use 3DES CBC e DES CBC Select this to use DES CBC Diffie Hellman algorithm Select the Diffie Hellman group to be used in IKE e MODP 768 Group 1 Select this to use the MODP group in 768 bits e MODP 1024 Group 2 Select this to use the MODP group in 1024 bits e MODP 2048 Group 14 Select this to use the MODP group in 2048 bits e Elliptic Curve P 256 Group 19 Select this to use Elliptic Curve P 256 e Elliptic Curve P 384 Group 20 Select this to use Elliptic Curve P 384 e Elliptic Curve P 521 Group 21 Select this to use Elliptic Curve P 521 Setup Item List 179 Add Profile Modify Profile screen You can display this screen by clicking the Add button for Profile or a registered profile name You can create a profile for an IPsec environment by combining the registered filter and either a manual key or an IKE key Add Profile OK Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Profile Name Tunnel Settings Tunnel mode IPy4 IPv6 Address Key Selection Key TESTO1 IKEv1 Proposals ESP Transforms AH Transforms Session Key Settings integrity T ntegrity Session Key Settings SHA1 a AES 256 CBC T SHA E mos F AES 192 CBC mos E AES xcec AES 128 CBC E AES xcBC KBytes AES CTR 3DES CBC DES CBC E Generate a new key after 3600 Seconds S
266. elessLAN Bluetooth Directory Service Address Book Address Book Template Mail Boxes Security Includes secure erase and authentication settings in the clone file Default Settings Includes the general copy scan fax ifax E mail save as file printer notification log settings EWB settings and Fax InternetFax Received Forward in the clone file User Management Includes the user group role quota department code and my menu with template address book in the clone file Network Print Service Includes network settings print service wireless LAN Bluetooth and directory service settings in the clone file Address Book Includes the address book in the clone file Address Book Template Mail Includes the address book template and mail boxes in the clone file Boxes Maintenance Item List 275 W install Clone File settings You can install the created clone file You can implement a cloned environment by installing the clone file created on another equipment Tip The Install Clone File submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List LL P 276 Setting up File Upload LJ P 276 Setting up Clone File Information LJ P 277 Setting up Setting data included in Clone
267. elete Rel Recovery Information ample pdt 201101419 14 36 25 Print Ste Ad i p of this pag Zp otinis page 3 Click Delete The selected job is deleted Click the REFRESH icon at the upper right of the page to confirm the deletion Tip You cannot use the Print Job page to delete fax Internet Fax jobs and E mail reception print jobs E Deleting private print jobs and hold print jobs You can delete private print jobs and hold print jobs if you are logged in with a user account which is granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode Click the Job Status tab and click the Print menu The Print Job page is displayed Click the Delete All Private Print Jobs or Delete All Hold Print Jobs button Private print jobs or hold print jobs are deleted e Filing Logout Device Registration Counter User Management Administration Print Job A REFRESH Delete Release Recovery Information Delete All Private Print Jobs bs Delete All Hold Print Jobs X mjw omas e pe e e o e Sc E a a a E a a O a a a a a a a C a a Ca Go to top ofthis page It may take a while to delete all private or hold jobs Job Status How to Set and How to Operate 35 W Releasing print jobs You can print jobs that are stored in the queue Private print jobs and hold print jobs cannot be released from TopAccess Click the Job Status tab and click the Print menu The
268. elf signed certificate screen Specify items necessary for the certificate to create the self signed certificate P 257 Create self signed certificate screen Export button Exports the created self signed certificate Import the certificate for encrypted communications using wireless LAN IEEE 802 1X authentication IPsec or SSL Browse button Allows you to select the certificate file Upload button Uploads the selected certificate file Delete button Deletes the registered certificate file SCEP Automatic Automatically acquires the certificate for encrypted communications using IP sec or SSL CA Server Address Primary Enter the IP address of FQDN of the CA server You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols CA Server Address Secondary Enter the IP address of FQDN of the CA server You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate Select whether you use the IP address or FQDN as the address of this equipment to be entered in the Common Name box of the certificate IP Address is set as the default Timeout Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the CA server Specify within the range from 1 to 120 seconds 10 is set as the default CA Challenge Enter the password for the CA challenge You can enter up to 16 alphanumerical characters Signature Al
269. emplates cccccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeees 86 Menu Setting sadsssisiiroise ae dedsehen aA 338 Message Log sieneen a e E 43 Meld Scam anian a a a A 354 Modify Fiter serrian a ea 174 Modify IKE sxssresecsecsdesstich clave Roxceucndcxes a bavtineatestdtess 178 Modify Manual Key c cccecceccseeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 176 MOGI PONCY timore a eee 182 Modify Profle ssamen a deel dea teeteas 180 MyAccount Item Ist yeisso a 336 My Account Tab s cces aenctes2 en TN 335 My Account Tab Page Overview ccccsseeseeeeeeeeeees 336 N Network SettingS ccccecceeececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 Notification settings u eccescceveicne deseedan eaceceoeecapeaioee due 283 O Off Device Customization Architecture settings 213 366 Index P Panel Setting Private template ccccceceeceeeeeeeees 57 Panel VIEW rnururooni tenean 54 Password Policy settings ccccecceeceeceeeseeeeeeeeees 260 Password Setting f dcere ate n rece a 15 PRU COUNLED seesi oa 105 Print Data Converter settings ccccseceeceeeeeeeeeees 210 Print Job Item list scsacsvvaseinaasswsteusatessaadnavcraveebsateuna sages 30 PriNU SEIVICE setings viinien EE 206 Printer settings cs erenrnin nnr e a RE 202 Printer e Filing settings c2 s lt cic0cece 02Jctsceecdeadecceetcaese 201 Private Template GroupS cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 Private template settings ccccccecseceeeeeee
270. en Password Policy R2 The Certificate Management page is displayed e Filing Logout 4 Click Browse of Import in Device Certificate to select a device certificate file and then click Upload Security Authentication Certificate Management Password Policy Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed Import Not Installed F Users User01 Desktop Client_2C N Upload Delete x 1 SCEPtAutomatic 82 CA Server Aguress Primary 10 10 70 111 CA Server Address Secondary 10 10 70 121 MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate IP Address v Timeout 30 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHA1 MDS Poll Interval 1 Minute v Maxirnurm Poll Duration 8 Hours X Request Delete The alert message dialog box appears 5 Enter the password for the device certificate and then click OK E ImportCertificate Windows Internet Explorer o co xs E http Administration Security Certificates ImportPwd htm Enter Password aI ug ae Internet Protected Mode On fg yr 100 v The device certificate is imported 6 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Security How to Set and How to Operate 7 Then you can enable SSL for the following network settings LL P 150 Setting up LDAP Session
271. ens 64 Fax SC HGS senerara e hte eee nance 186 Fax InternetFax Job Item list ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 G General Settings 1 24ceh atic acd eed een aeialede 136 SOUP asiron aarre ke a R Tf Group ASSIGNMENT sorina a aan ans 120 Group Information cecceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeaes 54 122 Group Management Item list cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 Index 365 Group Properties ccscescussescssssccsccesausersurseceess 53 80 MDO eean ina nase sdseas mae eceversaey we tnaesn aia 133 kapor settings Ses Ses iuico ide teetetetes timate rt dieaiande ateus ences 217 Importing address book data in the CSV XML format lt dieiie2 ase nedieditin etc eee 296 Importing ANd exporting ccecceceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 Importing the address book data cccceceeeeeeeeeeee 296 Importing the role information setting file 356 Inbound FAX routing ccc cecceccecceeeseeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 81 Inbound FAX routing Item list cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 Install Clone File settings ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 6 Installing a device Certificate cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 Installing a device certificate automatically 268 Installing an imported device certificate 0008 266 Installing CA Certificate ccccecc ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 272 InternetFax Setting Mailbox cccecce
272. ent P 178 Add IKE Modify IKE screen IKE Type Displays the registered IKE types Profile First create a filter and a manual key or IKE key according to your IPsec environment and then create profiles by combining them Add button You can add a profile on the Add Profile screen P 180 Add Profile Modify Profile screen Delete button Select profiles to delete and click the Delete button to delete them Profile Name Click a registered profile name to modify its content P 180 Add Profile Modify Profile screen Profile Mode Displays the registered profile mode 172 Setup Item List Item name Description Create a policy to use in IPsec by combining the registered profiles Add button You can add a policy on the Add Policy screen P 182 Add Policy Modify Policy screen Delete button Select policies to delete and click the Delete button to delete them Policy Name Click a registered policy name to modify its content P 182 Add Policy Modify Policy screen Setup Item List 173 Add Filter Modify Filter screen You can display this screen by clicking the Add button for Filter or a registered filter name You can create a filter to use in IPsec Add Filter B k Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Filter Name
273. ent Setting LI P 249 Setting up User Authentication Setting LJ P 252 Setting up Email Authentication LL P 253 Setting up Email Address Setting LL P 254 Restriction Setting for Destination O P 255 Setting up Single Sign On Setting Security Item List 247 LJ Setting up Department Setting When you want to manage the counters for every department enable department management If this is done the department code input screen will be displayed on the computer and the touch panel when copying scanning faxing faxing via the Internet and operating on e Filing to enable you to manage operations by departments The following applications can access your equipment regardless of the department setting AddressBook Viewer Backup Restore Utility TWAIN Driver File Downloader Department Setting 1 Department Code Disable v 2 Require Department Code in User Registration Disable Please set the Department Code to existing user which Department Code is not set oes Valid Department Code Print Job Store to invalid job list Department Management Copy Department Management Scan D D Department Management Print Disable D D Department Management List 3 4 5 Department Management FAX 6 7 8 Department Code Select whether or not to enable department management Disable is set as the default Require Depa
274. ent receives an E mail print job with an MDN request Disable is set as the default Setup Item List 209 E Print Data Converter settings For the details of the print data converter contact your service representative or your service technician Tip The Print Data Converter submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List Print Data Converter Setting Print Data Converter Disable Import New Converter File Name Import Current Converter Delete Export ile Name ile Size 1 Print Data Converter Select whether the print data converter function is enabled or disabled You cannot enable the function if the converter setting file has not been imported 2 Import New Converter Import the converter setting file Tip Click the Browse button to select the file to import and click Open Check the file name and click the Import button 3 Current Converter Display the imported converter setting file 210 Setup Item List E Embedded Web Browser settings You can set the EWB Embedded Web Browser function to display a web page on the touch panel Tip The EWB submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access i
275. ent settings and performing role based access to the Windows Server Tips e You can clear the entered values by clicking Reset e You can delete the Directory Service by clicking Delete when you edit the Directory Service 6 Click OK The entered Service Directory is added to the Directory Service List 7 Select a radio button of the directory service that you want to set as default server e Filing Logout Device Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot New Default Server Directory Service Name Server IP Address fo pericca C Ci er man S C ee man S Go to top ofthis page Tip The default server will be used for an LDAP search from the control panel If you select this equipment as the default server no default server will be set Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 293 E Setting up notification 294 An administrator can configure notification to receive E mail mobile terminal can also be used notifications when an error occurred or a job is complete To enable the E mail notification the E mail settings in the Setup menu page must be configured correctly P 231 Setting up E mail settings Setting up the notifications of system errors and even
276. ep is not triggered regardless of the network settings LJ Setting up Date amp Time You can set the date time time Zone and date format Tip Date amp Time settings are not available if the SNTP function is enabled Date amp Time Month Date Time 2011 May 10 00 00 2 GMT 12 00 Wellington Auckland Dte Format YY MM DD v Year Month Date Time Select the year and month in designated boxes Also enter the date and time in designated boxes Time Zone Select the time zone where this equipment is located Date Format Select the date format Setup Item List LJ Setting up SNTP Service In SNTP Service you can specify the SNTP server to refresh the time settings of this equipment using SNTP service SNTP Service Enable SNTP Primary SNTP Address Secondary SNTP Address P ort Number NTP Authentication Item name Enable SNTP Disable v 24 i Hour s 123 Disable v Description Select whether to enable or disable SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol When this is enabled the time settings of this equipment can be adjusted using the SNTP service Tip Date amp Time settings are not available if enabled Primary SNTP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of the Primary SNTP Server Address when Enable SNTP is enabled Secondary SNTP Address Enter the IP address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name
277. er Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Fax Communication Counter Item name Description Save button Saves the entered department information Cancel button Cancels creating the department Reset Counters button Resets counters Delete button Deletes the displayed department Department Number Displays the registration number of the department Department Name Enter if changing the department name You can enter up to 20 characters Department Code Enter if changing the department code You can enter up to 63 characters Quota Setting e OFF No output restriction e ON Restricts output Quota Displays the remaining number for output The number entered in Default Quota decreases each time a page is printed and output is prohibited when it reaches 0 Default Quota Enter the default number assigned for the department Up to 99 999 999 can be entered Print Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E mail reception Internet Fax reception Scan Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record 130 User Management Tab Page Overview E Export Import Item list lt access policy mode gt You can export and import your device settings if you are logged in to the access policy mode LL P 131
278. er numene 2nd numeric code eheinumenc Up to 4 digit communication ore Resolution coce supplemental code Mode bps Mode PP EC ECM a 0 8x3 85 P Polling G3 G3 1 8x7 7 SB Mailbox ML E mail 2 8x15 4 SR R Relay mailbox 4 16x15 4 SF F Forward mailbox 8 300 dpi ML Internet Fax B 600 dpi I N W Fax D 150 dpi O Onramp Gateway Tip Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the reception journal list in the specified order 40 Logs Tab Page Overview Q Scan Log The Scan Log page displays the following information for each scan job log e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration View Logs Export Logs Scan Log a Print Log Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log Message Log TO Email i Agent i Pages Mode User Name Domain Name LDAP Sener 0115 001 pdf Peas fie 2011 01 f 5 16 11 39 33C 3d document in controller shared folder 0115 002 pdf Peas file 201101 5 16 04 51 33C d document in controller shared folder 0115 001 pdf Peas file 2011401 5 15 23 54 3d document in controller shared folder 0115 pdf Peas file 2011 01 5 14 14 05 2 d document in controller shared folder 0115 pdf Pas file 201140195 13 54 21 d document in controller shared folder 0114 001 pdf Peas file 2011019 4 19 04 03 2 d document in controller shared folder 0114 pdf Pas file 2
279. erver 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected PDF Multi or PDF Single in the File Format setting Encryption Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files User Password Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files Master Password Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings Encryption Level Select an encryption level e 40 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 3 0 PDF V1 1 e 128 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 5 0 PDF V1 4 e 128 bit AES Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 7 0 PDF V1 6 Authority Select the desired authority items on encrypted PDF files e Printing Select this to authorize users to print documents e Change of Documents Select this to authorize users to change documents e Content Copying or Extraction Select this to authorize users to copy and extract the contents of documents e Content Extraction for accessibility Select this to enable the accessibility feature Tips e Ifthe Forced Encryption setting is enabled you cannot clear the Encryption check box For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e The user password and the master password are not set at the factory shipment e Passwords m
280. erver16 Select the LDAP server you want to use for LDAP authentication Click one of the LDAP servers and specify the following items in the displayed screen to register the LDAP server Windows Server Select this when LDAP is running on a Windows server LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Select this when the LDAP is running ona server other than a Windows one Role Based Access Setting Configure role based access using an LDAP server Role Based Access using LDAP server Select whether enable or disable role based access Disable is set as the default LDAP Server Select the LDAP server that manages the Role Based Access Control Security Item List 251 Item name Description PIN Code Authentication Setting PIN Code Authentication Select the PIN code authentication method e Disable Select this no to use the PIN code authentication Use the user name and password for authentication e Enable Select this to use the PIN code authentication Instead of the PIN code it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication Minimum PIN Code Length Enter a figure that specifies the minimum digits for the PIN code LDAP Server1 LDAP Server3 Set the following items for LDAP Server when you use the LDAP authentication Windows Server Select this when LDAP is running on a Windows server LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Select this when the LDAP is running
281. es how to import and export Address Book You can follow the same procedure to import and export MailBoxes Template and Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes except where you specify the file format of the export data LJ P 296 Importing the address book data LL P 299 Exporting the address book data LJ Importing the address book data You can import address information exported from an address book on another equipment or a different address book program in the CSV or XML format The importing method of address book data is either adding imported data to the address book already registered in this equipment or deleting all the address book data already registered and replacing them with the imported data It is recommended that you export an address book in the CSV or XML format and edit it when creating address book data You cannot import an address book when it exceeds the number of characters specified on each item Invalid characters are replaced with Last Name 64 characters First Name 64 characters Email Address 192 alphanumerical characters Phone Number 128 numbers Tel Number 2 128 numbers Company 128 characters Department 128 characters Tip The group data are not included in the imported address book data Importing address book data in the CSV XML format Before importing the address book data confirm that there is no waiting print job scan job or fax
282. es of destination facsimile and click Save e Filing Login Job Status Registration Address Book Fax Setting Address Book gt Contact Property gt ae pa Line Select Quality Transmit Transmission Type You can configure the following settings in this page P 78 Fax Setting screen Registration How to Set and How to Operate 95 5 Registration Tab Page 6 In the Contact Property page click Save to add a new contact e Filing Login Registration Counter Address Book Contact Property Address Book Satins Either Either i Fax Number 0550007237 e Department Dept01 nes 96 Registration How to Set and How to Operate Adding new contacts from the LDAP server You can search for contacts in the LDAP server and add them to the Address Book In order to use the LDAP search the directory service must be set up by a user who is granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode Before operating the LDAP search ask your administrator if the Directory Service has been configured Add a new contact from the LDAP server 1 Click the Registration tab and the Address Book menu The Address Book page is displayed 2 Click Search Login Device Job Status Counter emplate Address Book Inbound FAX routine Address Book Contacts Groups Add Address Group All Groups gt
283. ese a a A A aA 36 Chapter 4 Logs Tab Page Logs Lab Page OVET VIEW oe aaa a aa a E aa 38 MIEw LOS HENIS Grusin a a S 38 Export Logs Item list lt access policy mode gt ccc ccccccc secs sees seca esse eeseeeeeeseesaeeseeeseeeaeenes 44 Log Settings Item list lt access policy MOdE gt ccc ceecceececeeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeens 45 Logs How to Set and How to Operate cccecececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeseeneceseecenseenesenesenseneaags 47 DISPIAVING OD OOS arei a a a E e a Ea 47 EXPONO TOOS eeepc stent rei eevee ert mc i ieee rome a ee aa kee Perce es rc eee Ove Pea eee 48 Chapter 5 Registration Tab Page Registration Tab Page Overview ccccccceceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeseeeeeaeeeneseaeseaeseeneaenenens 50 empia nentis i hidalrecis es estn cade Rasiv a cone ls Maeda T aiakuue ian A 50 Address Book ltem NSE wrcsaiscrtiactestitietireieasicdaius chy gaitasndeabinaiteedtanatatucesaludeieetapiyenciasidaews 76 NDOUNG FAX TOUTING MEn iS osae aaa a A A aA 81 Registration How to Set and How to Operate cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeneeeneeeneseneseaes 86 Managing TCM DIAS S six actus ict A csisult aden tical iiuieuiaet tinue E A 86 CONTENTS 3 Managing Address DOOK eiior a a a A AE 94 Managing MAN DOK CS danei a E TEENE E EAEE 100 Chapter 6 Counter Tab Page Counter Tab Page Overview ssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
284. etup Item List Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period LL P 206 Setting up Raw TCP Print LL P 208 Setting up FTP Print LL P 206 Setting up LPD Print LL P 208 Setting up NetWare Print LL P 207 Setting up IPP Print LL P 209 Setting up Email Print LI Setting up Raw TCP Print In Raw TCP Print you can enable or disable the Raw TCP print service Raw TCP Print Enable Raw TCP Enable v Port Number 9100 Enable Raw bi directional Disable v Item name Description Enable Raw TCP Enable or disable Raw TCP print service Enable is set as the default Port Number When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number Enable Raw bi directional If enabling the Raw TCP enter the Raw TCP port number for the Raw TCP print You can enter a value in the range from 1024 to 32767 Generally the default value 9100 is used Enable or disable Raw bi directional communication Disable is set as the default Q
285. etwork Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer e Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version Print Service Setting Raw TCP Print Enable Raw TCP Enable Port Number 9100 Enable Raw bi directional Disable LPD Print Enable LPD Enable Port Number 515 Banners OFF You can set the following in this page LU P 206 Setting up Raw TCP Print LL P 206 Setting up LPD Print LL P 207 Setting up IPP Print LL P 208 Setting up FTP Print LL P 208 Setting up NetWare Print LL P 209 Setting up Email Print Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 239 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer rs When this configuration is changed the network connection will be ey disconnected Would you like to continue The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applie
286. evel HMAC MD5 Administrator Enah y URE Trap Disable v SNMP V3 Trap User Name SNMP V3 Trap Authentication Protocol HMAC MD5 SNMP 3 Trap Authentication Password SNMP 3 Trap Privacy Protocol None T G The confirmation dialog box appears 3 Click OK Windows Internet Explorer Ea Q Are you sure OK Cancel The SNMP V3 user information is deleted Click OK to close the SNMP Network Service page The confirmation dialog box appears B Click OK The specified or modified content is registered Click Save on the Network submenu page The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 223 7 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer m l When this configuration is changed the network connection will be disconnected Would you like to continue OK Cancel This equipment starts initializing the network interface card to apply the changes During the initialization of the network interface card the network will not be available TopAccess will display Please restart after waiting a few minutes The touch
287. evice status Name Displays the name of this equipment Location Displays the equipment s location Copier Model Displays the model name of this equipment Serial Number Displays the serial number of this equipment MAC Address Displays the MAC address of this equipment Main Memory Size Displays the main memory size Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size Save as File amp e Filing Space Available Displays the total available space in the local folder and e Filing on your equipment Fax Space Available Displays the available space for sending and receive fax data Contact Information Displays the contact name of the person responsible for managing this device Phone Number Displays the phone number of the person responsible for managing this device e Message Displays administrative messages e Alerts Displays alert messages Options The following information is displayed e Finisher Displays whether the Finisher is installed e Fax Displays whether the Fax Unit is installed e Optional Function kit Displays whether the optional function kit is installed The following information is displayed e Tray Displays a list of the installed trays e Size Displays the paper size set for each tray e Thickness Displays the thickness of the paper set in each tray e Attribute Displays the purpose of the paper set in each tray e Capacity Displays the max
288. ey for IPsec communications e Session Key Settings Sets an interval for regenerating the session key The interval can be set in time or the amount of data Select the desired check box and then key in the value in the entry box Generate a new key after Seconds Specify the interval between key generations in seconds Specify within the range from 180 to 86 400 seconds 24 hours Generate a new key after KBytes Specify the data volume between key generations in Kbytes Specify within the range from 20 480 to 214 783 647 Kbytes IPCOMP Transform Select if using the IPCOMP transform IP Filter You can display a list of filter settings registered in this equipment Select the check box for the filter to be applied to the profile If more than one filter is registered you can change their order in the list Click Move for the desired filter and then click Move Up or Move Down to move the filter Setup Item List 181 Add Policy Modify Policy screen You can display this screen by clicking the Add button for Policy or a registered policy name You can create a policy to use in IPsec by combining the registered profiles Add Policy OKI Cancel Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Policy Name Profile Name D TESTO1 Modify Policy OKI Cancel Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save th
289. f groups where contacts are assigned e Address Book can be also managed using the control panel Refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Contacts Address Book Contacts roues Se Add Address Search 3 Group All Groups v 1 2 Fax Number 10 Fir ame10 LastName10 9 FirstName09 LastName0g ras e07 LastName0 Add Address button Allows you to add a new contact in the address book P 77 Contact Property screen Search button Allows you to search a contact from the address book P 79 Search Contact screen Group Select a group to display in the address list e All Groups Displays all the groups e Registered Groups Displays the registered groups only ID Displays the registered ID of the contact P 77 Contact Property screen Name Displays the name registered to the contact P 77 Contact Property screen Email Address Displays the E mail address registered to the contact P 77 Contact Property screen Fax Number Displays the fax number registered to the contact P 77 Contact Property screen 76 Registration Tab Page Overview Group Address Book Contacts Groups New button Allows you to add a new group P 80 Group Properties screen ID Displays the registered ID of the group P 80 Group Properties screen Group Name Displays
290. field definitions B BB BE Tip The Extended Field Definition submenu can be accessed from the Registration menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Registration menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode The Meta Scan Enabler is required to P 318 Extended Fields screen P 318 Setting up Definition Informatio LL P 302 Registration Administration tab Item List use the Meta Scan function For the details contact your distributor n P 318 Setting up Extended Field settings P 319 Extended Fields Properties screen P 320 Definition Properties screen Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition Displays the extended field definition number Cli LJ Cli MA Displays the extended field definition name ck a registered name to check and edit the existing extended field definition P 318 Extended Fields screen ck Undefined to register a new extended field definition P 320 Definition Properties screen Registration Administration tab Item List 317 LJ Extended Fields screen You can set the information entered from the control panel when using meta scan P 348 Registering Extended Field Definition LJ Setting
291. folder in the FTP server enter 192 168 1 1 in this box When you select NetWare IPX SPX as the protocol enter the NetWare file server name or Tree Context name when NDS is available When you select NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the IP address of the NetWare file server You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols Port Number Command Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select FTP as the protocol Generally is entered for the control port When is entered the default port number that is set for FTP Client by an administrator will be used If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client ask your administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and hyphens Hyphen is set as the default Network Path When you select SMB as the protocol enter the network path to the network folder For example to specify the users scanned folder in the computer named Client01 enter Client01 users scanned When you select FTP as the protocol enter the directory in the specified FTP server For example to specify the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter user scanned When you select NetWare IPX SPX or NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the folder path in the NetWare file server For example to specify
292. following signage Tip Describes handy information that is useful to know when operating the equipment U Pages describing items related to what you are currently doing See these pages as required LJ Screens e The details on the touch panel menus may differ depending on how the equipment is used such as the status of the installed options e The illustration screens used in this manual are for paper in the A B format If you use paper in the LT format the display or the order of buttons in the illustrations may differ from that of your equipment Q About the defaults shown in this manual e The defaults shown in this manual are the values in the standard operating environment The values may have been changed from these defaults e The default for the list item is shown underlined Q Trademarks e The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System e The official name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System e The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System e The official name of Windows 8 is Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System e The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System e The official name of Windows Server 2008 is Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System e The official name of Windows Server 2012 is Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operating System e Microsoft Windows and the brand names and product names of
293. functions Setup Item List 211 Q Setting up Server Registration Setting You can register the address of the server used for the EWB function Server Registration Setting Add Delete f a Server Address 192 168 1 1 Item name Description Add button Registers the server address entered in the entry column into the list Entry column Enter the server address Delete button Deletes the selected server address from the list Server Address list Lists the registered server addresses LJ Setting up URL List for Menu Screen and Hard Button You can register URLs to be displayed in the menu screen on the control panel and the hard buttons that start the EWB function 2 Ul li List for Menu Screen and Hard Button Add button Registers a URL to be displayed on the control panel and a hard button that starts the EWB function P 212 Add New URL screen Delete button Deletes the URL and the hard button for the EWB function that you have selected from the URL list the menu screen and the hard button assignment URL list Lists URLs which are displayed on the control panel and the names of the hard buttons that start the EWB function LJ Add New URL screen Add New URL Save Cancel URL Name URL Assignment for Hard Button Item name Description Save button Registers the entered URL name and URL Cancel bu
294. gement Function Status Log Management Read Job Management Item name Description Save button Saves the edited role information Cancel button Cancels editing the role Role Name Enter if changing the role name You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than backquote semicolon lt gt apostrophe and comma MFP Function Allows you to select the MFP function to be assigned to the group Select from the following functions See the following for details P 125 Create New Role screen Device Management Displays device management privileges assigned to default roles Default roles only P 123 Default roles and privileges Function list Displays functions assigned to the role See the following for details P 125 Create New Role screen User Management Tab Page Overview 127 E Department Management Item list lt access policy mode gt You can manage departments if you are logged in to the access policy mode LL P 129 Department Information screen LL P 130 Department Information Edit screen e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration Department Management m F partment Management 1 New Reset All Counters Set Registered All Quotas Delete All Number Depar
295. gistering XAML format Te saser nai a E R A ai 347 Registering Extended Field Definition nnnnnn00nnnnnneneennnnneretnrtrtteerrttttterrnnttterrnntttttennnttteertnttttntennnn dec taasaneins 348 Registering templates for Meta Scan cccccceccececseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeesseseeeessaeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeesaaeees 351 MEt SCAN aan ce cee ee ee 354 CMECKINGHOGS OF Metr SCAN caches vce es ceed sacar pecs pocers E AE O dee cae nee nee 354 Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP 355 Exporting the role information Setting file cccceecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeceeeeseaeeeeeesseeeeeesaaeeeessaaeees 355 Defining the role information Setting file cccceescccccseeececeesscecceeesccecseusececsaeuceeessasececseuseeessussceeeeeseeeeessaaeees 355 Importing the role information Setting file ce ccccceeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeseaeueeessseeeeeeaaneeessaaaeees 356 Enabling the role base ACCESS SCUING sta sacieweiancesa kets ce cases urbecatdentnndenaciinessasssa ta vadlcnrareta deides daa aedanta aed cedneet tate dawes 356 Setting up Meta Scan Function The Meta Scan is a function to attach information meta data generated within the device to scanned images The attached meta data can be processed by workflow servers or other means to supplement the scanned image To use Meta Scan select E MAIL
296. gorithm Select SHA1 or MD5 as the signature algorithm Poll Interval Specify the polling interval 1 Minute is set as the default Maximum Poll Duration Specify the polling duration 8 Hours is set as the default Request button Click this button to request the certificate Delete button Deletes the registered certificate 256 Security Item List Create self signed certificate screen Create self signed certificate a_i Save Cancel _ C ountn Region Name State or Province Name OC ality Name OF anization Name Organizational Unit Name Common Name MFPO 7088510 Email Address SOMNOORWN Validity Period 36 month s 1 99 Save button Saves the self signed certificate Cancel button Cancels creating the certificate Country Region Name Enter the country or region name using two alphanumerical characters and symbols Example JP State or Province Name Enter the state or province name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 128 characters Locality Name Enter the city or town name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 128 characters Organization Name Enter the organization name with alphanumerical characters and symbols You can enter up to 64 characters Organizational Unit Name Enter the organizational unit name with alphanumerical characters an
297. gration 1 Session Timeout 60 99999 O temnem Certo 1 Session Timeout 60 99999 Specify the duration to maintain the connection Setup Item List 213 E Version Displays version information of your equipment Tip The Version submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List Version Information Printer Manufacture Copier Firmware Version Copier iain ROM Version 130M 014 L0 pier Scanner ROM Version 1308 01 Item name Description Printer Manufacture Displays the manufacturer name of your equipment Copier Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of your equipment Copier Main ROM Version Displays the main ROM version information of your equipment Copier Scanner ROM Version Displays the copier scanner ROM version information of your equipment 214 Setup Item List Setup How to Set and How to Operate This section describes how to set up the equipment using TopAccess LL P 215 Setting up General settings LJ P 217 Setting up Network settings LL P 219 SNMP V3 settings LL P 225 Setting up Copier settings LL P 227 Setting up Fax settings LL P 229 Setting up Save as file settings LJ P 231 Setting up E mail settings LL P 233 Setting u
298. gs Tunnel mode Select whether or not to use tunnel mode for IPSec communications e Yes Select this to use the tunnel mode e No Select this not to use the tunnel mode The transport mode will be used instead IPv4 IPv6 Address Enter the IP address for the gateway which encrypts and decrypts data in tunnel mode Key Selection Key Displays the IKE key settings registered in the equipment IKE keys already registered in this equipment are displayed Proposals ESP Transforms Specify the transform for ESP e Integrity Selects the authentication algorithm to be used in ESP SHA1 Select this to use SHA MD5 Select this to use MD5 AES XCBC Select this to use AES XCBC e Encryption Selects the encryption algorithm to be used in ESP AES 256 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 256 bits AES 192 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 192 bits AES 128 CBC Select this to use AES CBC 128 bits AES CTR Select this to use AES CTR 3DES CBC Select this to use 3DES CBC DES CBC Select this to use DES CBC None Select this not to perform data encryption AH Transforms Specify the transform for AH e Integrity Selects the authentication algorithm to be used in AH SHA1 Select this to use SHA MD5 Select this to use MD5 AES XCBC Select this to use AES XCBC Session Key Settings Specify the session k
299. he Fax Unit is installed Setting the fax settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Fax submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Set N anera Kawari Copier Fax Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter ODCA 2 The Fax submenu page is displayed 4 In the Fax submenu page set the fax settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Fax Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter ODCA Version Fax Setting Terminal ID mfp 04998820 Fax Number 10000000001 Line Number Ringer Volume Monitor Yolume Completion Tone Yolume Reception Mode Remote RX Dial Type Dial TypefLine 2 Line 2 Mode START 00 END 00 Resolution Standard v Original Mode Text v You can set the following in this page P 186 Setting up Fax Setting 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will
300. he authentication When IPP printing is used for printing from a Macintosh computer do not enable the authentication The Mac OS does not support the authentication for IPP printing Setup Item List 207 208 Item name User Name Description Enter the user name when the Authentication option is enabled Users must enter this user name to create an IPP queue on the client computers You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Password LJ Setting up FTP Print Enter the password when the Authentication option is enabled Users must enter this password to create an IPP queue on the client computers You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash password is set as the default In FTP Print you can set the FTP Print options to enable the FTP print service FTP Print Enable FTP Printing 2 Print User Name Print Password Enable v Item name Description Enable FTP Printing Enable or disable FTP print service Enable is set as the default Print User Name Enter the user name if you want to request the log in user name from someone who attempts FTP printing You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash If you leave this box blank the default user name Print is used
301. he department User Management Tab Page Overview LJ Department Information screen You can register a new department 1 q 1 partment Information 2 mm l Cancel Required 3 en Department Name 4 Department Code Quota Setting Quota Default Quota Item name Description Save button Saves the entered department information Cancel button Cancels creating the department Department Name Enter the department name You can enter up to 20 characters Department Code Enter the department code You can enter up to 63 characters Quota Setting e OFF No output restriction e ON Restricts output Quota Displays the remaining number for output The number entered in Default Black Quota decreases each time a page is printed and output is prohibited when it reaches 0 You can manually change the remaining number of outputs to a desired value Default Quota Enter the default number assigned for the department Up to 99 999 999 can be entered User Management Tab Page Overview 129 LJ Department Information Edit screen You can confirm and edit department information Department Information i o A l l ToO oll Save ra Reset Counters Delete Required Department Number 1 Department Name DepartmentNameQ1 Department Code LLLI Quota Setting ON v Quota 99999999 Default Quota 99999999 Print Count
302. hen transmitting via fax internet fax or E mail Disable Select this not to restrict the destination of the From Address when transmitting via fax internet fax or E mail LDAP Server1 This field is displayed when the Restriction Setting for Destination is enabled LDAP Server2 Three LDAP servers to search the destination are displayed To register the LDAP server LDAP Server3 click an item name P 255 Restriction Setting for Destination screen 254 Security Item List Restriction Setting for Destination screen You can register an LDAP server to be used to search the destination Restriction Setting for Destination Restriction Setting for Destination LOAP Server Disable LOAP Server Disable LOAP Servers Disable Item name Description OK button Select this to register the LDAP server which has been set Cancel button Select this to cancel the registration of the LDAP server Restriction Setting for Destination Select this to set an LDAP server to be used to search the destination You can register up to three LDAP servers Q Setting up Single Sign On Setting Normally users are required to enter the user name and password for E mail authentication and Scan to Email however you can enable the single sign on setting to eliminate these operations Single Sign On Setting 1 _ Single Sign On for Scan to Email Enable v PT temname Cerin O 1
303. his equipment via SNMP over a network 4 Click OK The specified or modified content is registered 5 Click OK to close the SNMP Network Service page The confirmation dialog box appears Click OK The specified or modified content is registered Setup How to Set and How to Operate 219 7 Click Save on the Network submenu page The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 8 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer m l When this configuration is changed the network connection will be V disconnected Would you like to continue OK Cancel This equipment starts initializing the network interface card to apply the changes During the initialization of the network interface card the network will not be available TopAccess will display Please restart after waiting a few minutes The touch panel will display NETWORK INITIALIZING When this message disappears TopAccess will once again be available 220 Setup How to Set and How to Operate LJ Exporting SNMP V3 user information 1 Click the SNMP Network Service button from the Network submenu under the Setup
304. his equipment without a digital signature the communication is allowed without the digital signature e Digital signature is always done for the communication on the server side Select this to allow the communication only when a client accesses this equipment with a digital signature When a client accesses this equipment without a digital signature the communication is not allowed e Digital signature isn t done for the communication for the server Select this to allow the communication only when a client accesses this equipment without a digital signature When a client is set to always access an SMB server with a digital signature the communication is not allowed If you do not know whether the SMB Signing of SMB Client is enabled or disabled in the client computers it is recommended to select If client agrees digital signature is done for the communication If this is set incorrectly the SMB communication may become unavailable Setup Item List 155 Item name Description SMB Signing of SMB Client Select whether SMB Signing is enabled or disabled when this equipment accesses the clients using SMB such as when this equipment stores the scanned data in the network folder using SMB e If server agrees digital signature is done for the communication Select this to use the digital signature to secure the communication to an SMB server only when the SMB Signing of SMB Server that this equipment accesses is enabl
305. his item cannot be changed Destination Address Specify the destination address for the communication to which the filter is applied e Specific IP Address Seta specific IP address Enter the IP address in the address input box Subnet Prefix Set the destination with its IP address and subnet mask Enter the IP address and the prefix of the subnet mask directly in the address input box FQDN Sets FQDN for the destination Enter FQDN in the address input box You can enter up to 255 alphanumerical characters including hyphen and period However neither hyphen nor period can be used as first or last character e Any IP Address Set any IP address Protocol Type Select a protocol for the filter Any Set any protocol TCP Select this to use TCP only UDP Select this to use UDP only ICMP Select this to use ICMP only 174 Setup Item List Item name Description Source Port Specify the source port number This setting is available only if you selected TCP or UDP in the protocol type setting e Any Set any source port e Port Number Set the port number of the sender Enter the port number in the port number input box Destination Port Set the destination port number This setting is available only if you selected TCP or UDP in the protocol type setting e Any Set any destination port e Port Number Set the port number of the destination Enter the port nu
306. ication method e MFP Local Authentication Use MFP local authentication on your equipment e Windows Domain Authentication Use network authentication managed by the Windows domain e LDAP Authentication Use network authentication managed by LDAP Password Enter the password You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols _ gt PIN Code Enter the PIN code for the user authentication e The PIN code is up to 32 figures 0 9 long The minimum length is specified on User Authentication Setting P 249 Setting up User Authentication Setting e If you change any settings the changes will be reflected from the next time you log in Role Assignment This can be configured when MFP Local Authentication is selected in Authentication Method Select from the registered roles Click the Edit button and select roles from the displayed screen P 120 Role Assignment screen Group Assignment This can be configured when MFP Local Authentication is selected in Authentication Method Select from the registered groups Click the Edit button and select groups from the displayed screen P 120 Group Assignment screen Department Number Select from the registered departments P 128 Department Management Item list lt access policy mode gt PanelUl Language Select the display language for the touch panel PanelUl
307. ice certificate has been imported you cannot delete it B Click OK Windows Internet Explorer ex5 The device certificate is deleted 6 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Security How to Set and How to Operate 267 LI Installing a device certificate automatically 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Managemem Password Policy R2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Enter the following items in SCEP Automatic of Device Certificate and then click Request Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed Import Not Installed Browse Upload Delete No alleg SCEP Automatic CA Server Address Primary 10 10 70 111 CA Server Address Secondary 10 10 70 121 MFP s Address in Common Name inthe Certificate IP Address v Timeout 30 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHA MDS5 Poll Interval 1 Minute v Maximum Poll Duration 8 Hours X CA Server Address Primary Enter the IP address or FQDN of the CA server You can enter up t
308. ick Select Agent Template Properties Template Groups Private Templates l Select Agent _ Copy Email _ Fax InternetF ax 3 Save as file _ Sean C Store to e Filing Vi Meta Scan Save to USB Media To select Meta Scan the Meta Scan Enabler must be set up for use If it is not set up you cannot select Meta Scan For Meta Scan Email Save as file and Save to USB Media are to be selected individually except for Email and Save as file which can be selected simultaneously You can transmit the document as an Email attachment Tips When Meta Scan is selected you can use a variable as the subject Addresses specified in From Address are included in the meta data When Meta Scan is selected if you select Add the date and time to a file name in File Name it is also applied to the meta data file name P 66 Email Setting Private template Save as file You can save the document in a shared folder When Meta Scan is selected you can only specify one destination Protocols and network paths specified in the destination are included in the meta data Example Protocol SMB Network Path 192 168 1 1 lmageFolder lt file_path gt file 192 168 1 1 ImageFolder lt file_path gt When Meta Scan is selected if you select Add the date and time to a file name in File Name it is also applied to the meta data file name P 68 Save as file Setti
309. ide Security Parameter Index Specify a security parameter index SPI for identification You can enter a value in the range from 256 to 4095 ESP Encryption Key Enter an ESP Encapsulating Security Payload encryption key ESP Authentication Key Enter an ESP Encapsulating Security Payload authentication key AH Authentication Key Enter an AH Authentication Header authentication key bound Key Select a key for the destination Security Parameter Index Specify a security parameter index SPI for identification You can enter a value in the range from 256 to 4095 ESP Encryption Key Enter an ESP Encapsulating Security Payload encryption key ESP Authentication Key Enter an ESP Encapsulating Security Payload authentication key AH Authentication Key Enter an AH Authentication Header authentication key Setup Item List 177 Add IKE Modify IKE screen You can display this screen by clicking the Add button for IKE Key or a registered key name You can set an IKE key to use in IPsec Acid IKE IKE Key Name IKE Type IKE Version KEv1 Main Mode Authentication Method Certificate Preshared Key IKEv2 Authentication Method Certificate Preshared Key LocalID Remote ID Session Key Settings 7 FilterIKE Transforms SHAA Emos E AES KCBC MAC Generate a new key after 28800 Seconds ok Cancel Reset Selecting Save
310. il and Scan to e Filing agent Scan Setting Sa ey jey Single 2 Sided Scan tation m gt la LA A e gt a Y gt A Black v 200dpi Middle Text j ckground 11 mn Contrast 1 2 Sharpness Saturation a D a ama l c m OY SS 14 ncs Adjustment _ ca O T T 4 1 5 _ Orit Blank Page 1 6 L Ltside Erase m w Item name Description Preview Select whether to display the scanned image on the control panel after the scanning an original e OFF Select this not to display the scanned image e ON Select this to display the scanned image Single 2 Sided Scan Select whether to scan one side or both sides of an original Available only when the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is installed e Single Select this to scan one side of an original e Duplex Book Select this to scan both sides of originals when the pages are printed vertically in the same direction and bound along the vertical side of the paper Duplex Tablet Select this to scan both sides of originals with a vertical reversal to be bound along the horizontal side of the paper Rotation Select how the scanned images will be rotated Color Mode Select the color mode for scanning e Black Select this to scan in the black mode e Gray Select this to scan in the gray scale mode e Full Color Select this to scan in the full color m
311. ilege to execute the command Microsoft Windows Version 6 0 6000 Copyright lt c gt 2666 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users user 61 gt netsh http add sslcert ipport 6 6 6 6 5358 certhash becccad 23 Oc6 7bf daPef 5c2Hec414166690653a appid lt 66112233 4455 6677 8899 AABBCCDDEEFF gt SSL Certificate successfully added C Users user 661 gt _ Using the thumbprint obtained in Step 9 type the following command netsh http add sslcert ipport 0 0 0 0 5358 certhash your 40 digit thumbprint appid 00112233 4455 6677 8899 AABBCCDDEEFF When inputting the thumbprint exclude the spaces When your client certificate is created with Certificate Revocation List CRL you need to check if the CA server is accessible by FQDN see the following figure F Certificate General Details Certification Path Show lt All gt Field Value ea Authority Key Identifier KeyID 1la ic 85 84cSe9 ee 0 AICRL Distribution Points 1 CRL Distribution Point Distr FE Authority Information Access 1 Authority Info Access Acc Enhanced Key Usage Server Authentication 1 3 6 i Application Policies 1 Application Certificate Polic Thumbprint algorithm shal Thumbprint be cc ca d9 23 0c 67 bf da 9e 1 CRL Distribution Point Distribution Point Name Full Name URL ldap CN 2k3ca CN cheeta CN CDP CN Public 20Key 20Services CN Servi
312. image only when the memory transmission is not successful Setup Item List 187 188 Item name Multi Transmission Report Description Select how to print a result report after a multi address transmission e OFF Select this to not print a multi address transmission report e Always Select this to print a multi address transmission report with all page images for each multi address transmission completed ON ERROR Select this to print a multi address transmission report with all page images only when the multi address transmission is not successfully completed Always Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a multi address transmission report with the 1st page image for each multi address transmission completed ON ERROR Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a multi address transmission report with the 1st page image only when the multi address transmission is not successful Polling Report Select how to print a result report after a multi polling reception e OFF Select this to not print a multi polling report e Always Select this to print a multi polling report for each multi polling reception e ON ERROR Select this to print a multi polling report only when the multi polling reception is not successful Relay Originator Select how to print a result report after a relay transmission e OFF Select this to not print a relay station report e Always Select this to print a
313. images as JPEG files Tips e Ifthe Forced Encryption setting is enabled only the PDF Multi and the PDF Single are selectable for a file format For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e Files saved in an XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed 2 Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected PDF Multi or PDF Single in the File Format setting Encryption Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files User Password Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files Master Password Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings Encryption Level Select an encryption level e 40 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 3 0 PDF V1 1 e 128 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 5 0 PDF V1 4 e 128 bit AES Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 7 0 PDF V1 6 Authority Select the desired authority items on encrypted PDF files e Printing Select this to authorize users to print documents e Change of Documents Select this to authorize users to change documents e Content Copying or Extraction Select this to authorize users to copy and extract the conte
314. imum paper capacity that can be set for each tray e Status Displays the remaining amount of paper for each tray The paper size for each tray cannot be set from TopAccess Set it from the touch panel of the equipment For instructions on how to set the paper size for each tray refer to the User s Manual Basic Guide Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge in the equipment 26 Device Item List Displayed Icons When the equipment requires maintenance or when an error occurs with the equipment icons indicating the status information appear near the graphic image of the equipment on the TopAccess Device tab The following are the icons displayed and their descriptions Printer Error 1 This icon indicates that a non recommended toner cartridge is being used and that the equipment has stopped printing For information on resolving the error refer to Replacing a Toner Cartridge in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Printer Error 2 This icon indicates one of the following e You need to remove paper from the receiving tray e You need to remove paper from the Finisher tray e You need to remove the staples jammed in the Finisher For information on resolving the error refer to Staple Jam in the Finisher in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide A non recommended toner cartridge is being used For information on resolving the error refer to Replacing a Toner Cartridge in the U
315. in Authentication w W Create User Information Automatically Windows Domain Authentication Use NT Domain Server Domain Name PDC BDC C C Domain 2 Domain 3 Domain 4 Domain 5 Domain 6 Domain 9 Domain 14 Domain 13 Connection Timeout PDC 1 180 30 Seconds Rebootis necessary to reflect Connection Timeout Role Based Access Setting Role Based Access using LDAP server Disable v LDAP Server LDAPO1 PIN Code Authentication Setting PIN Code Authentication Minimum PIN Code Length LDAP Server Attribute type of User Name f Attribute type of PIN a a a C A A Item name Description Create User Information Select whether or not to register user information automatically to this equipment Enable Automatically is set as the default Use NT Domain Server Select this check box if you are managing the domain using the NT domain controller Domain 1 Domain 16 Specify the domain you want to use for Windows domain authentication Click one of the domains and specify the following items in the displayed screen to register the domain Domain Name Enter the domain name PDC Enter the server name or IP address of the Primary Domain Controller PDC You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols BDC Enter the server name or IP address of the Backup Domain Controller BDC as required You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols If the wro
316. information File Name Select the template file to be imported Browse button Allows you to select the template file Import button Imports the selected template file LJ Setting up Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes 1 ee File Name Import Item name Description 1 File Name Select the combined template address book mailboxes file to be imported Browse button Allows you to select the combined file Import button Imports the selected combined file 2 8 Maintenance Item List E Export setti ngs You can export the address book mailboxes templates and so on Tip The Export submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the fol LO P 279 Sett LI P 279 Sett I P 280 Sett 1 P 280 Sett LI Setting lowing pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List ing up Address Book ing up MailBoxes ing up Template ing up Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes up Address Book File Name Address Book File Name ADDR 110118 csy File Size 1575 Date Created TUE JAN 18 18 43 14 2011 Export Data Format cs XML Displays the file name of the created export files Click a fi
317. ing Job Status Registration Counter N The Login page is displayed Enter the user name and password and click Login Login with your TopAccess User Name and Password User Name Password 82 e Enter the user name and password that comply with TopAccess access policies e The Setup page is displayed e Failing to enter the correct password for a number of times at login will be considered unauthorized access and you may not be able to log in for a certain period of time If you are displayed a User account is locked or The User Name and Password are not recognized message and cannot log in contact your administrator e The password input is displayed in the blank symbols e After login you will be automatically logged out when the time specified in the Session Timer elapses Tips e Enter admin in User Name and 123456 in Password to log in for the first time e Lockout setting for user accounts can be set with Administration Security Password Policy P 260 Password Policy settings e The Session Timer can be set with Administration Setup General WEB General Setting 22 Access Policy Mode 1 Overview 4 Click the menu and submenu to display the desired page e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration Save Cancel N2 f T a General Setting Device Information 0 Name am as Copier Model Emil oon E
318. ing Aging Setup Item List DDNS Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable DDNS Enable v Domain Name ecurit Method None Primary Login Name es SECONdary Login Name Secondary Password 1 2 3 4 5 Primary Password 6 T 8 TSIGISIG Q Key file Not Installed Upload Delete TSIG SIG 0 Private Key file Not Installed Upload Delete Enable DDNS Select whether the dynamic DNS service is enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default Domain Name Enter the domain name that will be added to the DNS server using DDNS You can enter up to 96 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Tip When the Obtain a Domain Name automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the domain name can be obtained using the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP Security Method Enter the security method e None Select this to perform a non secure DDNS update GSS TSIG Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using GSS TSIG You must set a log in name and a password If both are not set the secure DDNS session will not be available TSIG Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using TSIG To select this you must upload a key file and a private key file If any of them is not uploaded the security setting will be disabled SIG 0 Select this to perform a secure DDNS session using SIG
319. ing Transmission Enable v lemname Description From Address Enter the E mail address of this equipment The From Address must be entered to enable Internet Fax transmission However the E mail address of the user who is logged in to this equipment will be automatically set if any user management settings apart from MFP local authentication are enabled For more information about User Management Setting see the following section P 135 Administration Tab Page From Name Enter the name of this equipment Message Header Inbound FAX Select TTI to be used as a subject when the received Internet Fax is forwarded Routing Number of Retry Enter the number of times to try sending the Internet Faxes when it fails 3 is set as the default Retry interval Enter the interval to try sending the Internet Faxes when it fails 1minutes is set as the default When the Number of Retry and Retry interval options are changed the Number of Retry and Retry interval options in the E mail settings are also changed P 198 Email settings Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation Default Body Strings Enter the body text that will be automatically entered in the Body box when users operate Scan to Internet Fax from the touch panel This sets only the default body text so that it can be changed on each operation by users Body String Transmission Selec
320. int OFF v Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty ON You can set the following in this page LL P 183 Setting up Default setting LL P 185 Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 225 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer x Q Are you sure OK Cancel The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 226 Setup How to Set and How to Operate W Setting up Fax settings You can configure the fax device and fax operation settings from the Fax submenu under the Setup menu e Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period e The Fax submenu in the Setup menu is available only when t
321. intenance feature is used to create backup files before updating the system software or hard disk replacement etc P 279 Export settings Restoring data from backup files An administrator can restore the address book mailboxes and templates data from the backup files This maintenance feature is used to restore the data after updating the system software or hard disk replacement etc P 277 Import settings Deleting files stored in the hard disk An administrator can delete scanned data transmission data and reception data in the hard disk This maintenance feature must be operated periodically to maintain hard disk space for future operation P 291 Deleting the data from local folder Registering directory service An administrator can register the directory service properties of the LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol server P 292 Managing directory service Setting up notification An administrator can enable the E mail notification function The administrator can also specify which events to be notified of P 294 Setting up notification Importing or exporting address book data An administrator can import address book data in a CSV file or XML file created by different applications An administrator can also export address book data in a CSV file or XML file for other applications P 296 Importing and exporting Rebooting the equipment An administrator can reboot the equipment P 301 Reb
322. ion HTTP Network Service SMTP Client SMTP Server POP3 Network Service SNTP Service FTP Client FTP Server SNMP Network Service and Security Service a a 1 am amn a a 1 a a am 1 1h ENI agn ENI 1 Tip The Network submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List P 143 Setting up TCP IP P 145 Setting up Filtering P 147 Setting up IP v6 P 148 Setting up IPX SPX P 149 Setting up AppleTalk P 149 Setting up Bonjour P 150 Setting up LDAP Session P 151 Setting up DNS Session P 152 Setting up DDNS Session P 154 Setting up SMB Session P 156 Setting up NetWare Session P 157 Setting up HTTP Network Service LI Setting up TCP IP You can set the TCP IP protocol to enable communication over TCP IP The TCP IP must be configured to enable TopAccess SMB printing Raw TCP or LPR printing IPP printing Scan to Email and Internet Fax ea a Jam 1 a a a 1 am amm BA a amn mea ma ea ENI ag ENI P 158 Se
323. ion Name User Name t Templete001 UserName001 IDcard Copy Mixed MxedOrg Biack amp Red O amp Red n S Text enoo D Text aee sPDF J a sPDF Templates T 12 Bk 400 PDF ACS 300 5 i s JacsTaPSS o T amp P S S ACS T amp P D S ts fe a amp Copy s DualPAGE to B JacsTaPSD o T amp P S D JASS TP S S T amp P S S Item name Description Save button Registers the selected template Cancel button Cancels registration of the template Template list A list of the templates that can be selected is displayed Select a template to use LJ Select URL screen Select a URL registered in URL List for Menu Screen and Hard Button P 212 Setting up URL List for Menu Screen and Hard Button Select URL Item name Description Save button Registers the selected URL Cancel button Cancels registration of the URL Name The registered URL name is displayed URL The registered URL is displayed 306 Registration Administration tab Item List Mi Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settings Tip The Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward submenu can be accessed from the Registration menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Registration menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 302 Registration Administration tab Item List e Fax Re
324. ions and E mail reception Internet Fax reception Scan Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Values for the small size and large size are displayed according to the paper size specified on your device Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record Counter Tab Page Overview 109 110 Counter How to Set and How to Operate P 110 Viewing counters E Viewing counters This equipment maintains a set of counters that keep track of the number of pages printed copied and scanned These statistics can be displayed in totals or broken down by department This section explains how to display the statistics and manage the department counters BA BA P 110 Displaying the total counter P 111 Displaying the department counter Neither an end user nor an administrator can reset counters from TopAccess However users who are granted administrator privileges in the access policy mode can reset the counter from the control panel Refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide LI Displaying the total counter In the Total menu you can display the total counter information for the copy print counter for small paper copy print counter for large paper and scan counter Click the Counter tab and the Total menu The Total Count page is displayed 2 You can check the total counter in this page Device Job Status Logs Registratio
325. ipment You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters including hyphens You cannot use a hyphen as the first and last character The MFP name is set as the default Setup Item List 143 144 Item name 3 Address Mode Description Select how to set the IP address e Static IP Select this to assign the static IP address manually When this is selected enter the static IP address in the IP Address box e Dynamic Select this to assign the IP address using the DHCP with Auto IP addressing enabled The IP address subnet mask gateway address primary WINS server address secondary WINS server address POP3 server address and SMTP server address can be automatically acquired from the DHCP server if the network supports DHCP However if the network does not support DHCP use the AutolP function to assign an IP address e No AutolP Select this to assign the IP address using the DHCP with Auto IP addressing disabled The IP address subnet mask gateway address primary WINS server address secondary WINS server address POP3 server address and SMTP server address can be automatically acquired from the DHCP server if the network supports DHCP If the communication with the DHCP cannot be established the previous IP address is used 4 Obtain a Domain Name automatically Select Enable when you want to obtain a domain name automatically using the DHCP server This setting will apply on
326. is cannot be set when Gray is selected in the Color Mode box 8 Exposure Select the exposure for scanning Select Auto to automatically apply the best contrast for the document You can also manually adjust the exposure in 11 stages The farther to the right that you set the value the darker the density of the scanned image will become Auto is not available when Gray Full Color or Auto Color is selected at the Color Mode box In that case set the exposure manually 9 Original Size Select the original size If this is set to Auto the size is automatically detected Select Mixed Original Sizes to scan a document with mixed sizes You can also specify the original size 10 Background Select the density level of the background of the scanned image Density can be adjusted in 9 levels The farther to the right that you set the value the darker the density of the background will become 11 Contrast Select the contrast level of the scanned image Contrast can be adjusted in 9 levels The farther to the right that you set the value the higher the contrast level will become This is not available when Black or Gray is selected at the Color Mode box 12 Sharpness Select the sharpness level of the scanned image Sharpness can be adjusted in 9 levels The farther to the right that you set the value the sharper the scanned image will become 13 Saturation Select the saturation level of the scanned image Saturation ca
327. is to send a file to the FTP server e FTPS Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL e NetWare IPX SPX Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the IPX SPX protocol NetWare TCP IP Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the TCP IP protocol Server Name When you select FTP as the protocol enter the FTP server name or IP address where a scanned file will be sent For example to send a scanned file to the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter 192 168 1 1 in this box When you select NetWare IPX SPX as the protocol enter the NetWare file server name or Tree Context name when NDS is available When you select NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the IP address of the NetWare file server You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols Port Number Command Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select FTP as the protocol Generally is entered for the control port When is entered the default port number that is set for FTP Client by an administrator will be used If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client ask your administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and hyphens as the default is set Network Path When you select SMB as the protoco
328. isplays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Values for the small size and large size are displayed according to the paper size specified on your device Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record Counter Tab Page Overview 107 Q User Counter screen lt access policy mode gt This screen displays total counter information for each user who is logged in to TopAccess Tip Total counters for all users are displayed when you are logged in as the Administrator User Counter Number 12 12 lolai el Number Displays the registered user number User Name Displays the user name Click a user name to check the information P 109 User Information screen lt access policy mode gt Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account Total Printing Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations Total Scanning Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Fax Transmission Displays the number of pages transmitted via fax Fax Reception Displays the number of pages received via fax 108 Counter Tab Page Overview LJ User Information screen lt access policy mode gt User Information Close User Name UserNamedo1 Domain Name LDAP Server 1 2 3 4 Authentication Method 5 6 MFP Local Authentication mes Password SSSCSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSOSSOSOSSOSS Administ
329. ived Forward are almost the same This section describes how to register in both cases 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Registration menu Click the Fax Received Forward submenu to register the Fax Received forward or click the InternetFAX Received Forward submenu to register the Internet Fax Received forward Logout Counter User Management Administration e When you click the Fax Received Forward submenu the Fax Received Forward submenu page is displayed e When you click the InternetFax Received Forward submenu the Internet Fax Received Forward submenu page is displayed 328 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 4 Select the Forward check box select the desired agents and click Select Agent Tip To disable the Fax Received Forward or Internet Fax Received Forward clear the Forward check box and click Select Agent and then click Save e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Registration Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML Format File Save Select Agent Forward x _ InternetFax A 3 Save as file 1 Email Store to e Filing InternetFax Forwards received faxes or receiv
330. job The address book data cannot be imported if there are any jobs that have not been processed If importing the address book data takes a long time restore the data after the equipment turns into the Sleep Auto Shut Off mode 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Import submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Security Maintenance Registration Maintenance N 1 Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Serice Notification Languages System Updates Reboot You can upload e STUDIO6550c Series client software to the controller This allows en ers to install the software into their system from the TopAccess Install Software link located atthe bottom ofthe Top p Upload Files Driver Files v The following are the required files Upload The Import submenu page is displayed Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 8 Administration Tab Page 4 Select the import method in the Address Book area e Filing Logout Logs Registration nte User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System
331. l enter the network path to the network folder For example to specify the users scanneda folder in the computer named Client01 enter Client01 users scanned When you select FTP as the protocol enter the directory in the specified FTP server For example to specify the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter user scanned When you select NetWare IPX SPX or NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the folder path in the NetWare file server For example to specify the sys scan folder in the NetWare file server enter sys scan You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols Login User Name Enter the log in user name to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required When you select FTP as the protocol an anonymous log in is assumed if you leave this box blank You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols Setup Item List 193 Item name Description Password Enter the password to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters symbols and spaces A single space only can also be entered Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Allow user to select network folder Select this to allow users to specify a network folder as a destination When the list of Save to be used as a destination as file destinations has
332. lakecereecd seston tee sass denetandes 49 Registration Tab Page Overview cccccseeseeeeeeeeees 50 Relay End Terminal Report Mailbox ccseeeeeeees 84 Releasing DHIML ODS secesi ekeen e ees ielosouanenics 36 Remote SEUNG arroaren nao cece tec etait 195 Remote Setting List cccccccccccsecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 63 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List 334 Resetting a public template cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 325 Resetting all public templates cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 327 Resetting public templates c cceceeceeceeeeeseeeeeees 325 Role Assignment Secncite cette pe cocstetss ened aadAectance 120 Role Management Item list cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 S Save as file Setting Mailbox cccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Save as file Setting Private template eeee 68 Sav as File Settings cadet este Bee aitan ace aey 189 SCAM Counet ee eae a aaa 105 Sean Job tem lis tenrai e a NN 33 Gedam I 2 8 EATER eae Oe ere nas a ie OO IN 41 Scan Setting Private template cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 Search Address List ntti okie te slant ce iestoadestes i aicdnuee secs 19 Search Contact ia aa aa a O 19 Search Ser Account es 54scctor se gah oa Se cceacte det croas ga 115 Searching for destinations in the LDAP server 62 333 Security How to Set and How to Oper
333. le name to download File Size Displays the file size of the created export files Date Crea ted Displays the created date of the export files Export Data Format Select the file format of the export file CSV Select this to create the file in the CSV format XML Select this to create the file in the XML format Create New File button Creates the export file LJ Setting up MailBoxes MailBoxes File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Item name Description File Name Displays the file name of the created export files Click a file name to download File Size Displays the file size of the created export files Date Crea ted Displays the created date of the export files Create New File button Creates the export file Maintenance Item List 279 LJ Setting up Template Template File Name Not Created File Size Date Created Create New File Item name Description File Name Displays the file name of the created export files Click a file name to download File Size Displays the file size of the created export files Date Created Displays the created date of the export files Create New File button Creates the export file Q Setting up Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes File Name Not Created File Size
334. led Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server when the DNS service is enabled as you require Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Primary DNS Server Address IPv6 Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server when the DNS service is enabled in IPv6 Specify within the range from 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to fff fT TTT FFT FFT FT FT FF Secondary DNS Server Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server when the DNS service is enabled in Address IPv6 IPv6 as required Specify within the range from 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to ffPF TFFR TFFT FFFF FFF TTT FTF FPF Tip When the Obtain a Domain Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the server address of the primary and secondary DNS server addresses can be obtained using the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP Setup Item List 151 152 LJ Setting up DDNS Session In DDNS Session you can enable the Dynamic DNS service if the DNS server supports the dynamic DNS e When using the security in DDNS if the difference between the time set in the server in which Windows DNS record is to be updated and the one set in the equipment exceeds the time stated in the account policy of the server the DNS update using the security will fail Check the time set for the DNS server and match it with the one set for the equipmen
335. lf signed certificate screen 6 Click OK Windows Internet Explorer Are you sure Cancel 264 Security How to Set and How to Operate 7 A self signed certificate is created Click the Export button if you are exporting Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed Import Not Installed N Upload Delete SCEPt Automatic Not Installed Browse CA Server Address Primary 10 10 70 111 CA Server Address Secondary 10 10 70 121 MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate IP Address v Timeout 30 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHAt MDS 8 Right click the link for the file name of the certificate to be exported and then select Save Target As Export self signed certificate Device Certificate pem format LETNA casa ae X 1 Open in New Window 1 Save Target As fay Q100 v Print Target gt Cut C ol Jy Copy Shortcut Paste SF Blog with Windows Live E mail with Windows Live a Translate with Bing All Accelerators gt Add to Favorites Append Link Target to Existing PDF Append to Existing PDF Convert Link Target to Adobe PDF Convert to Adobe PDF Properties The Save As dialog box appears 9 Specify a directory to which the certificate is to be saved and then click Save Save As E
336. lick the Add button Assigned Role Displays a list of the assigned roles Select the role to be removed from the assignment and click the Delete button LJ Group Assignment screen You can select groups to be assigned Group Assignment OK Cancel Available Group Assigned Group GroupNamed2 GroupNameod1 Mumssanhi GroupName04 GroupName0s5 Item name Description OK button Saves the assigned groups Cancel button Cancels assigning groups Available Group Displays a list of registered groups Select the group to be assigned and click the Add button Assigned Group Displays a list of the assigned groups Select the group to be removed from the assignment and click the Delete button User Management Tab Page Overview WE Group Management Item list lt access policy mode gt You can manage the registered roles as groups if you are logged in to the access policy mode LL P 121 Create Group Information screen LL P 122 Group Information screen Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Group Management Ree Department Management Four Management New Delete Delete Al roup Name New button Allows you to add a new group P 121 Create Group Information screen Delete button Deletes the group selected in the group list
337. light saving time period the changes will be reflected to the equipment s clock If you disable the settings during the applicable period the equipment s clock will shift to the standard time e Ifthe equipment is turned off at the start or end date and time the equipment will shift the clock the next time it is turned on e After the clock shifts the daylight saving time will also apply to the weekly timers Setup Item List 141 e Select the Start and the End dates and times based on the time set for the equipment P 140 Setting up Date amp Time e Ifthe same month is specified for the Start and the End dates the equipment does not shift the clock automatically Q Setting up WEB General Setting You can set the session timer for TopAccess WEB General Setting 1 SESSION Timer 30 Minutes Item name Description Enter how long you want this equipment to preserve the session data of TopAccess You can enter any integer between 5 to 999 This setting also applies to the session data of the e Filing web utility 10 is set as the default 1 Session Timer Tip When logged in the access policy mode you will be automatically logged out if the session timer elapses without any operation being performed 142 Setup Item List Mi Network settings You can configure the network settings such as TCP IP Filtering IPX SPX AppleTalk Bonjour LDAP Session DNS Session DDNS Session SMB Session NetWare Sess
338. ly select only one among Email Save as file and Save to USB Media except for Email and Save as file which can be selected simultaneously Refer to the document provided by the vendor of the application which supports the meta scan option for details Click each button displayed in the page to specify or edit the associated template properties Panel Setting Specify the icon settings of the template P 302 Setting up Panel Setting Public template Destination Setting Specify the destination This can be set only when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent or Email agent P 302 Setting up Destination Setting Public template InternetFax Setting Specify how the Internet Fax is transmitted This can be set only when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent P 302 Setting up InternetFax Setting Public template Fax Setting Specify how the documents are faxed This can be set only when creating a Fax Internet Fax agent P 303 Setting up Fax Setting Public template Email Setting Specify how the documents are transmitted as E mail messages This can be set only when registering the Email agent P 303 Setting up Email Setting Public template Save as file Setting Specify how documents are saved in a local hard disk USB media or a network folder This can be set only when registering the Received to File agent P 303 Setting up Save as file Setting Publi
339. ly when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Enable is set as the default DDNS Session When the DHCP server does not have a domain name the data are left blank in the domain name even if you set the correct domain name manually in the DDNS Session In that case select Disable here and set the correct domain name in the P 152 Setting up DDNS Session 5 Obtain a Domain Server Address automatically Select Enable when you want to obtain a domain server address automatically using the DHCP server This setting will apply only when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Enable is set as the default DNS Session When the DHCP server does not have a primary and secondary DNS server addresses the data are left blank in the primary and secondary DNS server addresses even if you set the correct primary and secondary DNS server addresses manually in the DNS Session In that case select Disable here and set the correct primary and secondary DNS server address in the P 151 Setting up DNS Session 6 Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically Select Enable when you want to obtain a primary or secondary WINS server address automatically using the DHCP server This setting will apply only when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Enable is set as the default When the DHCP server does not have a primary and seconda
340. m enter Name and Value and then click Add If you select an item and click Move Up the selected item moves up in the list Click Move Down to move it down Select an item and click Delete to delete an unnecessary item from the list Name Enter the name of the item Value Enter a value or text to be applied for the selected item Setting up Meta Scan Function 349 e You cannot exceed the total number of characters displayable in the List Items 127 e You cannot use a semicolon in Name or Value Minimum Length Specify the minimum number of characters that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a character string Maximum Length Specify the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a character string Minimum Value Specify the minimum numerical value that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a numerical value Maximum Value Specify the maximum numerical value that can be entered in the extended field if the field is a numerical value Default Value Specify the default value for the extended field Password Specify the default password for the extended field if the field is a password Date Specify the default date for the extended field if the field is a date items Input method Extended field type The following shows the types and settable items of an extended field for
341. mail address or fax number of the destination in the Destination box Contact Property Ok Cancel Reset Required User01 example com Destination You can specify the fax number for the destination only when the Fax Unit is installed Click OK The destination is added to the Recipient List page 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add all additional destinations that you require Tip You can remove the destinations you added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 63 Removing the contacts from the Recipient List 6 Click Save Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete Z Ame Destination User001 example com The contacts are added as destinations Registration Tab Page Overview 59 Selecting the destinations from the address book You can select destinations from the address book in this equipment You cannot select destinations from the address book if Restriction Setting for Destination is enabled P 254 Restriction Setting for Destination 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Address Book Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete Destinatio wame The Address Book page is displayed 3 Select the Email check boxes of users you want to add as the E mail recipients or
342. mary WINS server when the WINS server is used to provide the NetBIOS name in your local area network This option would be more useful to access this equipment using the NetBIOS Name from a different subnet Tip When the Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the primary and secondary WINS server address can be obtained using the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP Secondary WINS Server Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server as you require when the WINS server is used to provide NetBIOS name in your local area network If the Primary WINS Server is unavailable the Secondary WINS Server will be used Tip When the Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically option is enabled in the TCP IP settings the primary and secondary WINS server address can be obtained using the DHCP server P 143 Setting up TCP IP If 0 0 0 0 is entered for the Primary WINS Server and Secondary WINS Server this equipment will not use the WINS server SMB Signing of SMB Server Select whether SMB Signing is enabled or disabled when a client accesses this equipment using SMB such as when a client accesses the shared folder in this equipment e If client agrees digital signature is done for the communication Select this to use the digital signature to secure communication only when a client accesses this equipment with a digital signature Even if a client accesses t
343. mat file and the variables are replaced with the corresponding information meta scan during the Meta Scan operation Tip Enter variables in XML format files using the variable name format Q Variables of XML format files Variables that can be defined in XML format files are shown below Tip You can use variables for the subject of E mail the file name of Meta Scan image files and the file name of meta data Variable variable name Data to be stored Value MANUFACT Manufacturer name OKI MODEL Model name string FWVER Firmware version string SERIAL Serial number for machine string LOCATION Location set from TopAccess string CONTACT Contact information set from TopAccess string CONTACTTEL Contact telephone number set from TopAccess string IP IP address string IPV6 IPV6 address string NETBIOSNAME NetBIOS name string FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name string ETE RESOLUTION Scan resolution HHHxVVVdpi FILEFORMAT File format Multiple TIFF single TIFF MultiplePDF singlePDF MultipleSLIMPDF singleSLIMPDF MultiplexPS singleXPS JPEG COLORMODE Color mode BLACK GRAY SCALE FULLCOLOR AUTOCOLOR NUMFILE Number of image files string PAGES Number of pages string PATH 1 2 Save path of the image file string FILE 2 Image file name string MYEMAIL Sender email address string
344. mber in the port number input box Filter Action Set the operation of the filter e Permit Select this to permit access from the specified destination e Block Select this to block access from the specified destination e Negotiate Security IPsec communication is performed with the specified destination When this item is set you must select the security protocol type to be used in IPsec communication from the following ESP Select this to use ESP Encapsulating Security Payload AH Select this to use AH Authentication Header Setup Item List 175 176 Add Manual Key Modify Manual Key screen You can display this screen by clicking the Add button for Manual Key or a registered manual key name You can set a manual key to use in IPsec Add Manual Key ok Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Required ws janua Key Name Encryption Algorithm Hash Algorithm ees MHOUNd Key Security Parameter Index SP should be between 256 and 4095 ESP Encryption Key ESP Authentication Key AH Authentication Key Outbound Key Security Parameter Index SP should be between 256 and 4094 ESP Encryption Key ESP Authentication Key AH Authentication Key Modify Manual Key T L 1 OKI Cancel Reset Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings ee Required
345. mber to be used for controls if you select FTP as the protocol Generally is entered for the control port When is entered the default port number that is set for FTP Client by an administrator will be used If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client ask your administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number 196 Setup Item List Item name Network Path Description When you select SMB as the protocol enter the network path to the network folder For example to specify the users scanned folder in the computer named Client01 enter Client01 users scanned When you select FTP as the protocol enter the directory in the specified FTP server For example to specify the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter user scanned When you select NetWare IPX SPX or NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the folder path in the NetWare file server For example to specify the sys scan folder in the NetWare file server enter sys scan Login User Name Enter the login user name to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required When you select FTP as the protocol an anonymous login is assumed if you leave this box blank Password Enter the password to access an SMB server an FTP server or a NetWare file server if required The space can be entered Retype Password Enter the sam
346. me file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting User Information You can create an export file for user information Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting User Management Tab Page Overview 131 132 Item name User Information All Counter Description You can create an export file for user information all counter Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting Combined User Information Role Group You can create an export file for combined information user information role group Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and created date are displayed if you have already created a file Click the file name and follow the displayed dialog messages when exporting Combined User Information All Counter Role Group You can create an export file for combined information all counter role group Click the Create New File button to create the file The file name file size and create
347. ments with small size characters or fine drawings e Ultra Fine Select this to use the ultra fine mode as the default resolution This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents with very small size characters or detailed drawings 9 Original Mode Select the default image quality mode for sending faxes e Text Select this to set the Text mode as the default image quality mode appropriate for sending text originals e Text Photo Select this to set the Text Photo mode as the default image quality mode appropriate for sending originals containing both text and photos e Photo Select this to set the Photo mode as the default image quality mode appropriate for sending photo originals 10 Exposure Select the default exposure for sending faxes Select Auto to automatically apply the ideal contrast according to the original or select the contrast manually in 11 stages 11 TTI Switch the TTI recording ON or OFF To enable this feature the Terminal ID must be registered to this equipment in advance e ON Select this to set to add the source information to the TTI e OFF Select this to set not to add the source information 12 RTI Select whether to print a reception header RTI on received faxes to clearly identify the time date and page count of received faxes 13 ECM Select whether to enable or disable the ECM Error Correction Mode to automatically re send any portion of the document affected by phone
348. ministration tab Item List 311 312 Item name 4 Destination Remote 1 Description Select this check box to save a received document to Remote 1 How you can set this item depends on how you have set Remote 1 up in the Save as file submenu under the Setup menu If you have selected Allow the following network folder to be used as a destination you can only select Use Administrator Setting The protocol and the network path are displayed below this item If you have selected Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination select Use User Setting and enter the following items to configure the destination to save files Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a received document to the network folder e SMB Select this to send a received document to the network folder using the SMB protocol e FTP Select this to send a received document to the FTP server e FTPS Select this to send a scanned file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL e NetWare IPX SPX Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the IPX SPX protocol e NetWare TCP IP Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the TCP IP protocol Server Name When you select FTP as the protocol enter the FTP server name or IP address to which a received document will be sent For example to send a received document to the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the
349. mote 2 The setting items are the same for both Remote 1 and Remote 2 The network folder as a destination must be set to be shared by all users Remote l and Remote 2 Settings V7 Remote 1 Allow the following network folder to be used as a destination Remote Setting List Protocol SMB FTP OFTPS NetWare IPXISPX NetWare TCP IP Server Name _ ee ee ee See eel Port Number Command Network Path fAClient01 usersiscanned Login User Name Password lecccccee Retype Password Jecccccee 5 Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination SOODNOURWN Item name Description Remote 1 Remote 2 Select the remote network folder you want to use Allow the following network folder Select this to restrict users to select only the network folder that you have specified to be used as a destination Otherwise select Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination Remote Setting List button Sets a list of network folders for Save as file destination which can be selected from Remote 1 and Remote 2 To select the specified setting list from the control panel you must select Allow user to select network folder to be used as a destination P 194 Remote Setting List screen Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a file to the network folder e SMB Select this to send a file to the network folder using the SMB protocol e FTP Select th
350. mplate Group screen Displays a list of Template Group that can be selected on the Menu Setting screen Select Template Group Go to top ofthis page Item name Description Save button Registers the selected template group Cancel button Cancels registration of the template group No The numbers of the template group that can be selected are displayed Name The names of the template groups are displayed Click a name to display the Select Template screen If templates can be selected a list of templates that can be selected is displayed P 339 Select Template screen User Name The user names of the template groups are displayed LJ Select Template screen You can select which template to use by clicking the template group name in the Select Template Group screen Select Template Select Template Group gt omy Information Name User Name w Public Template Group Jump to FAX MODE SCAN TO SCAN TO G D Ema MAIL FUE l TO EN t TO ee FILING FLESEMAL O MAIL Item name Description Save button Registers the selected template Cancel button Cancels registration of the template Template list A list of the templates that can be selected is displayed Select a template to use My Account Tab Page Overview 339 340 LJ Select URL screen Select a URL registered in URL List for Menu Screen P 212 Setting up UR
351. mple cam Click OK Entered destination is added to the Recipient List page 5 Repeat step 2 to 4 to add all destinations you require Tip You can remove destinations that you have added to the Recipient List before saving the destination settings P 334 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List 330 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 6 Click Save Recipient List Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete MI Name Destination The contacts are added as destinations Selecting the destinations from the address book By this method you can select destinations from the address book 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Address Book Recipient List i wName Destination The Address Book page is displayed 3 Select the Email check boxes of users you want to add as the destinations Address Book Group All Groups v O peoe O eeen OOOO DS V rnn aoee L perne proe C prsne soen p oee C pne peoe SY O pne peen SY Go to top oft AAAA 3 his page Tip If you want to sort the Recipient List by a specific group select the desired group name in the Group box 4 Click Add The selected destinations are added to the Recipient List page Tip You can remove destinations that you have added to the Recipient List before saving the destin
352. n l l Save Cancel Required Nyame XML Format File defaultForm3 xml Item name Description Save button Creates an extended field definition with the entered data Cancel button Cancels adding new Number Displays the extended field definition number Name Specify the extended field definition name XML Format File Select the XML format file for meta data P 321 XML Format File 320 Registration Administration tab Item List E XML Format File Meta data which is attached to images scanned with the Meta Scan function is defined in an XML format file You can register XML format files which are customized to be processed by a workflow server or some other means Tip The XML Format File submenu can be accessed from the Registration menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Registration menu LL P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 302 Registration Administration tab Item List LL P 321 Setting up Import XML Format File LJ P 321 Setting up Delete XML Format File LJ Setting up Import XML Format File Import XML Format File 1 wos Fj ame Browse Import Item name Description File Name Select the XML format file to be imported Browse button Allows you to select the XML format file Import button Imports the select
353. n Save button Saves log authentication settings Cancel button Cancels the settings Enable Log Authentication Enables log authentication When log authentication is enabled the log display for users will be restricted according to access policies e Enable Enables log authentication Display will be restricted according to access policies e Disable Disables log authentication Logs for all users will be displayed Logs Tab Page Overview 45 LJ Log size Log size displays the log size Log Size Print Log 2 L transmission Journal 3 Reception Journal Scan Log 4 Message Log 5 Item name Description Print Log Displays the log size of print jobs Transmission Journal Displays the log size of transmission journals Reception Journal Displays the log size of reception journals Scan Log Displays the log size of scan jobs Message Log Displays the log size of message logs 46 Logs Tab Page Overview Logs How to Set and How to Operate L9 P 47 Displaying job logs LL P 48 Exporting logs E Displaying job logs Tip You can display logs for jobs which are performed on this equipment Up to 100 logs are displayed in chronological order with the most recent first When the number exceeds 100 logs are deleted beginning with the oldest ones 1 Click the Logs tab and click the View Logs menu 2 Click Print Log
354. n Refer to the document provided by the vendor of the application which supports meta scan option for details Email You can transmit the document as an E mail attachment Save as file You can save the document in a shared folder Store to e Filing You can store the document in the e Filing Save to USB Media Registration Tab Page Overview You can save the document in USB media LJ Private template settings You can set details of a template 1 LL P 57 Panel Setting Private template 1 LO P 58 Destination Setting Private template a LL P 64 InternetFax Setting Private template 1 LL P 64 Fax Setting Private template 1 LLI P 66 Email Setting Private template a LL P 68 Save as file Setting Private template 1 LO P 71 Box Setting Private template LL P 71 Store to USB Device Setting Private template a LO P 73 Scan Setting Private template L9 P 75 Extended Field settings LL P 75 Extended Field Properties L9 P 75 Password Setting Panel Setting Private template In the Panel Setting page specify how the icon for the template is displayed in the touch panel and the notification settings for the template Panel Setting Save Cancel Picture Caption SAVING Caption2 AS FILE T Send Email when an e
355. n 6 6 6666 Copyright lt c gt 2006 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users user 61 MNc From the File or Console menu of the window that appears select Add Remove Snap in im Console1 Console Root oO File Action View Favorites Window Help New Ctrl N i pen Ctrl O Save Ctri S Save As Add Remove Snap in Ctrl M Options N 1 C Windows system32 CompMgmt 2 C Users Console Kenny Exit The Add or Remove Snap ins dialog box appears 3 From the list of Available snap ins select Certificates and click Add r Add or Remove Snap ins You can select snap ins for this console from those available on your computer and configure the selected set of snap ins For extensible snap ins you can configure which extensions are enabled Available snap ins Selected snap ins Snap in Vendor 2 __ Console Root Edit Extensions 9 ActiveX Control Microsoft Cor Authorization Manager Microsoft Cor Certificates Microsoft Cor Component we Microsoft Cor computer MAN Microsoft Cor gaa Device Manager Microsoft Cor Add gt fay Disk Management Microsoft and Add gt fa Event Viewer Microsoft Cor x Folder Microsoft Cor Group Policy Manag Microsoft Cor EJ Group Policy Object Microsoft Cor IP Security Monitor Microsoft Cor 3 IP Security Policy M Microsoft Cor Achumecethn
356. n Exchange PKCS 12 PFX P 12 1 Cryptographic Message Syntax Standard PKCS 7 Certificates P7B Microsoft Serialized Certificate Store SST Learn more about certificate file formats cenetenoort Wed Password To maintain security the private key was protected with a password Type the password for the private key Password _ Enable Sine key protection You will be prompted every time the private key is used by an application if you enable this option E Mark this key as exportable This will allow you to back up or transport your keys at a later time Indude all extended properties Learn more about protecting private keys B Click Next Cerfetelnpor Wend O Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location for the certificate Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate Place all certificates in the following store Certificate store Learn more about certificate stores Do not change the certificate store using Browse Installing Certificates fora Client PC 361 362 G Click Finish e Certificate Import Wizard x Completing the Certificate Import Wizard The certificate will be imported after you dick Finish You have specified the following settings EEO a AES Personal Content PFX File Name C Wser
357. n User Management Administration Total Counter Print Counter Copy Fax Printer List Total Smal Large OO Tata Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Small Black Large Black Counter How to Set and How to Operate LJ Displaying the department counter In the Department menu you can display the counter information of a specific department If you want to display the department counter you must enter the department code 1 Click the Counter tab and the Department menu The Department management page is displayed 2 Enter the code for the department you want to check in Department Code and click Enter Login Device Job Status Registration Department Department Management Enter a department code to access department counters Department Code eeceee The department counter for the specified department is displayed 3 Click the department name link to display the detailed counters for the department Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Department Department Management Enter a department code to access department counters Department Code Namber Department Nane poe 1 Deparmentnamen moss a a a 4 The Department Information page opens Department Information Department Number 1 Deparment Name DepartmentName01 Department Code 123456 Print Counter Copy Fax Printer List Total psa o a a OOO a a eee Scan Co
358. n a template Template registration User Name is used a user name and a password registered there will be automatically applied and Password is prioritized to expand template Login User Name and Password A user name and a password being logged in will be automatically applied When a template Login User Name and Password is is used the user name and password being logged in will be applied prioritized to expand template LI Setting up Searching Interval Select the interval for searching expired files in the FILE SHARE folder The content of this setting will also be applied to files in e Filing boxes Searching Interval 1 Deleting Expired File 12 Hour s This setting is applied to the e Filing document Item name Description Deleting Expired File Hour s This equipment searches expired files every time a specified period of time has passed The period can be selected from 1 to 24 hours 12 hours is set by default Tip You can set the expiration date of each file in the FILE_SHARE folder or whether to delete expired files or not using the items below P 190 Setting up Storage Maintenance Setup Item List Q Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 In Remote 1 and Remote 2 you can specify how users can select the network folders for Save as file destination when you select Use Network Folder Destination in the Destination setting You can specify two network folders Remote 1 and Re
359. n be adjusted in 7 levels The farther to the right you set the value the more vivid the scanned image will become This is not available when Black or Gray is selected at the Color Mode box 14 RGB Adjustment Select the RGB density level of the scanned image RGB density can be adjusted in 9 levels for each color The farther to the right you set the value the darker the density of the selected color will become This is not available when Black or Gray is selected at the Color Mode box 15 Omit Blank Page Select whether to automatically omit a blank page in the scanned image if it is included in originals e OFF The blank page is not omitted e ON The blank page is omitted 16 Outside Erase Select whether to erase a shade that appears outside of the scanned image when an Registration Tab Page Overview Original is placed on the document glass while the Original Cover is left open The erased shade will be whitened If you want to erase it you can select the criteria in 7 levels for judging if it is an area to be erased The farther to the right you select the larger the area that will be erased OFF is selected by default Extended Field settings You can set extended fields for meta data Set the field you have registered in Administration Registration Extended Field Definition Extended Field settings Save Cancel I Extended Field Definition No 001 test001 v
360. n export up to 5 000 logs in Print Job Log Export Fax Transmission Journal Export Fax Reception Journal Export and Scan Log Export and up to 10 000 logs in Messages Log Export The oldest logs are deleted when the number of logs exceeds the maximum limit Export Logs Export Logs Print Job Log Export File Name File Size Date Created Export Data Format Fax Transmission Journal Export File Name File Size Date Created Export Data Format Fax Reception Journal Export File Name File Size Date Created Export Data Format Scan Log Export File Name File Size Date Created Export Data Format Messages Log Export File Name File Size Date Created Export Data Format Print Job Log Export Device Job Status It may take more than 10 minutes if there are a lot of entries e Filing Logout Registration Counter User Management Administration REFRESH Not Created csv XML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Not Created cs XML Create New File amp Clear Lag Clear Log Create New File Not Created cs XML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File Not Created csv XML Create New File amp Clear Log Clear Log Create New File Not Created CSY O XML Create New File amp Clear Log J Clear Log Create New File You can erase print logs or export download them in a file
361. nabled the number of outputs in printing for printing received E mail and Internet Fax is managed in each department Enable is set as the default Department Management Scan When this function is enabled the number of originals scanned such as when they are stored in the shared folder is managed in each department Enable is set as the default Department Management List When this function is enabled the number of system page outputs is managed in each department Enable is set as the default The number of outputs are only counted for received faxes in which the department code needs to be entered such as manual reception polling reception or the printing of originals stored in the confidential mailbox and the bulletin mailbox 248 Security Item List Q Setting up User Authentication Setting You can configure user authentication to access your equipment User Authentication Setting 1 User Authentication Enable v 2 ns A hentication failed print jab Raw Print Job Delete v 3 Auto Release on Login Disable v 4 E Use Password Authentication for Print Job Itis not able to print from other than Windows Client when this function is enabled 5 E Enable Guest User 6 Aithentication Type MFP Local Authentication PIN Code Authentication Setting 7 PIN Code Authentication Disable v 8 _ Minimum PIN Code Length o temmame i eseription OO O 1 User Authentication Select whethe
362. ncel The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 232 Setup How to Set and How to Operate E Setting up InternetFax settings You can configure Internet Fax operations from the InternetFax submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the Internet Fax settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and InternetFax submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Seths General LE Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printere Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA R2 The InternetFax submenu page is displayed 4 In the InternetFax submenu page set the Internet Fax settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup Save Cancel InternetFax Setting From Address From Name
363. ne File settings ccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeaes 214 Create Group Information cccccccceceeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 121 Greate New Role crannan ean 125 Create self signed certificate cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 257 Create SNMP V3 User Information ccceeeeee ee 167 Create User Information 2eiiciiccisscoshet eset 116 Creating or editing public templates ceceeee ee 322 Creating Exporting a client certificate ceeeee ee 270 Creating exporting a self signed certificate 264 D Default roles and privileges ccccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 123 Default XML file format cccecceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeenes 345 Defining the role information setting file 00 355 Definition Properties suiwds sssivecdbastvatiaeveuundatenseuuaveitione 320 Delete Files settings lt 2s ccieicseelcdceenmeieden hc eeteidseiecceee 280 Deleting a device certificate installed automatically 269 Deleting a Server siete seca tece ogintates Gaseeateaetiessoceuece 244 Deleting an imported device certificate cc cee 267 Deleting an LPR queue cccsecc eee eeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 238 Deleting CA Cerificate soseske i 273 D letng data stresine a aati acess eeteue 291 Deleting JODS sect saccharin dasiasei a eectbecteed 35 Deleting private print jobs and hold print jobs 35 Deleting SNMP V3 user information cccce
364. ng Private template Store to e Filing You can store the document in the e Filing Save to USB Media You can save the document in USB media 352 Setting up Meta Scan Function 6 Set the agent Setting operations are the same as for normal templates P 86 Registering and editing private template groups The following describes how to set Extended Field settings 7 Click the Extended Field settings button to set extended fields l Extended Field settings Extended Field Definition No N DisplayNamedt TT Password Setting Password Password is not set 8 Select a registered extended field definition using Extended Field Definition No Extended Field settings Save Cancel Extended Field Definition No 001 ExtendedName01 v 001 ExtendedNamell 002 ExtendedName02 R DisplayName0O03 DisplayName004 Userll01 example com E Address YY YY MM DD Enter the default value for the Extended Field Properties This is displayed if Extended Field Properties are set for the selected extended field definition Values set in this screen are used as the default values for Extended Field Properties displayed on the control panel when using Meta Scan Items with an asterisk at the beginning of the Extended Field Properties name are mandatory entry fields Extended Field settings
365. ng Center Control Panel Home View network status and tasks View network computers and devic System and Maintenance OTE Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Security Network and Internet n Internet Options Hardware and Sound Change your homepage Manage browser add ons Delete browsing history and cookies Programs User Accounts Offline Files Appearance and Encrypt your offline files Manage disk space used by your offline files Personalization Clock Language and Region Windows Firewall eae eae Turn Windows Firewall on or off Allow a program through Windows Firewall se SS Additional Options People Near Me neg Sign in or out of People Near Me Change People Near Me settings Classic View Sync Center Sync with other computers mobile devices or network folders View sync results Resolve sync conflicts Recent Tasks View network status and tasks The Network and Sharing Center window appears 18 Accessing TopAccess 1 Overview 4 Click View full map See full map in the Network and Sharing Center window kas 7 55 Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v es Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices View full ma Connect to a network Set up a connection or network A A W Manage network connections ya MEDIA PC EN Unidentified network Internet Diagnose and repair This computer Unidentified network Private net
366. ng primary or backup domain controller is specified the OK in the user authentication screen on the touch panel is highlighted while this equipment searches for the primary or backup domain controller for 2 to 4 minutes Connection Timeout Enter the timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the PDC or BDC server Specify within the range from 1 to 180 seconds Role Based Access Setting Configure role based access using an LDAP server Role Based Access using LDAP server Select whether enable or disable role based access Disable is set as the default LDAP Server Select the LDAP server that manages the Role Based Access Control 250 Security Item List Item name PIN Code Authentication Setting Description PIN Code Authentication Select the PIN code authentication method e Disable Select this no to use the PIN code authentication Use the user name and password for authentication e Enable Select this to use the PIN code authentication Instead of the PIN code it is possible to use the user name and password for authentication Minimum PIN Code Length Enter a figure that specifies the minimum digits for the PIN code LDAP Server1 LDAP Server3 Set the following items for LDAP Server1 when you use the LDAP authentication Windows Server Select this when LDAP is running on a Windows server LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Select this when the
367. nk or scroll the page to find the setting table and click the button of the setting to set the network settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version TCP IP Filtering LDAP Session DNS Session DDNS Session SMB Session Nettare Session HTTP Network Service SMTP Client SMTP Server POP3 Network Service FTP Client FTP Server SLP Session SNMP Network Service Web Services Setting LLTD Session Wake Up Setting IP Security You can set the following in this page LX P 143 Setting up TCP IP LX P 157 Setting up HTTP Network Service LL P 145 Setting up Filtering LL P 158 Setting up SMTP Client LO P 147 Setting up IPv6 L P 160 Setting up SMTP Server LO P 148 Setting up IPX SPX LX P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service LL P 149 Setting up AppleTalk LL P 162 Setting up FTP Client A P 149 Setting up Bonjour A P 163 Setting up FTP Server L P 150 Setting up LDAP Session LX P 164 Setting up SLP Session LL P 151 Setting up DNS Session LL P 165 Setting up SNMP Network Service LX P 152 Setting up DDNS Session LX P 168 Setting up Web Services Se
368. nnnnnnnnnnnnn ennen nennen nnne 104 Coumte RENTIS Tea a T Gard le r tnceattaiakeadeeanntaes 104 Counter How to Set and How to Operate cccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeneecneeensoneseneseneaesones 110 NLGW IG COUNEIS si feet acres ck cooler a iach creer cian eee econ A haboetmnedegd 110 Chapter 7 User Management Tab Page User Management Tab Page Overview cccccecceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaneceeeeeesenseensenesneenesens 114 User Accounts Item list lt access policy mode gt ccc cccccceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeseeeneeeeeees 114 Group Management Item list lt access policy MOdE gt cccceccc eee eeeceeeeeeceeeeeeneeseeeeees 121 Role Management Item list lt access policy mode gt cece cecc ccc eeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 123 Department Management Item list lt access policy MOdE gt ccccccccecc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 128 Export Import Item list lt access policy mode gt cccceccsccceeecececeeteecaeeceeeceeeeueeaeeeeeaeeees 131 Chapter 8 Administration Tab Page ESS CUNO Emi LIS iine Gea Sep ws tie cs aeie bac tne a Saeco Satie cea E a 136 Efe alse Becta 1g ks remem ee ee ree eke ne ee eee 136 ING UWV ORIG SENOS ic tetuct esettnns Ciera seta Gemedusnda lal ultas E A aa 143 COBICl SCUINGS yeaa are sees a encanto ace Suet cata Pnet de sient aan rine adeace aes 183 FAX SCUNNOS sistas Sha cniceatien E a a a 186 Save as File SCUINGS sranna a a
369. nnot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you set it by mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number Setup Item List 163 LJ Setting up SLP Session When SLP is enabled this equipment becomes a Service Agent that responds to requests from a User Agent for searching particular services and registers services to a Directory Agent Tip The SLP setting only supports the print services shown below Raw TCP print LPD print IPP print WSD print SMB print FTP print About the printer location attribute of SLP SLP has an attribute called printer location as one of the services provided The information of printer location is the device setting information on the General submenu of the Setup menu on the Administration tab page and that of the Location field of Device Information on the Device tab page Turn the equipment off and on if you have changed Location from TopAccess The change is reflected in printer location of SLP after the equipment is restarted SLP Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings 1 Enable SLP Enable o DEFAULT Enable SLP Select whether SLP service is enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default TTL Set TTL Time To Live a scope in the network that provides SLP service This is to enable the communication among User Agents and Directory Agents loc
370. not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 227 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer S Q Are you sure The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 228 Setup How to Set and How to Operate W Setting up Save as file settings You can configure file saving operations and the Save as File function by the N W Fax driver from the Save as file submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the Save as file settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Save as file submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Setup Administration Sele General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Co
371. nt number represents a proportionally spaced scalable font The Font Size option allows you to determine the point size height of the default font 10 PCL Font Number Enter the font number of the internal PCL font to be used as the default font for printing You can check the font numbers and internal PCL fonts in the Internal PCL Font List Refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide for the font number and internal PCL fonts 11 PCL Line Termination Select the type of the line termination 12 Symbol set Select the symbol set that applies to a raw job 13 Paper Source Select the paper source that applies to a raw job 14 Do not Print Blank Pages Select whether blank pages are printed or not When printing is performed using the UNIX filters or CUPS this setting is not reflected If you do not want to print blank pages in these printings enable Do not Print Blank Pages in the UNIX filter command or CUPS setting For the setting instructions refer to the User s Manual Basic Guide or User s Manual Advanced Guide 15 Letterhead Print Mode Select whether the last page odd page number is printed on the same side as the other odd number pages when printing both sides of a Raw print job whose total page number is odd Select ON to print the last page on the same side back as the other odd number pages Select OFF to print it on the same side front as even number pages Setup Item List 203 204 Q Setting up Raw J
372. nterfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version Off Device Customization Architecture Setting Network Enable Port Enable Port Number 49629 Enable SSL Port Disable v SSL Port Number 49630 Configration Session Timeout 60 99999 90 Seconds You can set the following in this page LL P 213 Setting up Network LL P 213 Setting up Configuration Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 245 6 Click OK to apply the changes Message from webpage Are you sure The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status E Displaying version information You can check the system software version information of this equipment from the Version submenu under the Setup menu Displaying the version information 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access P
373. nts of documents e Content Extraction for accessibility Select this to enable the accessibility feature Tips e If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled you cannot clear the Encryption check box For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide e The user password and the master password are not set at the factory shipment e Passwords must be from 1 to 32 one byte alphanumerical characters e The user password must differ from the master password These passwords can be re entered only by an authorized user Users cannot change the settings of the Encryption Level box and the Authority box noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password For the details of the encryption setting refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords 3 File Name Select how the scanned file will be named Select DocYYMMDD to name it as described or enter the desired file name in the box When you want to add the date and time in the file name select the Add the date and time to a file name check box Tip When Meta Scan is selected if you select Add the date and time to a file name in File Name it is also applied to the meta data file name 72 Registration Tab Page Overview Scan Setting Private template In the Scan Setting page you can specify how originals are scanned for the Scan to File Scan to Ema
374. nts to be notified of Item name Description Paper Misfeed Select this to be notified of paper misfeeds Tray Out of Paper Select this to be notified when you are out of paper Door Tray Open Select this to be notified when a cover or tray is open Print Needs Attention Select this to be notified when a job is printed Toner Empty Select this to be notified when a toner is empty Used toner container is Full Select this to be notified when the waste toner box is full Power Status Select this to be notified when the power source status changes such as a power cut H W Option Attachment History Select this to be notified when a hardware option is installed Maintenance Change Settings Select this to be notified of setting changes Maintenance User Data Select this to be notified when user information is edited Export Import Select this to be notified of an export or import Cloning Select this to be notified when a clone is made System Updates Select this to be notified of system updates Factory Default Select this to be notified when the equipment is restored with the factory default Log Full Select this to be notified when the log has reached the maximum size Network Error Select this to be notified of network errors Security Error Select this to be notified of security errors Warning Select this to be notified of security warnings Information
375. nverter EWB ODCA 2 The Save as file submenu page is displayed 4 In the Save as file submenu page set the Save as file settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup Save Cancel Save as file Setting Local Storage Path Storage Path FILE_SHARE Send scanned documents to a sub folder in the storage path The sub folders will be named after the associated template and will be of the format Group Number GroupName TemplateName Send scanned documents directly to the storage path Storage Maintenance Do not delete documents automatically Delete documents after 30 day s You can set the following in this page on LL P 189 Setting up Local Storage Path Yn LU P 190 Setting up Storage Maintenance Yn LL P 190 Setting up Destination 1 YW LL P 190 Setting up Folder Name Yn Lt P 191 Setting up Format Yn LL P 191 Setting up Single Page Data Saving Directory ea LU P 192 Setting up File Composition Yn LU P 192 Setting up User Name and Password at User Authentication for Save as File Yn LL P 192 Setting up Searching Interval 1 YW LL P 193 Setting up Remote 1 and Remote 2 Yn LL P 196 Setting up N W Fax Destination Yn LJ P 196 Setting up N
376. o 128 characters CA Server Address Secondary Enter the IP address or FQDN of the CA server You can enter up to 128 characters MFP s Address in Common Select whether to use the IP address or FQDN as the address of this equipment to be Name in the Certificate entered in the Common Name box of the certificate Timeout Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the CA server CA Challenge Enter the CA challenge Signature Algorithm Select SHA1 or MD5 as the signature algorithm Poll Interval Specify the polling interval Maximum Poll Duration Specify the polling duration e If FQDN is used in CA Server address you need to configure a DNS server and enable DNS settings e If FQDN is selected in MFP s Address in Common Name in the Certificate the IP address of this equipment must be registered in the DNS server A device certificate is installed A CA certificate is installed automatically as well as a device certificate If a CA certificate is already installed delete the existing one by clicking DELETE of SCEP in Device Certificate Then click Request to install a new CA certificate 5 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu 268 Security How to Set and How to Operate 6 Then you can enable SSL for the following network settings P 150 Setting up LDAP Session P 157 Setting up HTTP Network Service P 158 Setting
377. o are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the Maintenance menu from the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P HIDDEN Upload Software settings LL P HIDDEN Remove Software settings LL P 274 Create Clone File settings L9 P 276 Install Clone File settings LL P 277 Import settings LL P 279 Export settings LJ P 280 Delete Files settings LL P 281 Directory Service settings LL P 283 Notification settings LL P 286 Languages settings LL P 288 System Updates settings LL P 289 Reboot settings WE Create Clone File settings You can create a clone file of the environment on your equipment You can implement a cloned environment by installing the created clone file on another equipment Tip The Create Clone File submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List LL P 274 Setting up Clone File LL P 275 Setting up Category Setting Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Servic
378. o create the file in the XML format 5 Click Create New File in the Address Book area e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Sofware Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Click the button below to create the CSY file or XML file REFRESH Address Book File Name ADDR 110118 csv File Size 1575 Date Created TUE JAN 18 18 43 14 2011 Export Data Format cs XML Create New File MailBoxes N File Name Not Created File Size Date Created The exported file information is displayed Tip If you previously exported address book data the exported file link and information are displayed in the Address Book area You can click the link to save the previously exported file Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 299 8 Administration Tab Page 6 Right click the File Name link and select Save Target As e Filing Logout Device lob Status Logs Registration User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Click the button below to create the CSV file or XML file lt 3 R
379. o name it as described or enter the desired file name in the box When you want to add the date and time in the file name select the Add the date and time to a file name check box Tip When Meta Scan is selected if you select Add the date and time to a file name in File Name it is also applied to the meta data file name Box Setting Private template In the Box Setting page you can specify how scanned images will be stored in the Box Box Setting Cancel Box Number 00000 Public Box Password Retype Password A tee stination 2 er Mame DocYYMMDDCYYMMDD is a date 3 UMEN Mame E EE Item name Description Destination Specify the destination box number for e Filing Box Number Select the box number to store the scanned image Password Enter the password if the specified box is set with a password Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation Folder Name Enter the name of the folder where scanned images will be stored If the specified named folder does not exit the folder will be created automatically You can enter up to 64 characters Document Name Select how the scanned file will be named Select DocYYMMDD to name it as described or enter the desired file name in the box Store to USB Device Setting Private template On the Store to USB Setting page you can set the method for saving templates in USB media
380. o stop printing when staples run out e ON Select this to stop printing when staples run out e OFF Select this not to stop printing when staples run out Setup Item List 201 E Printer settings You can configure how the printer works and the printer options needed for the raw print jobs Tip The Printer submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu L9 P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List LJ P 202 Setting up General Setting LL P 203 Setting up Default Raw Job Setting LL P 204 Setting up Raw Job Setting LI Setting up General Setting In General Setting you can specify the printer related options Printer Setting General Setting Period of time to save Private Hold Proof and invalid Jobs 14 Days v LT gt A4 Enable v es e A4 Mode for PCL Disable Restriction for Print Job None Item name Description Period of time to save Select how long the private hold and test print jobs are kept You can select in the range Private Hold Proof and invalid Jobs from 1 to 12 hours or from 1 to 30 days Select Indefinite to retain all jobs in the queues until a user manually deletes them 14 Days is set as the default LT lt gt A4 Select whether to print a document intended for one paper size can
381. ob Setting In Raw Job Setting you can add up to 16 LPR queue names and specify the raw job setting for each queue These queue names can be used when printing without a printer driver such as printing from UNIX workstation Raw Job Setting Edit Delete Duplex Printing Add button PCL Form Line PEL Font Pitch PEL Font Point Size PEL Font Number PEL Line Termination Symbol set Paper Source Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode Select this to add a LPR queue P 204 Add New LPR Queue Edit screen Edit button Select this to edit the LPR queue selected in the LPR queue list P 204 Add New LPR Queue Edit screen Delete button Select this to delete the LPR queue selected in the LPR queue list LPR queue list Select this to display the list of registered LPR queues Add New LPR Queue Edit screen Add New LPR Queue Save Cancel Queue Name Duplex Printing Paper Size Paper Type Orientation o D Ss 3 2 Output bin PCL Form Line PCL Font Pitch OAONOORWN PCL Font Point Size PCL Font Number PCL Line Termination Symbol set Paper Source Do not Print Blank Pages etterhead Print Mode Disable v Ad v Plain v Portrait v OFF Face down stacker v 12 0 10 0 12 0 0 Auto Roman 8 Auto ON OFF Item name Description Queue Name Enter the queue name with up to 31 alphanumerical cha
382. ob Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Registration R1 Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward aa XML Format File 2 Registration 4 Click Undefined to register an extended field definition Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML F Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undetine D i T j J j J J m fm fT fia iw Click a registered extended field name to display the edit screen for the extended field Skip to step 6 5 Enter the field name select an XML format file and click the Save button Select a registered XML format file when you want to use a customized XML format file Select defaultForm3 xml if you do not have any customized XML format file Definition Properties Definition Information a 348 Setting up Meta Scan Function Click the New button under Extended Field settings when setting extended field properties Click Extended Field Definitions in the upper part of the screen if you are not setting extended field properties Extended Fields Extended Field Definitions Definition Information Extended Field settings 7 Set the extended field properties Extended Field P
383. ode e Auto Color Select this to scan in the auto color mode e The Color Mode option cannot be set when Slim PDF Multi or Slim PDF Single is selected in the File Format option in the Save as File Settings and that in the Email Setting When Auto Color is selected you cannot select JPEG or TIFF Multi for the file format Also when Black is selected JPEG is not allowed Resolution Select the resolution for scanning The Resolution option cannot be set when Slim PDF Multi or Slim PDF Single is selected in the File Format option in the Save as File Settings and that in the Email Setting Compression Select the compression for scanning e This cannot be set when Black is selected at the Color Mode box e The Compression option cannot be set when Slim PDF Multi or Slim PDF Single is selected in the File Format option in the Save as File Settings and that in the Email Setting Registration Tab Page Overview 73 74 Item name Description 7 Original Mode Select the document type of the originals e Text Select this to set the Text mode as the default original mode e Text Photo Select this to set the Text Photo mode as the default original mode This can be selected only when Black is selected in the Color Mode box e Photo Select this to set the Photo mode as the default original mode Th
384. of pages of the transmission job 6 TO Name Displays the destination name set for the transmission job 7 TO Fax No Email Displays the fax number or E mail address of the destination for the transmission job 8 Dept Displays the department code if department management is enabled 9 Mode Displays the transmission mode 10 Status Displays the result of the transmission 11 Line Displays the line used 12 User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the transmission job 13 Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the owner of the transmission job The transmission mode is displayed by a combination of a 2 digit letter code a 3 digit numeric code and up to a 4 digit supplemental code For example EC 603 2 digit letter code Communication Mode EC ECM G3 G3 ML E mail 1st numeric 3rd numeric code Mode 2nd numeric code Resolution Up to 4 digit supplemental code 0 8x3 85 1 8x7 7 2 8x15 4 4 16x15 4 8 300 dpi B 600 dpi D 150 dpi P Polling SB Mailbox SR R Relay mailbox SF F Forward mailbox ML Internet Fax I N W Fax O Offramp Gateway Logs Tab Page Overview 39 Tip Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the transmission journal list in the specified order LJ Reception Journal The Reception Journal page displays the following information for each reception jo
385. ol is disabled on its protocol setting however the Wake Up setting is disabled either and therefore this equipment will not be recovered from the Super Sleep mode e When no response is returned from this equipment after you access the network even if a protocol selected on this setting is used retry the access Tip If any of the following protocols is selected this equipment can be recovered from the Super Sleep mode even if the Wake Up setting is not set IPP FTP HTTP SMTP RAW9100 LPD WebService Setup Item List 171 LJ Setting up IP Security With the IP security function you can enable data encryption communication using IPsec IP Security Protocol Tip With the Flush Connections button if the keys for IPsec communication are leaked or a security violation occurs you can manually delete flush the current session with the flush connection function and start a new session If you want to delete the information of SAD Security Association Database for any reason you can delete it in the same way IP Security Return Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable IPsec Disable v Policy Filter Manual Key IKE Key Profile Policy Add Delete Fitter Name Fitter amp fion Item name Description Return button Closes the IP Security screen Enable IPsec Specify whether or not to enable IPsec e Enable Enables IPsec
386. olicy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Version submenu Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration 2 The Version submenu page is displayed In the Version submenu page you can confirm the version information of the system software e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup Version Information Printer Manufacture i Copier Firmware Version if kb E Copier Main ROM Version 130M 014 Copier Scanner ROM Version 1308 01 246 Setup How to Set and How to Operate Security Item List Tip Users who are granted administrator privileges in access policy mode can access the Security menu from the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it P 22 Access Policy Mode LI P 247 Authentication settings LL P 256 Certificate management settings LJ P 260 Password Policy settings E Authentication settings You can restrict user operations using the authentication function of your equipment Tip The Authentication submenu can be accessed from the Security menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on Security menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 247 Security Item List LL P 248 Setting up Departm
387. on tab 3 Click the Registration menu and Public Template submenu Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration etup Registration Registration Public Template Public Menu Fax Received Forward InternetFAX Received Forward Extended Field Definition XML FormatFile The Public Template submenu page is displayed 4 From the templates list click the template icon that you want to reset Registration No Name User Name Public Public Template Groups Panel View Listview Please click a template picture to edit Jump to 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 e lf the templates list is displayed in the List view click the template name that you want to reset e The Template Properties page is displayed Tips e You can change the template list view by clicking on either Panel View or List View e If you know which public template you want to define or edit click the number of the public template in the Jump to links Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 325 8 Administration Tab Page 5 Click Reset Template Template Properties Public Template Group Information No Name EEE Public Public Template Groups Template Information Change Passward Reset Template N CO e N oos enore OOO O S OSOSOSCSCSCCCC CSCS SCAN TO Panel ad FILE otification utoma
388. on a server other than a Windows one Attribute type of User Name Enter the attribute type of User Name for LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Attribute type of PIN Enter the attribute type of PIN for the PIN code authentication When you use more than one LDAP server select Enable for LDAP Server2 and or LDAP Server3 and set up the LDAP server as necessary See the settings for LDAP Server Select Disable for unused LDAP servers LJ Setting up Email Authentication When E mail authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password before performing Scan to Email Email Authentication Email Authentication Item name Description Email Authentication Select whether or not to enable E mail authentication e SMTP You can use SMTP authentication of the equipment to manage user authentication When SMTP authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password that is registered in the SMTP server to perform Scan to Email from the touch panel P 252 SMTP LDAP You can manage network users with LDAP authentication when you already manage your network using LDAP When LDAP authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password that is registered in the LDAP server to perform Scan to Email from the touch panel P 253 LDAP You must carry out E mail address setting to use E mail authentication P 253 Setting up Email Addres
389. onjour Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings 1 Enable Bonjour Enable v 2 Link Local Host Name 3 Service Name Item name Description 1 Enable Bonjour Select whether Bonjour is enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default 2 Link Local Host Name Enter the DNS host name of this equipment You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash 3 Service Name Enter the device name of this equipment that will be displayed in the Bonjour network You can enter up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Setup Item List 149 150 Q Setting up LDAP Session In LDAP Session you can enable or disable the LDAP directory service LDAP Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable LDAP Disable v Attribute 1 company Attribute 2 department Search Method Partial match Item name Description Enable LDAP Select whether the LDAP directory service is enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default Attribute 1 Enter the name of the schema corresponding to the LDAP server configuration You can enter up to 22 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Attribute 2 Enter the name of the schema corresponding to the LDAP server configuration Y
390. ooting the equipment Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate E Deleting the data from local folder An administrator can delete information such as scanned data transmission data and reception data that are stored in the local folder using the Save as file function It is recommended to delete the stored data periodically to maintain the hard disk Deleting data 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Delete Files submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance 1 Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot You can upload e STUDIO6550c Series client software to the controller This allows end users to install the so re into their system from the TopAccess Install Software link located atthe bottom ofthe TopAccess page 2 Upload Files Driver Files v The following are the required files The Delete Files submenu page is displayed 4 Select the check box of data that you want to delete and click Delete Files e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Sofware Remove Software Cr
391. operties click Save The Fax or Internet Fax Received Forward properties are registered LI Setting up Destination Setting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward In the Recipient List page you can specify the destinations to which the received faxes or Internet Faxes will be transmitted You can only specify an E mail address as the destination You can specify the destinations by entering E mail addresses manually selecting destinations from the address book selecting destination groups from the address book or searching for destinations in the LDAP server ane iy iY iy iy LL P 330 Entering the destinations manually LL P 331 Selecting the destinations from the address book LL P 332 Selecting the groups from the address book LL P 333 Searching for destinations in the LDAP server LU P 334 Removing the destinations from the Recipient List Entering the destinations manually Using this method you can add a destination manually to the Recipient List 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 9 Click New Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group Search Delete Destination The Contact Property page is displayed 3 Enter the E mail address of the destination in the Destination box Contact Property OK Cancel Reset Required Destination User01 exa
392. orage Path WMFPO 317401 FILE_SHARE C Remote 1 Use Administrator Setting Protocol SMB Network Path Use User Setting Protocol SMB FTP FTPS NetvVare IPX SPX Netv Yare TCP IP Server Name LLL Port Number Command Ed Network Path Hoa Destination Login User Name L Password Ld Retype Password ee Remote 2 Use Administrator Setting Protocol SMB Network Path Use User Setting Protocol SMB FTP FTPS NetvVare IPX SPX NetWare TCP IP Server Name E amp E t SCSCCSYS Por Number Command EB Network Path E Login User Name Password Ld Retype Password Ld DocyYYMMDDCYYMMDD is a date Fie Neme o M E Add the date and time to a file name Item name Description File Format Select the file format for the scanned file to be stored e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files Slim PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as Multi page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size over the quality of the image Slim PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page slim PDF files Select this when you give priority to minimizing the file size o
393. ot delete documents Select this to delete files stored in the local folder manually If you select this option files automatically saved in the shared folder will not be deleted automatically Delete documents after day s Select this to automatically delete files stored in the local folder after a specified number of days When this is selected enter the number of days that the files are to remain 30days is set as the default LJ Setting up Destination You can specify whether a network folder can be used for Save as file Destination Do not allow any network folder to be used as a destination Use Network Folder Destination Default file path Use local folder v Item name Description Do not allow any network folder to You can specify that a network folder cannot be used for Save as file When this is selected be used as a destination users can only save a file in the local folder or USB media Use Network Folder Destination You can specify that a network folder can be used for Save as file When this is selected set the Remote 1 and Remote 2 Settings to specify how users can select the network folders for Save as file destinations Default file path Select the destination that will be set as the default destination when performing Save as file from the control panel e Use local folder Select this to save in a local folder e Remote 1 Select this to save in the folder set in Remote 1
394. ou can enter up to 22 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Search Method Select search conditions for LDAP searching e Partial match Select this to search information partially matching the search conditions Prefix match Select this to search information that starts with contents matching the search conditions Suffix match Select this to search information that ends with contents matching the search conditions Full match Select this to search information fully matching the search conditions Setup Item List LJ Setting up DNS Session In DNS Session you can specify the DNS server to enable the FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name rather than the IP address on specifying each server address such as SMTP server POP3 server and LDAP server Tip When the DNS service is enabled and the DNS server supports the dynamic DNS service Set the DDNS Session as well P 152 Setting up DDNS Session DNS Session Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable DNS Enable v Primary ONS Server Address 0 0 Secondary DNS Server Address 0 0 Primar ONS Server Address IPy6 Secondary ONS Server Address IPv6 Enable DNS Select whether the DNS server is enabled or not Enable is set as the default Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server when the DNS service is enab
395. out setting when the user failed to supply the correct password Enable is set as the default Number of Retry Specify the number of retries before lockout Specify within the range from 1 to 30 times 10 is set as the default Lockout Time Specify the duration to lock out the user Specify within the range from 1 to 1440 minutes 1 is set as the default Available Period Select Enable to specify how long the password is valid before its expiry Disable is set as the default Expiration day s Specify how long the password is valid before its expiry Specify within the range from 1 to 999 days 180 is set as the default Tip When the number of days set in Expiration day s elapses a screen that prompts the user to change the password will appear the next time the user logs in Security Item List 261 LJ Setting up Policy for e Filing Boxes Template Groups Templates SecurePDF SNMPv3 Cloning You can configure policies for passwords for operations and applications on your equipment Policy for e Filing Boxes Template Groups Templates SecurePDF SNMPv3 Cloning Minimum Password Length 0 0 20 Lockout Setting Disable v 2 Requirements to Apply Disable v Number of Retry m 1 30 Lockout Time E Minute s 1 1440 Item name Description Minimum Password Length Specify the minimum number of digits for the password Specify within the range from 0 to 20 1 0
396. ove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Programs Uninstall a program The Network and Internet window appears 3 Click Network and Sharing Center OQ TP gt Control Panel Network and Internet gt X Search Control Pane pe Control Panel Home W Network and Sharing Cent s R gt View network status and tasks Cd ect to a network ystem and Security z s View network computers and devic Add a wireless device to the network Network and Internet HomeGroup Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound Programs s Internet Options User Accounts and Family Safety Change your homepage Manage browser add ons Delete browsing history and cookies Appearance and Personalization Clock Language and Region Ease of Access The Network and Sharing Center window appears Accessing TopAccess 15 1 Overview 4 Click Choose homegroup and sharing options a Foe ES f ER lt Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v 5 Search Control Panel p Control Panel Home F View your basic network information and set up connections Change adapter settings LY D kd See full map change advanced sharing TD0504 097 Internet gs i This compu
397. owner of the scan job Tips e Scan jobs that have finished being scanned are displayed in the Logs tab e Click a table heading item to refresh the page and reorder the print job list in the specified order Job Status Tab Page Overview 33 3 Job Status Tab Page Job Status How to Set and How to Operate P 34 Displaying print jobs P 35 Deleting jobs P 35 Deleting private print jobs and hold print jobs P 36 Releasing print jobs P 36 Checking recovery information BEBBE E Displaying print jobs 1 Click the Job Status tab and click the Print Job Fax InternetFax Job or Scan Job menu The Job page is displayed If jobs are not displayed in the list click the REFRESH icon at the upper right of the page Device Logs Registration Print Print Job f REFRESH o to top ofthis pa See the following for details on displayed items P 30 Print Job Item list P 32 Fax InternetFax Job Item list P 33 Scan Job Item list Tip Completed jobs are displayed in the Logs tab 34 Job Status How to Set and How to Operate E Deleting jobs Click the Job Status tab and click the Print Fax InternetFax or Scan menu The Job page is displayed 2 Select the check box next to the job that you want to delete e Filing Login Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Print Job REFRESH D
398. ows how to register a private template 1 Click the Registration tab and the Template menu e Filing Logout User Management Administration Device Job Status Template Templ N roups Please select a group to edit below Public Template Groups No Nemes er Name Public f Public Template Groups 2 Click an Undefined group link Public Template Groups Ro pe Pubic Public Template Groups AllGroups Defined Groups Jump to 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 091 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 User Name UserName001 UserName002 UserName003 ar 5 g T f Cia lla 3 gq fa 5 in ser006 ndefined ndefined ndefined m fi es 3 Enter the group name and click the Save button Group Properties Group Information No _ Nene Ne oor Oo eS ae N This Email address is used as default recipient each tor template Email to Retype Password Setting up Meta Scan Function 351 4 Click an Undefined icon from the template list Private Templates Template Groups gt Group Information Edit Change Password Reset No Name User Name oor _ ovoun007 Panel View List view Please click a template picture to edit Undefined N 5 Select the check box for the Meta Scan under Template Properties and then select the agent and cl
399. p InternetFax settings LL P 235 Setting up Printer e Filing settings LL P 236 Setting up Printer settings LL P 239 Setting up Print Service settings LI P 241 Setting up Print Data Converter settings LL P 243 Configuring the EWB function LL P 245 Setting up Off Device Customization Architecture settings Yn LU P 246 Displaying version information The paper size for each tray cannot be set from TopAccess Set from the touch panel of the equipment For instructions on how to set the paper size for each tray refer to the User s Manual Setup Guide E Setting up General settings Ess You can configure general settings such as Device Information Energy Save Date amp Time and Web General Setting from the General submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the General settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and General submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter Administration User Management General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer e Filing
400. page order as the originals one set after another e Group Copies grouped by page exit LJ Setting up Copy Job Enforcement Continue Copy Job Enforcement Continue 1 Automatic Change Of Paper Source 2 Auto output bin change Cascade Print 3 Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty Item name Description 1 Automatic Change Of Paper Specify whether or not to change the paper source automatically when the size of the Source original and the paper in the paper source do not match e ON Select this to change the paper source and continue processing the job e OFF Select this to stop the job 2 Auto output bin Change Cascade Specify whether or not to switch the receiving tray automatically Print e ON Select this to continue processing the job by switching the receiving tray e OFF Select this to stop the job 3 Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty Specify whether to stop printing when staples run out e ON Select this to stop printing when staples run out e OFF Select this not to stop printing when staples run out Setup Item List 185 E Fax settings You can specify fax settings Tip The Fax submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List LI Setting up Fax Setting
401. panel will display NETWORK INITIALIZING When this message disappears TopAccess will once again be available 224 Setup How to Set and How to Operate E Setting up Copier settings You can configure copy operation settings from the Copier submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the copier setting 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Copier submenu Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup selg General Save l Cancel 2 The Copier submenu page is displayed 4 In the Copier submenu page set the copier settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Security Maintenance Registration Setup Save Cancel Copier Setting Default setting Original Mode Text Photo v Exposure Auto v MPT Plain X Magazine Sort Open from left 2in1 4in1 Write Laterally v Maximum Copies 999 v Auto 2 sided Mode Sort Mode Priority Non Sot Copy Job Enforcement Continue Automatic Change Of Paper Source OFF Auto output bin change Cascade Pr
402. perate Searching for destinations in the LDAP server You can search for destinations in the registered LDAP server You can also search for destinations in the address book on this equipment 1 Click Destination Setting to open the Recipient List page 2 Click Search Recipient List Save Cancel New Address Book Address Group 4 Name Destination The Search Contact page is displayed 3 Select the directory service name that you want to search for in the Directory Service Name box and enter the search terms in the boxes that you want to search Search Contact Search Cancel Enter a partial name or Email address to search for a contact Directory Service Nam LDAP servern v First Name FirstName10 Last Name Email Address Fax Number Company Department Enter a search string in Email Address or Fax Number to search a destination using an LDAP server A search will not be carried out correctly if you enter a search string in other columns Tips e f you select the model name of this equipment at the Directory Service Name box you can search for destinations in the address book of this equipment e TopAccess will search for destinations which match the entries e Leaving the box blank allows wild card searching However you must specify at least one 4 Click Search A search for the destination using the LDAP server starts
403. plays the date and time when the scan job was released from the control panel Pages Displays the number of pages of the scan job Mode Displays the transmission mode using 6 letter codes Status Displays the detailed result status of the scan job User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the scan job Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the owner of the scan job Codes are displayed in the following format AA This describes the job type CA Copy and File Copy and Store to e Filing CT Copy to e Filing without printing FS Relay Mailbox Transmission FF Fax Received Forward FE Internet Fax Received Forward ST Scan to File or USB Scan to e Filing Scan to Email Fax and Save as File Print and e Filing Print to e Filing N W Fax and Save as File Logs Tab Page Overview 41 BE e Filing to Email RS Remote Scan or Web Services Scan MS Meta Scan EN E mail notification This describes the transmission type e Filing Email SMTP FTP SMB Save in a local folder NetWare IPX SPX USB NetWare TCP IP FTPS Remote Scan or Web Services Scan This describes the resolution 100 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 8 x 3 85 line mm 203 x 98 8 x 7 7 line mm
404. ple in private print jobs due to its restriction You can specify how to display file names in Long File Name Setting Long File Name Setting Long File Name Expression Display Non Abbreviation Long File Name Expression Select how to display file names Display e First Portion The file name is displayed from the beginning and is used to indicate that part of the name is not displayed Last Portion The file name is displayed in the way where the end of the name can be seen First and Last Portions The file name is displayed in the way where the beginning and the end of the file name can be seen Non Abbreviation The file name is displayed from the beginning up to the number of displayable characters 138 Setup Item List LJ Setting up e Filing Notification Events You can set E mail conditions for notifying you that the expiration date of data in e Filing boxes is approaching e Filing Notification Events 1 n Advance automatic delete notification Item name Description Advance automatic delete notification Select when an E mail notifying you of the approaching of the expiration date of data in e Filing boxes is to be sent You can select how many days before the expiration date from 0 not notified to 99 days Q Setting up Job Skip Control Job Skip Control 1 Job Skip Control Item name Description Job Skip Control You can select whether to enable or
405. r according to the type of your certificate e Self signed certificate crt Console Root gt Certificates Local Computer gt Trusted Root Certification Authorities e Client certificate pfx Console Root gt Certificates Local Computer gt Personal e CA certificate cert Console Root gt Certificates Local Computer gt Trusted Root Certification Authorities The Certificate Import Wizard appears 2 On the Certificate Import Wizard click Next Certificate Import Wizard Welcome to the Certificate Import Wizard 5 This wizard helps you copy certificates certificate trust lists and certificate revocation lists from your disk to a P certificate store A certificate which is issued by a certification authority is a confirmation of your identity and contains information used to protect data or to establish secure network connections A certificate store is the system area where certificates are kept To continue dick Next For importing a client certificate proceed to the next step Otherwise skip to step 5 Installing Certificates for a Client PC 11 APPENDIX 3 From Browse select the certificate to install and click Next ceritone monwes E File to Import Specify the file you want to import File name C Users yit5 vise en Desktop Certs vista 20 pfk Note More than one certificate can be stored in a single file in the following N ts Personal Informatio
406. r or not to enable user authentication Disable is set as the default You cannot configure E mail authentication if you enable user authentication 2 Authentication failed print job Raw Select whether or not to print jobs which have failed user authentication Print Job e Hold Select this to register in the hold print job e Print Select this to print jobs which failed authentication e Delete Select this to delete jobs which failed authentication e When the N W Fax driver is used selecting Hold deletes the job e When acolor copy is set selecting Print deletes the job 3 Auto Release on Login Specify whether to process private jobs and hold jobs at login e Disable Select this not to print at login e Enable Select this to print at login 4 Use Password Authentication for Enables the password authentication for print jobs The user name and password are Print Job required to execute printing Enable Guest User Enables operations by the guest user Authentication Type Select the authentication method e MEP Local Authentication You can manage network users with the MFP local authentication of your equipment when you do not have a user authentication system in your environment When MFP local authentication is enabled users must enter the user name and password that is registered in the equipment to operate the touch panel e Windows Domain Authentication You can man
407. racters The queue name is case sensitive so that Queue1 and queue1 will be added as different queues Duplex Printing Select whether a raw job will be printed on both sides of the paper Paper Size Select the default paper size that applies to a raw job Paper Type Select the default paper type that applies to a raw job Orientation Select the default orientation that applies to a raw job Stapling Select whether a raw job will be stapled Output Bin Select the default output bin that applies to a raw job A banner page that is created by NetWare UNIX and Windows operating systems also will be outputted to the tray set here PCL Form Line Enter the number of lines printed per page PCL Font Pitch Enter the font pitch when the selected font number represents a fixed pitch scalable font The font pitch indicates the number of ANK characters per inch 10 pitch prints 10 ANK characters within an inch PCL Font Point Size Setup Item List Enter the font size when the selected font number represents a proportionally spaced scalable font The Font Size option allows you to determine the point size height of the default font Item name PCL Font Number Description Enter the font number of the internal PCL font to be used as the default font for printing You can check the font numbers and internal PCL fonts in the Internal PCL Font List Refer to the User s Manual
408. ransmissions This will disable Internet Fax transmission for all users LDAP Server Select the LDAP server you want to use for LDAP authentication LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Select if LDAP is running on a server other than a Windows server When this is selected you have to specify the attribute type of User Name Q Setting up Email Address Setting You can configure the E mail address when E mail authentication is enabled Email Address Setting 1 From Address 2 From Name 3 Restriction setting for Email Destination From Address of Email Setting v From Address C From Address cannot be edited in Scan to Email Account Name of From Address From Name of Email Setting vi None v Item name Description From Address Specify the From Address From Address of Email Setting Select this to set the From Address in E mail settings User Name Mail Domain Name Select this to specify the From Address in the User Name Mail Domain Name format The authenticated user name is employed as the User Name The domain name specified in the Domain Name box is used as the Mail Domain Name When this is selected enter the domain name in the Domain Name box User Name of LDAP Select this to set the From Address as the E mail address found in the LDAP server Select the LDAP server in the LDAP Server box enter the schema to search the u
409. rator Role Assignment 7 Group Assignment 8 Department Number 0001 DepartmentNamed1 9 PanelUl Language English US 1 0 PanelUl Keyboard Layout QWERTY 11 Quota Setting Quota Default Quota 1 2 Print Counter Small Large Total Scan Counter Small Full Color Large Full Color Smaill Black Large Black Total Fax Communication Counter Transmit Received Item name Description Close button Closes the User Information screen User Name Displays the user name Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the registered domain name or LDAP server Authentication Method Displays the user authentication method Password You cannot display the password Reset the password in the User Accounts item when changing the password P 117 Enter Password screen Role Assignment Displays the registered roles Group Assignment Displays the registered groups Department Number Displays the registered departments PanelUl Language Displays the registered display languages of the touch panel PanelUl Keyboard Layout Displays the registered keyboard patterns for the touch panel Quota Setting e OFF No output restriction e ON Restricts output Quota Displays the remaining number for output Default Quota Displays the default number assigned for the user Print Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operat
410. re and set the correct POP3 server address in the POP3 Network Service P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service Setup Item List Item name Description Obtain a SNTP Server Address Select Enable when you want to obtain a SNTP server address automatically using the automatically DHCP server This setting will apply only when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Disable is set as the default When the DHCP server does not have a SNTP server address the data are left blank in the SNTP server address even if you set the correct SNTP server address manually in the SNTP Network Service In that case select Disable here and set the correct SNTP server address in the SNTP Network Service P 141 Setting up SNTP Service IP Conflict Detect Specify whether or not to detect IP address conflicts Select Enable to display a message on the control panel when an IP address conflict is detected Enable is set as the default IP Address Enter the static IP address for your equipment when Static IP is selected in the Address Mode box Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 However you cannot set 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask if required when Static IP is selected in the Address Mode box Specify within the range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 However you cannot set 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Enter the gateway address
411. re of Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 and then click the displayed icon of this equipment LJ P 10 Accessing TopAccess by entering URL LJ P 12 Accessing TopAccess from Network Map Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 E Accessing TopAccess by entering URL Launch a web browser and enter the following URL in the address box http lt IP Address gt or http lt Device Name gt Address httpiyp10 10 70420 0 For example When the IP address of your device 10 10 70 120 when IPv4 used http 10 10 70 120 When the IP address of your device is 3ffe 1 1 10 280 91ff fe4c 4f54 when IPv6 used Stre l l 10 260 91fr te4co 4154 i1pve literal mer or htto l3ffe 1 1 10 280 91ff fe4c 4f54 When your device name is mfp 04998820 http mfp 04998820 When SSL for the HTTP network service is enabled an alert message may appear when you enter the URL in the address box In that case click Continue to this website not recommended to proceed Certificate Error Navigation Blocked Windows Internet Explorer fon x OW http 10 10 70 120 x Live Search p f A p i s WwW nf Certificate Error Navigation Blocked fp A y ab v i Page v G Tools v There is a problem with this website s security certificate The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate
412. recipient from the LDAP server P 97 Adding new contacts from the LDAP server Adding editing and deleting contacts manually You can add or edit a contact by entering recipient information manually You can also delete the contact from the Address Book 1 Click the Registration tab and the Address Book menu The Address Book page is displayed 2 Click Add Address and add a new contact Or click the corresponding link to the contact which you want to edit or delete in the contact list Login Device Job Status Counter Address Book Address Book Contacts Groups Group All Groups v The Contact Property page is displayed 94 Registration How to Set and How to Operate 5 Registration Tab Page Enter the following items to specify the contact property Click Delete to delete the contact from the address book Job Status Registration Address Book Contact Property Address Book Fax Setting Either Eijther First Name Z oO oO User01 example com 0550007237 ept01 Last Name Email Address Fax Number 2nd Fax Number Company Department Keyword You can configure the following settings in this page P 77 Contact Property screen When registering a fax contact click Fax Setting Otherwise skip to Step 6 The Fax Settings page is displayed 5 Enter the following items according to the capabiliti
413. ree Context name when NDS is available When you select NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the IP address of the NetWare file server You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters and symbols Port Number Command Enter the port number to be used for controls if you select FTP as the protocol Generally is entered for the control port When is entered the default port number that is set for FTP Client by an administrator will be used If you do not know the default port number for FTP Client ask your administrator and change this option if you want to use another port number You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 65535 using numbers and hyphens as the default is set Network Path When you select SMB as the protocol enter the network path to the network folder For example to specify the users scanned folder in the computer named Client01 enter Client01 users scanned When you select FTP as the protocol enter the directory in the specified FTP server For example to specify the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter user scanned When you select NetWare IPX SPX or NetWare TCP IP as the protocol enter the folder path in the NetWare file server For example to specify the sys scan folder in the NetWare file server enter sys scan You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols Login User Name Enter the log in user n
414. relay station report with all page images for each relay transmission completed ON ERROR Select this to print a relay station report with all page images only when the relay transmission is not successful Always Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a relay station report with the 1st page image for each relay transmission completed ON ERROR Print 1st Page Image Select this to print a relay station report with the 1st page image only when the relay transmission is not successful Secure Receive Setup Item List You can set the Secure Receive function to store received fax jobs in the equipment without printing them With this function you can prevent the leaking of confidential information in a fax received when no people are present in your office such as nighttime or holidays or when an unspecified number of people visit your office e Enable Enables the Secure Receive function To print the fax jobs the Secure Receive function received you must set Line1 Password and Retype Password For the password you can enter up to 20 alphanumerical characters and symbols _ e Disable Disables the Secure Receive function e Weekly Schedule Sets whether the Secure Receive function is enabled or disabled for each day of the week You can set the time to enable and disable the Secure Receive function 24 hour display For a day on which you want to enable the Secure Receiv
415. ress filtering under IPv6 environment select MAC address filtering IP Filtering Rule Select IP address filtering rules e Permit Select this to permit access from devices on a network to which the IP address specified in IP Filtering is set e Deny Select this to deny access from devices to which the specified IP address is set IP Filtering Enter the starting IP address and the ending IP address of a target client computer for IP filtering Up to 10 addresses can be specified Only IPv4 addresses are available An IPv6 address cannot be specified Enable MAC Address Filtering Select Enable for MAC address filtering When Enable is selected access from devices on a network to which the MAC address specified in MAC Address Filtering is set is restricted under conditions set in MAC Address Filtering Rule Disable is set as the default MAC Address Filtering Rule Select MAC address filtering rules e Permit Select this to permit access from devices on a network to which the MAC address specified in MAC Address Filtering is set e Deny Select this to deny access from devices to which the specified MAC address is set MAC Address Filtering Enter the MAC address of a target client computer for MAC address filtering Up to 10 addresses can be specified 146 Setup Item List LJ Setting up IPv6 You can set the IPv6 protocol to enable the communication over IPv6 IP
416. ription Context Name Displays the context name User Name Enter the user name You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols Authentication Protocol Select an authentication protocol e HMAC MD5 Select this to use HMAC MD5 e HMAC SHA Select this to use HMAC SHA Authentication Password Enter the password when the Authentication option is enabled You can enter up to 31 characters Privacy Protocol Select a protocol for data encryption e None Select this not to encrypt data e CBC DES Select this to use CBC DES e CFB AES 128 Select this to use AES 128 CFB mode Privacy Password Enter the password for the user information You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols Permissions Level Select the access permission level of the SNMP V3 user e General User Select this to permit only the reading of data e Administrator Select this to permit both the reading and writing of data Setup Item List 167 Q Setting up Web Services Setting In Web Services Print and Web Services Scan you can set the Web Services Setting The Web Services Print operations and Web Services Scan operations are performed on client computers with Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 through a network Web Services Setting Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings General 1 Enable SSL Disabl
417. roperties Save Cancel El Mandatory Input E Hidden Attribute Decimal Text List Address Password Date L Ed ist tems z vove Up Move Down Delete ate J e a ran Required Field Name Specify the extended field name Display Specify how to display the extended field on the control panel Name Enter the caption of the extended field name for the display on the control panel You can enter up to 20 characters Enter the Box number where a received document will be stored Mandatory Input Select this check box if the extended field is a mandatory entry item Hidden Attribute Select this check box if the extended field is a hidden item on the control panel Input Method Select the type of an extended field e Numerical Select this to create an extended field as an integer value Decimal Select this to create an extended field as a decimal value Text Select this to create an extended field as a character string List Select this to create an extended field as a list selection Address Select this to create an extended field as an address Password Select this to create an extended field as a password Date Select this to create an extended field as a date List Items Specify list items to be selected for the extended field The registered list items are listed in the List Items When you register a list ite
418. rror occurs T Send Email when job is completed Notification CONOaRWND Emailta Email address for notification is not specified Email is not sent until Email address is specified Item name Description 1 Picture This indicates the icon that will be displayed in the touch panel The icon is automatically designated according to the agent that you select Caption1 Enter the text that will be displayed next to the icon in the touch panel You can enter up to 11 alphanumerical characters Caption2 Enter the text that will be displayed next to the icon in the touch panel You can enter up to 11 alphanumerical characters User Name Enter the owner name of the template You can enter up to 30 alphanumerical characters Automatic Start Select whether the automatic start function is enabled or disabled When this is enabled the operation will be automatically started when you press the template button from the TEMPLATE menu on the touch panel without pressing the START button or SCAN If the user names or passwords of the User Authentication for Scan to E mail and the User Management Setting are different or only the User Authentication for Scan to E mail is enabled you need to enter the user name and password of the User Authentication for Scan to E mail also when recalling the template with the automatic start function enabled Notification Send Email when an Select this to send
419. rtment Code in User Select whether or not to register the department code when registering a user Disable is Registration set as the default Invalid Department Code Print Job Select whether or not to print jobs without a department code or with an invalid department code when department management is enabled e Store to invalid job list Select this to register print jobs which failed authentication in the invalid job list Print Select this to print jobs with an invalid department code Delete Select this to delete jobs with an invalid department code Tip If the Invalid Department Code Print Job is set to Store to invalid job list and the SNMP communication is enabled in the printer driver the user will be prompted to enter the correct department code if an invalid department code was entered in the printer driver Department Management Copy When this function is enabled the following counters are managed in each department Number of copied sheets Number of originals scanned while copying Enable is set as the default Department Management FAX When this function is enabled the following counters are managed in each department Number of transmitted fax pages Number of original pages scanned while transmitting faxes Number of received fax pages Number of received fax pages which are printed Enable is set as the default Department Management Print When this function is e
420. ry WINS server addresses the data are left blank in the primary and secondary WINS server addresses even if you set the correct primary and secondary WINS server addresses manually in the SMB Session In that case select Disable here and set the correct primary and secondary WINS server address in the SMB Session P 154 Setting up SMB Session Obtain a SMTP Server Address Select Enable when you want to obtain a SMTP server address automatically using the automatically DHCP server This setting will apply only when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Disable is set as the default When the DHCP server does not have a SMTP server address the data are left blank in the SMTP server address even if you set the correct SMTP server address manually in the SMTP Client In that case select Disable here and set the correct SMTP server address in the SMTP Client P 158 Setting up SMTP Client Obtain a POP3 Server Address Select Enable when you want to obtain a POP3 server address automatically using the automatically DHCP server This setting will apply only when No AutolP or Dynamic is selected in the Address Mode option Disable is set as the default When the DHCP server does not have a POP3 server address the data are left blank in the POP3 server address even if you set the correct POP3 server address manually in the POP3 Network Service In that case select Disable he
421. s Specify how long the password is valid before its expiry Specify within the range from 1 to 999 days 180 is set as the default Tip 260 Security Item List When the number of days set in Expiration day s elapses a screen that prompts the user to change the password will appear the next time the user logs in LJ Setting up Policy for Administrator Auditor You can configure policies for administrator and auditor registration Policy for Administrator Auditor Minimum Password Length a 6 64 Requirements to Apply Disable Do not allow the following strings to be used as passwords 3 es Lockout Setting Enable Number of Retry 10 1 30 Lockout Time 1 Minute s 1 1440 Available Period Disable Expiration day s eo day s 1 999 Item name Description Minimum Password Length Specify the minimum number of digits for the password Specify within the range from 6 to 64 6 is set as the default Requirements to Apply Select Enable to set restrictions on the character strings that can be used in passwords Disable is set as the default Restrictions e The user name and password cannot be the same e The same password cannot be used again e A password consisting of sequences of the same characters cannot be used e A password containing the characters entered in the restricted character text box cannot be used Lockout Setting Specify whether or not to enable the lock
422. s Setting SMTP Email Authentication Crmail Arthanticatinn V Internet Fax Not Allowed 1 2 SMTP Server Address 3 Althentication Internet Fax Not Allowed Select this check box to prohibit Internet Fax transmissions This will disable Internet Fax transmission for all users SMTP Server Address Enter the IP address or FQDN of the SMTP server used for E mail authentication 252 Security Item List Item name Authentication LDAP Description Select the authentication method e Plain Select this to access the SMTP server using the plain authentication e Login Select this to access the SMTP server using the login authentication e CRAM MD5 Select this to access the SMTP server using the CRAM MD5 authentication Digest MD5 Select this to access the SMTP server using the Digest MD5 authentication Kerberos Select this to access the SMTP server using the Kerberos authentication NTLM IWA Select this to access the SMTP server using the NTLM IWA authentication Auto Select this to access the SMTP server using the appropriate authentication that this equipment detects Email Authentication Email litthantiaantian LDAP Server LDAP Server Other than Windows Server Attribute type of User Name Internet Fax Not Allowed T Internet Fax Not Allowed LDAP sereni v Select this check box to prohibit Internet Fax t
423. s file agent P 68 Save as file Setting Private template Box Setting Specify how the documents are saved in e Filing This can be set only when creating a Scan to e Filing agent P 71 Box Setting Private template Store to USB Setting Specify how the document is saved in USB media P 71 Store to USB Device Setting Private template Scan Setting Specify how the documents are scanned This can be set only when creating the Save as file agent Scan to Email agent and Scan to e Filing agent P 73 Scan Setting Private template Extended Field settings Set extended field definition information and extended field settings P 75 Extended Field settings Password Setting Set a password for the private template P 75 Password Setting 9 Click Save 10 Click 0K This step is not required if you have selected Edit in step 6 92 Registration How to Set and How to Operate LJ Displaying public templates End users can also display the templates list in the public group so that users can see what templates are available Displaying templates in the public group Click the Registration tab and the Template menu The Template Groups page is displayed 2 Click the group name link for the Public Template Groups list Login Job Status Registration Counter Device Template Template Groups Please select a group to edit below Pu
424. s for the notification messages You can enter up to 192 alphanumerical characters When you enable the Notification setting make sure to set up the E mail settings in the Email submenu of the Setup menu in the TopAccess access policy mode For instructions on how to set up the E mail settings see the following section P 231 Setting up E mail settings Document Print Select whether to print a document sent to this mailbox e Always Always prints documents sent to this mailbox e ON ERROR Prints the document if all specified forwarding has failed Registration Tab Page Overview 83 LJ Destination Setting Mailbox In the Recipient List page you can specify the destinations of the Internet Fax Relay or Email agent When you are setting up the destinations for the Email agent you can only specify the E mail addresses for the destinations When you are setting up the destinations for the Internet Fax Relay agent you can specify both fax numbers and E mail addresses for the destinations You can specify the destinations by entering their E mail addresses or fax numbers manually selecting recipients from the address book selecting destination groups from the address book or searching for destinations in the LDAP server The methods of entering the destinations manually and searching for the destinations in the LDAP server are not available if you are setting the destination for the Internet Fax Rel
425. s jm o FirstName09 LastName09 User09 example com 890 1 234 5678 e jm T FirstNameOS LastName08 User08 example com 789 0123 4567 7 jm ol FirstNameO7 LastNameO User07 example com 678 901 2 3456 e jm ol FirstName06 LastName06 User06 example com 567 8901 2345 5 jm E FirstName05 LastName05 User05 example com 456 7890 1234 E 4 jm ol FirstName04 LastName04 User04 example com 345 6789 0123 F E Firsttvameos LastName03 User03 example com 234 5678 9012 4 Tips e You can clear the entered values in each field by clicking Reset e You can cancel adding or editing a group by clicking Cancel 5 Select the Email check boxes of users to add Internet Fax recipients and select the Fax check boxes of users to add Fax recipients To perform fax transmission the Fax Unit is required If the Fax Unit is not installed you cannot perform the fax transmission even if you specify the fax number Click OK The group is created Registration How to Set and How to Operate 99 E Managing mailboxes Mailboxes can be managed only when the Fax Unit is installed Tip Mailboxes can be managed using the control panel Refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide This equipment supports ITU T communications and allows documents to be transmitted and retrieved from mailboxes created by the mailbox hub in advance LI Setting up mailboxes To carry out ITU T communications you must first set up an Open Mailbox in the m
426. s yit5 vise en Tip If the following security warning message appears click Yes r Security Warning es You are about to install a certificate from a certification authority CA I claiming to represent 172 16 101 134 Windows cannot validate that the certificate is actually from 172 16 101 134 You should confirm its origin by contacting 172 16 101 134 The following number will assist you in this process Thumbprint shal C40525F8 D1F58D1C COD6538B 90E7607E 47D3E7FD Warning If you install this root certificate Windows will automatically trust any certificate issued by this CA Installing a certificate with an unconfirmed thumbprint is a security risk If you click Yes you acknowledge this risk Do you want to install this certificate 7 Click OK to complete the import Certificate Import Wizard x If you are importing a client certificate pfx to a Windows Vista PC proceed to the next step Otherwise the installation is complete If you need to install another certificate repeat the steps from the beginning 8 Double click the imported client certificate Consolel Console Root Certificates Local Computer Personal Certificates am File Action View Favorites Window Help 9 4 lX E Lel bh C Console Root Issued To 5 Issued By Expiration Date Intended P 4 G Certificates Local Computer 172 16 102 20 Ica 7 7 2009 Sacer Ail 4
427. sed and there are no private jobs scheduled jobs or test print jobs You cannot import data if there are these jobs If import is taking too long try importing data after your equipment has entered sleep mode Q Setting up Address Book Address Book Import Method Addition Overwrite 1 2 2 S Name Browse Import Item name Description Import Method Specify the import method of the address book Addition Select this to append the imported information to the existing data Overwrite Select this to replace the existing data with the imported information File Name Select the address book file to be imported Browse button Allows you to select the address book file Import button Imports the selected address book file Maintenance Item List 277 LJ Setting up MailBoxes MailBoxes File Name Import Item name Description 1 File Name Select the mailbox file to be imported Browse button Allows you to select the mailbox file Import button Imports the selected mailbox file LI Setting up Template Template 1 Import Method Addition Overwrite 2 File Name Import Item name Description Import Method Specify the import method of the template Addition Select this to append the imported information to the existing data Overwrite Select this to replace the existing data with the imported
428. sending scanned images when it fails 1minutes is set as the default When the Number of Retry and Retry interval options are changed the Number of Retry and Retry interval options in the Internet Fax settings are also changed P 200 Setting up InternetFax Setting Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation Default Subject Select whether to set the E mail subject to the factory default or a desired string e Factory Default Select this to display the BCC address entry column e lt Entry box gt Enter the desired subject 10 Add the date and time to the Subject Select whether to append or not date and time to the E mail subject This is set as a default e Enable Select this to append date and time to the subject e Disable Select this to not append date and time to the subject 11 Editing of Subject Select whether to allow or not editing of the E mail subject e Enable Select this to allow the user to edit the E mail subject e Disable Select this to not allow the user to edit the E mail subject 12 Default Body Strings Enter the body text that will be automatically entered in the Body box when users operate Scan to Email from the touch panel This sets only the default body text so that it can be changed on each operation by users 13 Body Strings Transmission Select whether the body strings will be sent or not
429. ser s Manual Troubleshooting Guide e The equipment cannot eject the paper to the output bin Cover Open This icon indicates a cover such as the front cover or Automatic Duplexing Unit Cover is open Tray Open This icon indicates the tray is open Toner Empty This icon indicates no toner is left For information on resolving the error refer to Replacing the Toner Cartridge in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Waste Toner Full This icon indicates the waste toner box is full and requires replacing For information on resolving the error refer to Replacing the Waste Toner Box in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Paper Empty This icon indicates no paper is left in a tray For information on resolving the error refer to the User s Manual Setup Guide Paper Misfeed This icon indicates a paper misfeed occurred It also indicates the location of the paper misfeed For information on resolving the error refer to When a Paper Jam Occurs in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Staples Empty This icon indicates no staples are left in the Finisher For information on resolving the error refer to Refilling the Staples in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Guide Call for Service Contact your service representative to have the equipment inspected Displayed Icons 2 7 2 Device Tab Page 28 Displayed Icons Job Status Tab Page Using TopAccess end users can display and
430. ser name in the Attribute type of User Name box the E mail address schema to set as sender address in the Attribute type of Email Address and the domain name used when the user name is not found in the Domain Name box The equipment searches the authenticated user name in Attribute type of User Name of the LDAP server If the registered user name has been found in the specified schema the schema value set in Attribute type of Email Address becomes the sender address If the registered user name has not been found in the specified schema the format set in User Name Mail Domain Name becomes the sender address From Address cannot be edited in Scan to Email Select this check box if you do not want to allow users to edit the From Address Security Item List 253 Item name Description From Name Specify the From Name Account Name of From Address From Name of Email Setting Select this to specify the From Name in the Account Name of From Address From Name of Email Setting format From Name of Email setting Select this to set the From Name which has been specified in E mail settings User Name of LDAP Select this to set the From Name as the E mail address found in the LDAP server Select the LDAP server in the LDAP Server box enter the schema to search the user name in Attribute type of User Name and the schema of the from address to set as the From Name in Attribute type or From Name
431. ss policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and EWB submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup security Maintenance Registration Setup General Netwurk Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version 2 The EWB submenu page is displayed 4 To register a server for the EWB function enter the server address and then click Add Server Registration Setting The server is registered To register more than one server repeat this procedure 5 Click Save on the EWB submenu Setup How to Set and How to Operate 243 LI Deleting a server 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and EWB submenu Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Netwak Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version gt The EWB submenu page is displayed 4 To delete a server registered for the EWB function select the server that you want to delete and then click Delete
432. ssary to reboot this equipment to enable the DHCPv 6 function Use Stateful Address Use the Stateful address issued from DHCPV6 server e Use DHCPV6 Server for IP Address Select whether or not the IPv6 address which is issued from the DHCPV6 server is used for this equipment Use DHCPv6 Server for options Select whether or not the optional information IPv6 address for the DNS server etc except the IPv6 address for this equipment which is issued from the DHCPV6 server is used on this equipment FQDN Option The FQDN option is available if Use DHCPv6 Server for IP Address is selected Select Server or Client for Update Method if using the FQDN option Server is set as the default IP Address A stateful address Prefix Length and Gateway obtained from DHCPv6 Server are displayed LJ Setting up IPX SPX You can set the IPX SPX protocol to enable the communication over IPX SPX The IPX SPX must be configured to enable Novell printing with NetWare server 5 1 6 0 6 5 over IPX SPX IPX SPX Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings IPX SPX 1 Enable IPX SPX Enable 2 Frame Type Auto Sense 3 Actual Frame Item name Description Enable IPX SPX Select whether the IPX SPX protocol is enabled or disabled Enable this when configuring Novell printing over the IPX SPX network Disable is set as the default Frame Type Select the desired frame type for
433. stration tab Item List le ceeee sees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeees 302 PUDE TEMplale SOWINGS win iors viiaten te a ae a a a R aden 302 UDI IMIG TUE cocirier a a a a aa a a i 304 Fax Received Forward and InternetFAX Received Forward settingS cccscceeeeeeees 307 Extended Field DS NIMINON sz sescs sucks ccesestseneucttesaaianes aac evencs aeckedoseestaicn wsigeesa cetanteace wtbane eaten 317 ANMGFROMa Ne UG ans Seiten ertice ee ceen nda asset oes nai need saranda tain eis bana sad ead date aemtandietin aateand 321 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate cceeeee 322 Registering public templates cccccceccecceeecececeeceeceeeeceesaeeceecaeesaeeceeeeeesaeeeeesaeesaeeseeeas 322 Registering Fax and Internet Fax received forwatd ccccceccceecceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaaes 328 Chapter9 My Account Tab Page My Account Tab Page OVervieW ccccscccesesseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeneseneeeaeecaneseneseaasoaesneseneaes 336 IMV FACCOUMME CTI NISC Socata ies Seder a oo aa ecnnes naan aaa ian 336 Chapter 10 Functional Setups Setting up Meta Scan Function iiisesiicsiceciieccntcivaieisticcet eased Qientetanidicatendeuanenniveieeciveeutncea 342 Procedure Tor USING Mela SCAN sicsiieiin reste icine ee decd lei ida 342 Checking Meta Scan Enabler cccccccccccseccsseceeeceeeecceceeceuecsucecacecacecsueseueecseecseeseeesaas 342 E ditn XME TOrma
434. t When using DDNS and the IP address is assigned using DHCP enable 006 DNS Servers and 015 DNS Domain Name in the DHCP Server s Scope Options or Server Options ixi File Action View Help DHCI pti e When using DDNS make sure the Dynamic updates option is set to Nonsecure and secure for Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 for the Forward Lookup Zones and Reversed Lookup Zones If the setting of Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 is other than Nonsecure and secure for this DDNS function you need to set the correct primary login name and primary password to update the DNS server by DDNS If you do not want to use DDNS such as managed by a primary and secondary login name and password you need to add the equipment s host name manually in the Forward and Reversed Lookup Zone Forward Lookup Zones Reversed Lookup Zones Windows 2008 Server Windows 2008 Server WINS Zone Transfers Security Name Serves WINSR Zone Transfers Securty Start of Authority SOA Name Servers General Start of Authority SOA Status Running Pause Status Running Pause Type Active Directory Integrated Change Type Active Directory Integrated Change Replication All DNS servers in this domain hange Replication All DNS servers in this domain Change Data is stored in Active Directory Data is stored in Active Directory To set aging scavenging properties click Ag
435. t Date Format Page Number Format File Composition of the attached file the setting of the Save as file is applied 1 5 V From Address cannot be edited in Scan to Email pf maama scription O From Address Enter the E mail address of this equipment The From Address must be entered to enable E mail transmission However the E mail address of the user who is logged in to this equipment will be automatically set if any user management settings apart from MFP local authentication are enabled For more information about User Management Setting see the following section P 135 Administration Tab Page From Name Enter the name of this equipment Message Header Inbound FAX Select TTI to be used as a subject when the received Internet Fax is forwarded Routing File Format Black Select the file format of files to be sent when scanning in black mode e TIFF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page TIFF file e TIFF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page TIFF files PDF Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page PDF file PDF Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page PDF files XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files 198 Setup Item List Item name
436. t as the default OffRamp Security Select whether the Offramp Security is enabled or disabled When this is enabled this equipment cancels the offramp gateway transmissions that are forwarding to the fax numbers not registered in the Address Book of this equipment This can prevent the unauthorized offramp gateway transmission Enable is set as the default OffRamp Print Select whether this equipment should print documents sent using the offramp gateway transmission When this is enabled this equipment automatically prints documents sent using offramp gateway transmission so that they can be confirmed Enable is set as the default 160 Setup Item List LJ Setting up POP3 Network Service In POP3 Network Service you can specify the POP3 server to receive an Internet Fax and E mails POP3 Network Service Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable POPS Client Enable v Enable SSL Disable POP3 Server Address Lthentication Disable v Type POP3 Login AUTO Account Name PS SO Scan Rate 5 Minutes Port Number 110 SSL Port Number 995 SSOCONDUARWN POP3 Client Connection Timeout 1 180 30 Seconds Item name Description Enable POP3 Client Select whether retrieving an Internet Fax and an E mail from the POP3 server is enabled or disabled Enable is set as the default Enable SSL Select whether the SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled or dis
437. t field9 gt lt field10 name FIELDNAME 10 gt VALUE10 lt field10 gt lt field11 name FIELDNAME 11 gt VALUE 11 lt field11 gt lt field12 name FIELDNAME 12 gt VALUE 1 2 lt field12 gt lt field13 name FIELDNAME 13 gt VALUE 1 3 lt field13 gt lt field14 name FIELDNAME 14 gt VALUE 14 lt field14 gt lt field15 name FIELDNAME 15 gt VALUE15 lt field15 gt lt field16 name FIELDNAME 16 gt VALUE16 lt field16 gt lt field17 name FIELDNAME 1 7 gt VALUE 1 7 lt field1 7 gt lt field18 name FIELDNAME 18 gt VALUE18 lt field18 gt lt field19 name FIELDNAME 19 gt VALUE 1 9 lt field19 gt lt field20 name FIELDNAME20 gt VALUE20 lt field20 gt lt field21 name FIELDNAME21 gt VALUE21 lt field21 gt lt field22 name FIELDNAME22 gt VALUE22 lt field22 gt lt field23 name FIELDNAME23 gt VALUE23 lt field23 gt lt field24 name FIELDNAME24 gt VALUE24 lt field24 gt lt field25 name FIELDNAME25 gt VALUE25 lt field25 gt lt user_input gt lt mfp_metadata gt Q Setting for saving meta data You can specify the location to save meta data and the file name by adding the following elements to the XML file Specifying the location to save meta data Protocol Format SMB lt metadata_file_path gt file server name path lt metadata_file_path gt FTP lt metadata_file_path gt ftp server name path lt me
438. t WG tied cust ctere tae ie areca a ee A mca c iad 343 Registering XML format Mernyssrrinn pane ere eE 347 Registering Extended Field Definition ccc ccccccecccseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee esse eeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeees 348 Registering templates for Meta Scan cccccecccscecseeceeeceeeecaeeceeeeeeecueeseeesaeeeseessaeesaeees 351 WNT rn Gal Miecesien tans tases aa A Saree ae te ta eat anne eee 354 CHECKING 1OGS OT IVICA Searas a tatidanukeltite a a 354 Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP 355 CONTENTS 5 Exporting the role information Setting file cccccccsceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaeeesaneeeees 355 Defining the role information Setting file cc ccccecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeessaeeeaneesaaees 355 Importing the role information Setting file ccc cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaes 356 Enabling the role base access SeTLING ccccccssecesscenseeseeeseseseuecoueesseesouecousensecseateentenens 356 Chapter 11 APPENDIX Installing Certificates for a Client PC 0 eee ceeee sees eeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeseeneseneeeaeseaeeeenesenenes 358 6 CONTENTS Overview This chapter provides an overview of the TopAccess functions TODAGCCESS OV CNV I OW orioa a cao saneeaeece eaves sets 8 TODACCESS Conditions manen a eee ee eee 9 Accessing TODACGCESS ii dersncaciienciartasasanriauaviciatdacteiereud eaenuaass
439. t and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List The External Interface Enabler is required to use the EWB Embedded Web Browser function LL P 211 Setting up Home Page Setting LL P 211 Setting up Proxy Setting iy L P 212 Setting up Server Registration Setting LL P 212 Setting up URL List for Menu Screen and Hard Button LJ P 212 Add New URL screen Q Setting up Home Page Setting You can specify the home page for the EWB function Home Page Setting Embedded Web Browser Home Page http localhost pf em name O Description 1 HomePage Enter the URL of the home page LI Setting up Proxy Setting You can set the proxy for the EWB function Proxy Setting Host Name Port Number Exception URL Use automatic configuration script Enable v URL Item name Description Host Name Enter the host name of the proxy server Port Number Enter the port number of the proxy server Exception URL Enter URLs which do not use the proxy server delimited with a semicolon Use automatic configuration script Enable or disable the automatic configuration script URL Specify the location of the PAC file by URL for the automatic configuration script Note the following points for the PAC file e Be sure to enter the protocol e Do not use
440. t are to be registered in the list Item name Description Remote Setting DOR eg ee hlame Protocal Serer Mame Metwork Path Login User Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Password Retype Password Save button sampleOl SWB FTP FIPS NetWare IPKISPX NetWare TCP IP Fot WumberfiCommancdy W192 166 0 1scan Saves the specified network folder for Save as file destination Cancel button Cancels the settings Name Enter the name of the network folder for Save as file destination A oO ND Protocol Select the protocol to be used for uploading a file to the network folder e SMB Select this to send a file to the network folder using the SMB protocol e FTP Select this to send a file to the FTP server e FTPS Select this to send a file to the FTP server using FTP over SSL e NetWare IPX SPX Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the IPX SPX protocol e NetWare TCP IP Select this to send a scanned file to the NetWare file server using the TCP IP protocol Server Name When you select FTP as the protocol enter the FTP server name or IP address where a scanned file will be sent For example to send a scanned file to the ftp 192 168 1 1 user scanned FTP folder in the FTP server enter 192 168 1 1 in this box When you select NetWare IPX SPX as the protocol enter the NetWare file server name or T
441. t number with one of the other network settings to the SSL port number in HTTP settings while SSL on HTTP is enabled you will not be able to access TopAccess and the e Filing web utility If you make a mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number Setup Item List 157 Q Setting up SMTP Client In SMTP Client you can enable or disable SMTP transmission for sending the Internet Fax and E mails A From Address setting is also required to send Internet Fax and E mails For information about the From Address setting see the following sections LL P 231 Setting up E mail settings LL P 233 Setting up InternetFax settings The From Address can be also determined automatically when the User Management Setting is enabled For more information about User Management Setting see the following section P 135 Administration Tab Page SMTP Client Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable SMTP Client Enable v Enable SSL Disable SSLTLS STARTTLS SMTP Server Address POP Before SMTP Disable v Authentication Disable X Login Name Password Maximum Email InternetF ax Size 30 mB Port Number 25 SSC ONODUARWN SMTP Client Connection Timeout 1 180 30 Seconds Item name Description Enable SMTP Client When this is enabled this equipment sends an Internet Fax and an E mail to th
442. t port using the SSL specify the following URL for the IPP print port https lt IP Address gt lt SSL Port Number gt Print Example https 192 168 53 204 443 Print e Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols 6 SSL Port Number Enter the port number for SSL You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 443 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you make a mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number 7 SSL URL Display the SSL URL for IPP printing You cannot change the SSL URL for IPP printing This SSL URL should be set as the print port when users set up the printer driver for IPP printing if the SSL for IPP printing is enabled 8 Printer Name Enter the printer name for IPP printing You can enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash The MFP name is set as the default 9 Authentication Enable or disable the authentication for creating the IPP queue on the client computers When this is enabled the dialog box to enter a user name and password will be displayed when a user creates the IPP print port e Disable Select this to disable the authentication e Basic Select this to enable t
443. t whether the body strings will be sent or not 200 Setup Item List E Printer e Filing settings Tip The Printer e Filing submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List LJ Setting up Printer e Filing Job Enforcement Continue Printer e Filing Job Enforcement Continue Automatic Change Of Paper Source Enforcement Continue llleqal Paper Auto output bin change Cascade Print Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty Automatic Change Of Paper Specify whether or not to change the paper source automatically when the size of the Source original and the paper in the paper source do not match e ON Select this to change the paper source and continue processing the job e OFF Select this to stop the job Enforcement Continue Illegal Specify whether or not to continue processing the job forcibly when the specified output bin Paper is incorrect e ON Select this to print to the specified output bin e OFF Select this to stop the job Auto output bin Change Cascade Specify whether or not to switch the receiving tray automatically Print e ON Select this to continue processing the job by switching the receiving tray e OFF Select this to stop the job Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty Specify whether t
444. tadata_file_path gt FIPS lt metadata_file_path gt ftps server name path lt metadata_file_path gt NetWare Binary mode lt metadata_file_path gt server name path lt metadata_file_path gt NetWare NDS mode lt metadata_file_path gt Tree Context file_share lt metadata_file_path gt Example Protocol SMB External server 192 168 1 1 Save folder metadata Format lt metadata_file_path gt file 192 168 1 1 metadata lt metadata_file_path gt Ensure that the protocol is the same as the protocol for saving the Meta Scan image file You can check the protocol for saving the Meta Scan image file in Destination of Save as file Setting which is set for the template Specifying a meta data file name lt metadata_file_name gt file name xml lt metadata_file_name gt Example File name Sample_MetaData xml Format lt metadata_file name gt Sample_MetaData xml lt metadata_file_ name gt Tip You can use an XML format file variable for the file name of the meta data Example using the date variables DATE lt metadata_file_ name gt Sample_MetaData_ DATE xml lt metadata_file_ name gt For more information on variables see the following P 343 Variables of XML format files 346 Setting up Meta Scan Function E Registering XML format file This section describes how to register a XML format file When using applications that interact with Meta Scan follow the instructions of the application vendor to set the XML
445. tended field property 318 Registration Administration tab Item List LJ Extended Fields Properties screen You can register up to 25 extended field properties P 351 Registering templates for Meta Scan Extended Field Properties Save Cancel Delete f El Name Dispi Name isplay V Mandatory Input Hidden Attribute Input Method Numerical Decimal Text List Address Password Date List tems Add Minimum Length Minimum alue 3 nn faut alue Password CAY Y MM DD Required Item name Description Save button Creates an extended field property with the entered data Cancel button Cancels the settings Field Name Specify the extended field name Display Specify how to display the extended field on the control panel Name Enter the caption of the extended field name for the display on the control panel You can enter up to 256 characters Enter the Box number where a received document will be stored Mandatory Input Select this check box if the extended field is a mandatory entry item Hidden Attribute Select this check box if the extended field is a hidden item on the control panel Input Method Select the type of an extended field e Numerical Select this to create an extended field as an integer value e Decimal Select this to create an extended field as a decimal value Text Select this
446. ter View your active networks ____________ Connect or disconnect je Network Access type Internet Work network Connections Local Area Connection Change your networking settings Ey Set up a new connection or network Set up a wireless broadband dial up ad hoc or VPN connection or set up a router or access point Connect to a network Connect or reconnect to a wireless wired dial up or VPN network connection Choose homegroup and sharing optio Access files and printers located on a computers or change sharing settings Troubleshoot problems Diagnose and repair network problems or get troubleshooting information See also HomeGroup Internet Options Windows Firewall The HomeGroup window appears 5 Click What is a network location 2 D e gt Control Panel Network and Internet HomeGroup is SEEN Eiran AE A Share with other home computers running Windows 7 a This computer can t connect to a homegroup a To create or join a homegroup your computer s network location must be set to Home What is a network locatio With a homegroup you can share fil d printers with other computers running Windows 7 You can also stream media to devices The homegroup is protected with a password and you ll always be able to choose what you share with the group Tell me more about homegroups Change advanced sharing settings Start the HomeGroup troubleshooter The
447. ter Disable v Import New Converter Current Converter Delete Export FileName Fle Size Pate o You can set the following in this page P 210 Print Data Converter settings 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes Setup How to Set and How to Operate 241 6 Click OK to apply the changes Message from webpage A 2 Are you sure Cancel The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status 242 Setup How to Set and How to Operate WE Configuring the EWB function You can configure the EWB Embedded Web Browser function which displays web pages on the control panel from the EWB submenu under the Setup menu The EWB function is available only when the External Interface Enabler is installed on this equipment LL P 243 Registering a server LL P 244 Deleting a server Q Registering a server 1 Start TopAccess acce
448. the sys scan folder in the NetWare file server enter sys scan You can enter up to 128 alphanumerical characters and symbols Login User Name Enter the login user name to access an SMB server FTP server or NetWare file server if required When you select FTP as the protocol an anonymous log in is assumed if you leave this box blank You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters and symbols Password Enter the password to access an SMB server FTP server or NetWare file server if required You can enter up to 32 alphanumerical characters symbols and spaces A single space only can also be entered Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation 5 Destination Remote 2 Registration Tab Page Overview Select this check box to save the scanned file to a network folder How you can set this item depends on how the user with administrator privileges configured Remote 2 in the Save as file submenu under the Setup menu If the user with administrator privileges specified Remote 2 to use only the specified network folder you can only select Use Administrator Setting The protocol and the network path are displayed below this item If the Remote 2 allows you to specify a network folder you can specify the network folder settings See the description of the Remote 1 option for each item Item name Description File Name Select how the scanned file will be named Select DocYYMMDD t
449. the POP3 server using SSL The SSL port number depends on the port setting in the POP3 server Generally 995 is used POP3 Client Connection Enter a timeout period for quitting communication when no response is received from the Timeout 1 180 POP3 server Specify within the range from 1 to 180 seconds 30 is set as the default LJ Setting up FTP Client In FTP Client you can specify the default port number used for the Save as file using the FTP protocol FTP Client Cancel Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings SSL Setting Accept all certificates without CA v Default Port Number 21 SSL Setting Specify the certificate used in the SSL e Disable Select this to disable the SSL e Verify with imported CA certification s Select this to use the registered certificate s e Accept all certificates without CA Select this to use all certificates Default Port Number Enter the port number to access the FTP site The port number depends on the port setting in the FTP site You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 21 is used 162 Setup Item List LJ Setting up FTP Server In FTP Server you can enable or disable the FTP server functions FTP Server Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Enable FTP Server Enable Enable SSL Disable v Default Port Number 21
450. the group assigned to the user who is accessing TopAccess Department Number Displays the department number registered by the user who is accessing TopAccess PanelUl Language Select the display language for the control panel PanelUl Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard layout on the control panel Quota Setting Displays the output restriction settings of the user who is accessing TopAccess Quota If the Black Quota Setting is ON the remaining number that can be output is displayed Default Quota If the Quota Setting is ON the assigned default value is displayed Print Counter Displays the number of pages printed by print operations and E mail reception Internet Fax reception Scan Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Values for the small size and large size are displayed according to the paper size specified on your device Fax Communication Counter Displays the communication record LJ Change Password screen Changes the password of the user who is accessing TopAccess Change Password 1 Sa 2 l 3 Old Password 4 New Password 5 Retype Password Item name Description Save button Saves the password changes Cancel button Cancels the operation Old Password Enter the current password New Password Enter the new password Retype Password Enter the same password again for a confirmation
451. the group owner name Tips Click the name of a registered user name to check and edit the registered templates LL P 86 Registering and editing private template groups Click Undefined to register templates LL P 53 Group Properties screen e Click All Groups or Defined Groups to change how private template groups are displayed e See the following descriptions for how to register private template groups and how to create templates CL Q P 86 Registering and editing private template groups P 89 Registering or editing templates 52 Registration Tab Page Overview LJ Group Properties screen You can register a new private template group Group Properties Group Information No Name User Name 7 Save Cancel el eyun Y f Number Mane User Name Notification Password CON OO ORWNDN Retype Password Item name Description Save button Creates a private template group with the entered data The Private Templates screen is displayed and you can edit the template you are registering P 54 Private Templates screen Cancel button Cancels the settings Number Displays the private group number Name Enter the name of the private group User Name Enter the owner name of the private group Notification Enter the E mail address to be displayed as the default recipient when notifi
452. tic Start Disable Save as fe 4 a OFF Single Black 200dpi Text Auto Auto 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OFF OFF The confirmation dialog box appears 6 Click OK essage trom webpage The template setting is reset and the template will be returned to an undefined one 326 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 8 Administration Tab Page Resetting all public templates To reset all public templates perform the following procedure 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Registration menu and Public Template submenu e Filing Logout Registration Administration Registration Registration 2 The Public Template submenu page is displayed 4 Click Reset Registration oa SS cc Pubic NS Punic Template Groups Panel View Listview Please click a template picture to edit Jump to 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 37 42 43 48 49 54 55 60 Templates 1 6 4 COPY MODE FAX MODE 4 SCAN TO SCAN TO 4 ofe Jemma FILE 4 SCAN TO amp SCAN TO Sp erins mc FILESE MAIL Go to top of this page The confirmation dialog box appears 5 Click OK All public templates are reset Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate 327 WE Registering Fax and Internet Fax received forward You can forward receiv
453. ting an LPR queue 1 Select a radio button of a queue that you want to delete and click Delete Raw Job Setting A EA 2 Satan ttn freee eave Sn nn eo en The confirmation dialog box appears 9 Click OK The selected queue is deleted 238 Setup How to Set and How to Operate W Setting up Print Service settings You can configure print services such as Raw TCP Print LPD Print IPP Print FTP Print NetWare Print and Email Print from the Print Service submenu under the Setup menu Some settings may not be reflected on the touch panel immediately after saving them The settings will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an Auto Clear time period Setting the Print Service settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Print Service submenu Logout Device Job Status Registration User Management Administration General etwork Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printerfe Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Save Cancel 2 The Print Service submenu page is displayed 4 In the Print Service submenu page set the Print Service settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General N
454. tion Administration tab Item List 313 LJ Setting up Email Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward In the Email Setting page you can specify the content of the E mail document to be sent You can specify the destination when you have selected InternetFax as the forwarding agent Email Setting Required Scanned from Sa vice Name Template Name Date Time 1 Subject 2 ns Fro Ac ESS 3 From Name a 5 File Format PDF Multi Encryption User Password ppeonecescceonsced Retype Password Bepppprerprrrrr Master Password Retype Password pepper Encryption Level 128 bit AES 6 ee Encryption Authority C Printing Change of Documents _ Content Copying or Extraction Content Extraction for accessibility Format FileName Date Page Comment File Name Date None Page Adigits Sub ID Auto v Fragment Message Size No Fragmentation v Subject This sets the subject of the E mail documents Select Scanned from Device Name Template Name Date Time to automatically apply the subject or enter the desired subject in the box If you manually enter the subject the subject will be Subject Date by automatically adding the date From Address Enter the E mail address of the sender When the recipient replies the message will be sent to this E mail address From Name Enter the sender name of the E mail document Body Enter the
455. tion No Fragmentation is set as the default Fax Setting Private template In the Fax Setting page you can specify how the fax will be sent Fax Setting Save Cancel Reset Preview Resolution Original Mode Exposure Transmission Type ECM Quality Transmit SUBJSEP Polling Password Fax Number Security Delayed Transmit Priority Transmit Item name Description 1 Preview Select whether or not to preview before sending a fax e ON Select this to preview e OFF Select this not to preview 64 Registration Tab Page Overview Item name Resolution Description Select the resolution for sending faxes e Standard Select the Standard mode as the normal resolution This mode is suitable when you are frequently transmitting text documents with normal size characters e Fine Select the Fine mode as the normal resolution This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents with small size characters or fine drawings e Ultra Fine Select the Ultra Fine mode as the normal resolution This mode is suitable when you are transmitting documents with very small size characters or detailed drawings Original Mode Select the image quality mode for sending faxes e Text Select the Text mode as the normal image quality mode This mode is suitable when you are transmitting text documents e Text Photo Select the Text Photo mode
456. tion setting file for Windows domain authentication and LDAP authentication Click the Browse button to select the file to import and click Open Check the file name and click the Import button Department Code You can import department code from a file Click the Browse button to select the file to import and click Open Select the import method among Overwrite Addition or Addition and Clear Counter and then click the Import button User Management Tab Page Overview 133 7 User Management Tab Page 134 User Management Tab Page Overview Administration Tab Page This section describes administrative functions which allow you to configure devices and network and manage users and groups from TopAccess access policy mode Setup KEN LIS beanna a nee aeusueeanaedaeutens 136 Setup How to Set and How to Operate 0 cccccscceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeensseeeeeeeeseeesanes 215 Security tem Listari a aaa ra Naaraan 247 Security How to Set and How to Operate ccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeceneneneceeeeenseeesenseceeseeeeseness 263 Maintenance teni Listassa tei E a a eran 274 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate ccccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseneseneseneseeeees 290 Registration Administration tab Item List eee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseneeeenees 302 Registration Administration tab How to Set and How to Operate
457. tment Name Dept Code Total Printing Total Scanning 123416 234517 345616 Departm J tName04 456719 Departm 567610 Departm a 678c71 Departm J itNameO 789C 2 Departm fth 690173 Departm 9012474 Departm 012275 100 Undefine Got top ofthis fage Fax Transmission Fax Reception Departm J itName01 Departm J itNameO2 Departm J itNameO3 Wl olny ai nl amp wpm OPoOPoPoPoPo oy o oy ojy o OPOPoPoPoPo oy oP oy ojo OPOoPoPoyPopPo oy op oj ojo Item name Description New button Allows you to add a new department P 129 Department Information screen 128 Reset All Counters button Resets counters for all departments Set Registered All Quotas button Initializes quotas for all departments Delete All button Deletes the registered department Number Displays the registration number of the department Department Name Displays the department name Click a department name link to check the department management information P 130 Department Information Edit screen Dept Code Displays the department code Total Printing Displays the total number of printed pages of the department Total Scanning Displays the total number of scanned pages of the department Fax Transmission Displays the total number of transmitted fax pages of the department Fax Reception Displays the total number of received fax pages of t
458. to save Private Hold Proof and invalid Jobs 14 Days v LT gt A4 LD lt gt A3 Enable v Wide A4 Mode for PCL Disable wv Restriction for Print Job None Default Raw Job Setting Raw Jobs Duplex Printing Disable wv Raw Jobs Default Paper Size AA X Raw Jobs Default Paper Type Plain Raw Jobs Default Orientation Portrait v Raw Jobs Default Stapling OFF Raw Jobs Default Output Tray Receiving Tray v PCL Form Line 12 0 You can set the following in this page A P 202 Setting up General Setting LO P 203 Setting up Default Raw Job Setting P 204 Setting up Raw Job Setting 236 Setup How to Set and How to Operate Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer x Q Are you sure OK Cancel The setting value may not be reflected on the screen even after changing the setting by clicking Save if you are using Internet Explorer however the new setting is properly applied In such a case click the submenu to refresh the screen and display the current setting status Q Setting up Raw Job Setting
459. tocol Select whether the SMB protocol is enabled or disabled e Enable Select this to enable SMB e Disable Select this to disable SMB Restriction Specify restrictions on SMB e None Select this to not specify restrictions on SMB e Print Share Select this to enable the file sharing service using SMB but disable SMB printing File Share Select this to enable SMB printing but disable the file sharing service using SMB NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS name of this equipment The equipment uses MFP lt NIC Serial Number gt as the default NetBIOS name You can enter only alphanumerical characters and a hyphen for NetBIOS names If you use any other characters a warning message will be displayed Logon Enter the workgroup or domain that this equipment joins e Workgroup To include the equipment in the workgroup enter the workgroup name All client computers can access this equipment without a user name and password Domain Select this and enter the domain name when the equipment will log on in the domain Any client computers which are not members of the domain will need a valid user name and password to access this equipment Use this to enhance access security to this equipment For workgroup and domain names you can use only alphanumerical characters and symbols other than the following i lt gt F If you use any other characters a warning message will be displayed
460. tomization Architecture Required Required 2 Required Required Web Service Print 1 Inthe HTTP Network Service FTP Server IPP Print and Off Device Customization Architecture settings if you create a self signed Required Required Required Required Required Required certificate for the equipment you need to install the self signed certificate to the client PC If you select to install an imported device certificate to the equipment also install the CA certificate to the client PC 2 For Windows Vista XP you can enable SSL by installing certificates only in the equipment In this case the following message appears when you operate the system Select the specified item There is a problem with this website s security certificate appears If you are using Windows Vista select Continue to this website not recommended The security certificate presented by this website was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust Do you want to proceed appears if you are using Windows XP Select Yes If you want to further enhance the security install certificates also in the client PC P 272 Installing CA certificate When you install the User Certificate in this equipment it is recommended to connect this equipment and a client computer using a crossing cable for ensuring security Security How to Set and How to Operate 263 L Creating e
461. tration Tab Page 7 Click Import e Filing Logout Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Serice Notification Languages System Updates Re eR 66S lt 3 REFRESH Address Book Import Method Addition Overwrite File Name F Users User001 Desktop ADDR_110 import The data are imported to the address book 298 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate LJ Exporting the address book data You can export address information for use in another TopAccess address book or another address book program Tip The group data are not included in the exported address book data Exporting address book data in the CSV XML format 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Export submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration User Management Administration Maintenance M1 Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Maintenance The Export submenu page is displayed 4 Select the file format of the address book CSV Select this to create the file in the CSV format XML Select this t
462. ts Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Maintenance menu and Notification submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance N 1 Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot You can upload e STUDIO6550c Series client software to the controller This allows end users to install the software into their system from the TopAccess Install Software link located atthe bottom ofthe TopAccess page Upload Files Driver Files v The following are the required files Upload The Notification submenu page is displayed In Email Setting select the check box Notify administrator at Email Address 1 to 3 to enable the notifications and enter the administrator s E mail address where the notifications are to be sent e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot Save Notification Setting it Setting tify administrator at Email Address 1 administraton e
463. tting LX P 154 Setting up SMB Session LX P 169 Setting up LLTD Session Setup How to Set and How to Operate 217 P 156 Setting up NetWare Session P 172 Setting up IP Security 5 Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings Note that they will not be returned to the factory default by clicking Cancel This can only clear the changes and restore the current settings before saving the changes 6 Click OK to apply the changes Windows Internet Explorer maj When this configuration is changed the network connection will be disconnected Would you like to continue Cancel This equipment starts initializing the network interface card to apply the changes During the initialization of the network interface card the network will not be available TopAccess will display Please restart after waiting a few minutes The touch panel will display NETWORK INITIALIZING When this message disappears TopAccess will once again be available 218 Setup How to Set and How to Operate E SNMP V3 settings LJ P 219 Registering or editing SNMP V3 user information LJ P 221 Exporting SNMP V3 user information LL P 223 Deleting SNMP V3 user information LJ Registering or editing SNMP V3 user information 1 Cli
464. tting Fax Internet Fax Received Forward In the InternetFax Setting page you can specify the content of the Internet Fax to be sent You can specify the destination when you have selected InternetFax as the forwarding agent InternetFax Setting Required Scanned from Device Name Template Name Date Time Subject j DE E 2 From Address User example com From Name User 1 A v 5 File Format TIFF S Fragment Page Size No Fragmentation v 1 Subject This sets the subject of the Internet Faxes Select Scanned from Device Name Template Name Date Time to automatically apply the subject or enter the desired subject in the box If you manually enter the subject the subject will be Subject Date by automatically adding the date From Address Enter the E mail address of the sender When the recipient replies to a received document the message will be sent to this E mail address From Name Enter the sender name of the Internet Fax Body Enter the body message of the Internet Fax You can enter up to 1000 characters including spaces File Format Select the file format of the scanned image Only TIFF S TIFF FX Profile S format can be selected Fragment Page Size Select the size of the message fragmentation Registration Administration tab Item List 309 Q Setting up Save as file Setting Fax InternetFAX Received Forward In the Save
465. tting gt lt RoleSet gt lt Condition gt lt AttributeName gt department lt AttributeName gt lt Attribute VValue gt Sales lt AttributeValue gt lt Condition gt lt Condition gt lt AttributeName gt title lt AttributeName gt lt Attribute Value gt SeniorManager lt AttributeValue gt lt Condition gt lt Role gt Print lt Role gt lt RoleSet gt lt AnyOtherUser gt User lt AnyOtherUser gt lt RoleSetting gt E Importing the role information setting file See the following page for how to import the role information setting file P 133 Import Tip To change the setting import the role information setting file again E Enabling the role base access setting In order to use the imported role information setting file enabling the role base access setting is required See the following page for the procedure P 249 Setting up User Authentication Setting 356 Using the Attribute of the External Authentication as a Role of the MFP APPENDIX This chapter contains the following contents Installing Certificates for a Client PC o oo eee ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeneseeneeeaeeseseesaeeeaneseanesenessaneees 358 Installing Certificates for a Client PC Configuring the Microsoft Management Console The following describes a configuration on Windows Vista The procedure is the same when other versions of Windows are used 1 Open the command prompt type mmc and press the Enter key Microsoft Windows Versio
466. tting up SMTP Client P 160 Setting up SMTP Server P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service P 162 Setting up FTP Client P 163 Setting up FTP Server P 164 Setting up SLP Session P 165 Setting up SNMP Network Service P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting P 169 Setting up LLTD Session P 170 Setting up Wake Up Setting P 172 Setting up IP Security TCP IP Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings Ethernet Speed Duplex Mode Host Name Address Mode Obtain a Domain Name automatically AUTO 100MB MFPO 7088510 Static IP Enable Obtain a Domain Server Address automatically Enable v Obtain a WINS Server Address automatically Obtain a SMTP Server Address automatically Obtain a POP3 Server Address automatically Obtain a SNTP Server Address automatically IP Conflict Detect IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Ethernet Speed Duplex Mode Enable Disable v Disable v Disable v Enable 157 69 255 255 157 69 Select the ethernet speed AUTO 100MB or AUTO is set as the default e When you select a specific ethernet speed you must select the same one as set in the connected network If you do not know the ethernet speed that must be used select AUTO 100MB or AUTO e If the network is not stable power OFF the equipment then ON Host Name Enter the host name of your equ
467. tton Cancels adding a URL URL Name Enter the URL name to be registered URL Enter the URL to be registered Assignment for Hard Button Select a hard button on the control panel that starts the EWB function 212 Setup Item List E Off Device Customization Architecture settings Set ODCA Off Device Customization Architecture when you are linking external application software to services provided by this equipment For details refer to the application software manual Tip The ODCA submenu can be accessed from the Setup menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Setup menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 136 Setup Item List LL P 213 Setting up Network LL P 213 Setting up Configuration LI Setting up Network Off Device Customization Architecture Setting Network Enable Port Enable wos Port Number 49629 Enable SSL Port Disable SSL Port Number 49630 Item name Description Enable Port Select whether the external connection is enabled or disabled Port Number Specify the port number where the external connection is enabled Enable SSL Port Select whether SSL is enabled or disabled for the external connection SSL Port Number Specify the SSL port number where the external connection is enabled LI Setting up Configuration Confi
468. ture sends a document at a slower speed than normal so the transmission will be less affected by line conditions SUB SEP Enter the SUB number or SEP number if you want to set the mailbox transmission SID PWD Enter the password for SUB or SEP if required Polling Select this to set Polling communications e Blank Select the blank box when you do not want to perform polling e Transmission Select this to perform Polling Reservation that allows users to store the document in the memory e Received Select this to perform Turnaround Polling that allows users to poll another fax after transmitting documents to the remote fax on the same phone call You can select Transmission when you have created a template for Fax InternetFax not to be Saved as file When Fax InternetFax and Save as file setting are combined this item will be unselectable and will not be displayed 11 Password Enter the 4 digit security code for the document to be stored or received 12 Fax Number Security When you select Transmission at the Polling box enter the security fax number that allows polling of stored document When you select Received at the Polling box enter the security fax number to poll the documents from remote faxes 13 Delayed Transmit If you enable the delayed communications for this agent enter the day and time to send a document Delayed transmission is disabled when the dat
469. twork Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Fax Counter Displays the number of pages scanned by fax reception Counter Tab Page Overview 105 LJ Department Management screen This screen displays total counter information for each department Department Management Enter a department code to access department counters Department Code Number Department Name Dept Code Total Printing Total Scanning Fax Transmission Fax Reception 1 Departme f tName01 1234 0 0 0 0 Item name Description Department Code Enter the department code which you want to check and click the Enter button Number Displays the registered department number Department Name Displays the department name Click a department name link to check the information P 107 Department Information screen Dept Code Displays the department code Total Printing Displays the number of pages printed by copy operations Total Scanning Displays the number of pages scanned by scan operations Fax Transmission Displays the number of pages transmitted via fax Fax Reception Displays the number of pages received via fax Q Department Counter screen lt access policy mode gt Department Counter Number Department Name Dept Code Total Printing Total Scanning Fax Transmission Fax Reception Departr J ntName01 123416 0 0 otNameO2 2344 7 0 ntName03 3451 S 0 ntName04 456
470. ty How to Set and How to Operate e If atleast one of the registered LDAP directory services requires the SSL you must enable the Enable SSL option When the Enable SSL option is enabled this equipment will connect the registered LDAP directory services using SSL first Then if the connection fails using SSL this will connect to the registered LDAP directory service without using SSL Therefore even if you enable the Enable SSL option this equipment can also connect to an LDAP directory service that does not require the SSL e Not all operating systems support SSL for all protocols SSL Port Number Enter the port number to access the LDAP server using SSL You can enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 Generally the default value 636 is used 282 Maintenance Item List W Notification settings You can receive information on your equipment by E mail Tip The Notification submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List LL P 283 Setting up Email Setting LL P 284 Setting up System Message Notification Events LJ P 285 Setting up Job Notification Events Maintenance ad Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delet
471. u can enter up to 20 characters including numbers sharp marks and asterisks You can also specify the sender s fax number to enable the Inbound Fax routing when registering a Forward mailbox If you specify the sender s fax number here the faxes that are received from the specified fax number will be routed according to the mailbox settings e The Inbound Fax routing is available only for a Forward mailbox If you select Confidential or Bulletin Board as an agent you cannot specify the fax number When a fax is sent from the specified fax number with a box number or sub address the Inbound Fax routing will not apply to the transmission and it is processed according to the specified box number or sub address settings Password Enter the box password if you want to protect the mailbox by the password You can enter up to 20 characters including numbers sharp marks and asterisks User Name Enter the user name of this mailbox You can enter up to 30 characters Comment Enter the comment You can enter up to 30 characters Notification This specifies how the notification message will be sent if an error occurs Send Email when an error occurs Transmits a notification message to the specified E mail address when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed Transmits a notification message to the specified E mail address when a job is completed Email Address Enter the E mail addres
472. u can register the directory service properties of the LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol server When a new directory service is added the users can search destinations using the LDAP server Tip The Directory Service submenu can be accessed from the Maintenance menu on the Administration tab See the following pages for how to access it and information on the Maintenance menu LJ P 22 Access Policy Mode LL P 274 Maintenance Item List e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates New 2 ee DEAL Server Directory Service Name Server IP Address Search Base New button Registers the LDAP server that provides a directory service P 281 Directory Service Properties screen Directory Service List Displays a list of registered LDAP servers You can edit the registered details by clicking a directory service name P 281 Directory Service Properties screen Q Directory Service Properties screen You can display this screen by clicking a directory service name in the directly service list or the New button Directory Service Properties Directory Service List Required Directory Service Name LDAP server
473. u of this equipment the scanned data are saved as a single page file This setting is to select whether a subfolder is created or not when you are saving a single page file Single Page Data Saving Directory Save under a subfolder Save without creating a subfolder Item name Description Save under a subfolder A subfolder is created in a specified directory and you can save the file into it Save without creating a subfolder A subfolder is not created and the file is saved in a specified directory Setup Item List 191 192 LJ Setting up File Composition If SINGLE is selected in MULTI SINGLE PAGE on the scan menu of this equipment the scanned data are saved as a single page file This setting is to select a page configuration of a single page file to be saved The added information will also be applied to file names attached to E mails File Composition Scanning 1 page makes 1 file 2 sided originals become 2 files 2 hake to the file like a scanned manuscript 2 sided originals become 1 files When making a single page file this setting is applied This setting is applied to the file attached to an Email Item name Description Scanning 1 page makes 1 file 2 When 1 page of an original is scanned the scanned data are saved as 1 file When you sided originals become 2 files scan 1 sheet of a 2 sided original for example the data of its front side are saved
474. unter Counter How to Set and How to Operate 111 6 Counter Tab Page 112 Counter How to Set and How to Operate User Management Tab Page This section describes how to manage users in TopAccess User Management Tab Page Overview ccccccsecesseeeneceneceeeceneceeeceeesensennsenseoeeeoeeesenees 114 User Accounts Item list lt acceSs policy mode gt ccccccscccceeeeceeeeceeeecueeecuececeeeesneecueesaeeecaeeessausesssaeessenessass 114 Group Management Item list lt acceSs policy MOE ccccceeccccseecceceseeeeeeeceseeeceseeeeeeseeececeueeesseecessaeeeeessaaees 121 Role Management Item list lt accesSs policy mode gt ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeceeeeseeeesaeessaeessaeeseeeseueesesaeeesaees 123 Department Management Item list lt access policy MOCE gt cccccccceccceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseueesaeseseeeeseeeesaees 128 131 Export Import Item list lt access policy mode gt User Management Tab Page Overview LL P 114 User Accounts Item list lt access policy mode gt LL P 121 Group Management Item list lt access policy mode gt LL P 123 Role Management Item list lt access policy mode gt LL P 128 Department Management Item list lt access policy mode gt 4 P 131 Export Import Item list lt access policy mode gt Mi User Accounts Item list lt access policy mode gt
475. up Definition Information Dilfinition Information a a I Edit Reset No Name 001 te 001 Item name Description Edit button Allows you to edit the extended field definition P 320 Definition Properties screen Reset button Allows you to delete the extended field definition No Displays the extended field definition number Name Displays the extended field definition name LI Setting up Extended Field settings Extended Field settings Date Item name Description New button Allows you to add a extended field property P 319 Extended Fields Properties screen Field Number Displays the extended field property number Field Name Displays the extended field property name Display Name Displays the caption of the extended field property for the display on the control panel Mandatory Input Displays whether the extended field property is a mandatory entry or not Hidden Attribute Displays whether the extended field property is a hidden item on the control panel Input Method Displays the type of the extended field property Minimum Value Displays the minimum value for the extended field property O COIN OO oO P OTN Maximum Value Displays the maximum value for the extended field property Default Value Displays the default value for the extended field property Date Displays the default date for the ex
476. urnal e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration User Management Administration View Logs Reception Journal core PrintLog Transmission Journal Reception Journal Scan Log Message Log Line User Name Domain Name LDAP Server Item name Description No Displays the serial number of the journals File No Displays the file number to identify the received job Date Time Displays the date and time of receiving the job Duration Displays the time taken for the receptions If it takes more than 1 hour 59 59 is indicated Pages Displays the number of pages of the received job From Name Displays the sender s name of the received job From Fax No Email Displays the fax number or E mail address of the sender for the received job Dept Displays the department code if the department management is enabled OOOI NI OO oa BP WwW ND Mode Displays the reception mode Status Displays the result of the reception Line Displays the line used User Name Displays the user account name of the owner of the received job Domain Name LDAP Server Displays the domain name or LDAP server of the user account who was the owner of the received job The reception mode is displayed by a combination of a 2 digit letter code a 3 digit numeric code and up to a 4 digit supplemental code For example EC 603 2 digit r 1st numeri i rd numeri P digit ene code
477. ust be from 1 to 32 one byte alphanumerical characters e The user password must differ from the master password These passwords can be re entered only by an authorized user Users cannot change the settings of the Encryption Level box and the Authority box noted below if they are not authorized to change the master password For the details of the encryption setting refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Ask the administrator for resetting these passwords File Name Select how the scanned file will be named Select DocYYMMDD to name it as described or enter the desired file name in the box When you want to add the date and time in the file name select the Add the date and time to a file name check box Tip When Meta Scan is selected if you select Add the date and time to a file name in File Name it is also applied to the meta data file name Fragment Message Size Select the size of the message fragmentation No Fragmentation is set as the default Registration Tab Page Overview 6 7 Save as file Setting Private template In the Save as file Setting page you can specify how and where a scanned file will be stored Save as file Setting 1 _ File Format TIFF Multi Encryption Encryption Level 128 bit AES Encryption Authority Printing Change of Documents Content Copying or Extraction Content Extraction for accessibility Select following 2 items Use local folder St
478. v6 Selecting Save in the Main Window is required to Save the new settings IPv6 Enable IPv6 Enable v LLMNR Disable v Link Local Address Manual IP Address Prefix Length Gateway Use DHCPv6 Server for options Use Stateless Address Use DHCPyv6 Server for IP Address M flag Use DHCPv6 Server for options O flag FQDN Option Update Method Server Io IP Address Prefix Length Gateway 1 2 3 4 6 7 6 Use Stateful Address Use DHCPY6 Server for IP Address Use DHCPY6 Server for options FQDN Option Update Method Server IP Address Prefix Length Gateway o Enable IPv6 Select whether the IPv6 protocol is enabled or disabled Disable is set as the default LLMNR If IPv6 is enabled select whether LLMNR is enabled or disabled Disable is set as the default Link Local Address The automatically generated unique IP Address used for the IPv6 is displayed Manual You assign the IPv6 address prefix and default gateway manually In this mode you can assign one Pv6 address to this equipment IP Address Assign the IPv6 address for this equipment Specify within the range from 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to fff fiT TERR TR PP PTF Prefix Length Assign the prefix length for the IPv6 address Specify within the range from O0 to 128 0 is set as the default Gateway Assign the default gateway address Specify within the
479. vacy Password 12 Enable Authentication Trap Enable v 1 3 Enable Alerts Trap Enable v 14 IP Trap Address IP Trap Address2 IP Trap Address3 IP Trap Address4 IP Trap Address5 IP Trap Address6 IP Trap Address IP Trap Address8 IP Trap Address9 OF OF OF oO OF CO CO CO LO IP Trap Address10 0 OF Oo oF oO CO CO dmcCO dhmcOl LhUcOhY Lc IP Trap Community public IPX Trap Address Enable SNMP V1 V2 Select whether SNMP V1 V2 monitoring with MIB is enabled or disabled This must be enabled to allow users to connect using TopAccessDocMon TWAIN driver File Downloader or the Address Book Viewer Enable is set as the default Enter the SNMP read community name for the SNMP access You can enter up to 31 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash public is set as the default Read Community e tis recommended to change the default Read Community name for security reasons e If changing the Read Community name match the setting with the applications in use Otherwise applications that use MIB TopAccess TWAIN driver File Downloader and AddressBook Viewer will become unavailable The SNMP communication of the printer driver also will be unavailable so that obtaining the configurations confirming the department code and obtaining the available boxes in e Filing will be disabled When you leave the Read Write Community option blank the SN
480. ve the new settings Enable SMTP Server Enable v POT umber 25 Email Address Enable OffRamp Gateway Disab le ay OffRamp Security Enable OffRarp Print Enable Item name Description Enable SMTP Server Select whether this equipment works as an SMTP server or not This must be enabled when you use the Offramp Gateway feature When this is enabled this equipment can receive Internet Faxes or E mails that are forwarded through the SMTP to the domain of this equipment Enable is set as the default Port Number Enter the port number to transmit an Internet Faxes or E mails Generally 25 is used When the same port number as the secondary one in the HTTP setting SSL port number when SSL in the HTTP setting is enabled is selected you cannot access TopAccess or the e Filing web utility If you make a mistake use the control panel of the equipment to change the HTTP setting and enter the correct port number Email Address Enter the E mail address of this equipment When this equipment works as an SMTP server it can receive all Internet Faxes and E mails that contain its domain name If the E mail address of the received document matches the address you set here this equipment prints it You can enter up to 70 alphanumerical characters and symbols other than semicolon and backslash Enable OffRamp Gateway Select whether the OffRamp Gateway transmission is enabled or disabled Disable is se
481. ver the quality of the image XPS Multi Select this to save scanned images as a Multi page XPS file XPS Single Select this to save scanned images separately as Single page XPS files JPEG Select this to save scanned images as JPEG files Tips If the Forced Encryption setting is enabled only the PDF Multi and the PDF Single are selectable for a file format For the Forced Encryption function refer to the User s Manual Advanced Guide Files saved in an XPS format can be used in Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 SP1 or Windows XP SP2 Windows Server 2003 SP1 or later versions with Net Framework 3 0 installed 68 Registration Tab Page Overview Item name Description Encryption Set this for encrypting PDF files if you have selected PDF Multi or PDF Single in the File Format setting Encryption Select this if you want to encrypt PDF files User Password Enter a password for opening encrypted PDF files Master Password Enter a password for changing PDF encryption settings Encryption Level Select an encryption level e 40 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 3 0 PDF V1 1 128 bit RC4 Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 5 0 PDF V1 4 128 bit AES Select this to set an encryption level to the one compatible with Acrobat 7 0 PDF V1 6 Authority Select th
482. will be updated by pressing the RESET button on the control panel or after an time period Setting the Printer e Filing settings 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Setup menu and Printer e Filing submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration Counter User Management Administration General WL Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer e Filing Printer Print Service ICC Profile Print Data Converter EWB ODCA Version R2 The Printer e Filing submenu page is displayed 4 In the Printer e Filing submenu page set the Printer e Filing settings as required e Filing Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup Save Cancel Prinier e Filing Setting Printer e Filing Job Enforcement Continue Automatic Change Of Paper Source Paper Of Different Direction Enforcement Continue Illegal Paper Auto Exit Tray Change Cascade Print Suspend Printing if Stapler Empty Continue Printing when Punch Dust is full N You can set the following in this page P 201 Setting up Printer e Filing Job Enforcement Continue Click Save The confirmation dialog box appears Tip When you click Cancel before saving the setting changes they will not be saved and will return to the current settings
483. work Customize Access Local only Connection Local Area Connection View status l3 Sharing and Discovery Network discovery On File sharing Off Public folder sharing Off Printer sharing Off no printers installed Password protected sharing On O See also Media sharing Off Internet Options d Show me all the files and folders I am sharing Windows Firewall Show me all the shared network folders on this computer Mapping of devices connected on the network appears in the Network Map window 5 Click the icon of this equipment Co gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Map v Searh O A View computers and devices Diagnose and repair 7 Why are some computers and media PC EN Switch devices missing E Y E IPv4 Address 10 10 70 206 MAC Address 00 80 91 4c 46 a4 The following discovered device s can not be placed in the map Click here to see all other devices 4a W Network and Sharing Center MFP 04998820 T66075222H e The name IP address and MAC address of the devices appear when you place the pointer over each icon e If the equipment has the Finisher installed its icon is displayed together with the Finisher icon If not it is displayed by itself Accessing TopAccess 19 1 Overview 6 The TopAccess website appears e Filing Login Device 20 Accessing TopAccess TopAccess Screen Descriptions
484. xample com itify administrator at Email Address 2 itify administrator at Email Address 3 Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 8 Administration Tab Page Select the check boxes of events you want to be notified in System Message Notification Events or Job Notification Events e Filing Logout User Management Administration Maintenance Maintenance Upload Software Remove Software Create Clone File Install Clone File Import Export Delete Files Directory Service Notification Languages System Updates Reboot EJ vyan miy Information Received FaxAnternetFax Error Warning Information Scan Warning Information e Filing Warning Information Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed Received Fax InternetFax Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed Fax Received Forward Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed InternetFAX Received Forward Send Email when an error occurs Send Email when job is completed See the following for details of each event P 284 Setting up System Message Notification Events P 285 Setting up Job Notification Events 6 Click Save Maintenance How to Set and How to Operate 295 E Importing and exporting 296 You can import and export Address Book MailBoxes Template and Combined Template Address Book MailBoxes This section describ
485. xporting a self signed certificate 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Registration User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Managemem Password Policy R2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Select self signed certificate under Device Certificate and click Create Device Certificate self signed certificate Installed 1 2 Ulead Delete SCEP Automatic Not Installed CA Serer Address Primary 10 10 70 111 CA Serer Address Secondary 10 10 70 121 MFP s Address in Common Name inthe Certificate IP Address v Timeout 30 Second s 1 120 CA Challenge note If successful adds CA certificate automatically Signature Algorithm SHAt MDS The Create self signed certificate page is displayed 5 Enter the following items and click Save Create self signed certificate SD Name JP State or Province Name Tokyo Locality Name abcdefghijklm Organization Name ABCDEFG CORPORATION Organizational Unit Name ABCDEFG Dept Common Name MFPOOO00001 exarmple com Email Address User1 example com Validity Period 36 month s 1 99 You can set the following in this page P 257 Create se
486. xt Photo Originals with text and photographs mixed e Text Originals with text or text and line art only e Photo Originals with photographs Exposure Select the type of image density for black and white copies e Auto Select this to set the Auto mode as the default exposure for black and white copies The Auto mode automatically detects the density of the original to make copies at the optimum exposure Manual Select this to set the Manual mode as the default exposure for black and white copies The manual mode allows you to manually specify the density of the original MPT Select the default paper type for the MPT Magazine Sort Select the default page arrangement for magazine sort copies Available only when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed e Open from left Select this to create a booklet that can be read from the left page e Open from right Select this to create a booklet that can be read from the right page 2in1 4in1 Select the default page arrangement for 2in1 4in1 copies e Write Laterally Select this to copy two pages or four pages from left to right or top to bottom When the portrait originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1 this equipment copies them from left to right When the landscape originals are copied using 2in1 or 4in1 this equipment copies them from top to bottom Write Vertically Select this to copy each two pages or four pages from right to left or top to
487. y installed automatically will be deleted as well as the device certificate e Deleting is disabled when no device certificate has been installed automatically B Click OK Windows Internet Explorer Ex Are you sure OK Cancel The device certificate is deleted 6 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Security How to Set and How to Operate 269 W Creating Exporting a client certificate 270 1 2 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode Click the Administration tab Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu Job Status Device Registration Security Security N Authentication Certificate Managemen Password Policy 2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Click Create under Client Certificate e Filing Logout User Management Administration Client Certificate Not Created Create Certificate Setting N Signature Algorithm SHAI v Public Key R5A1024 v The Create Client Certificate page is displayed 5 Enter the following items and click Save Create Client Certificate Coun sion Name JP State or Province Name Tokyo Locality Name abcdefghijklm Organization Name ABCDEFG CORPORATION Organizational Unit Name ABCDEFG Dept Common Name MFPOOO00001 exarmple com Validity Period 36 month s 1 99 Password
488. y with imported CA certification s for the following network settings LL P 158 Setting up SMTP Client LJ P 161 Setting up POP3 Network Service LJ P 162 Setting up FTP Client LI P 168 Setting up Web Services Setting LL P 213 Off Device Customization Architecture settings Yh LL P 281 Directory Service settings 2 2 Security How to Set and How to Operate LI Deleting CA certificate 1 Start TopAccess access policy mode P 22 Access Policy Mode 2 Click the Administration tab 3 Click the Security menu and Certificate Management submenu e Filing Logout Device Job Status Counter User Management Administration Security Security Authentication Certificate Managemen Password Policy 2 The Certificate Management page is displayed 4 Select the CA certificate file that you want to delete in the Certificate Files list and click Delete CA certificate CA Certificate PEM CA certificate OER Browse Certificate Files 157 69 73 250 crt The confirmation dialog box appears 5 Click OK Windows Internet Explorer Are you sure OK r Cancel The CA certificate is deleted 6 Click Save on the Certificate Management submenu Security How to Set and How to Operate 273 Maintenance Item List Tip Users wh

User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents